678273
3
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/344
Next page
OWNER´S MANUAL
Vehicle and Infotainment
ŠKODA KODIAQ
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Date vehicle handover
a)
ŠKODA Partner
Stamp and signature of the vendor
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the vehicle in good condition, have
received information on how to operate it correctly, and have had the
terms of the warranty explained to me.
Signature of the customer
Has the vehicle an extended warranty? Yes
No
Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warranty
b)
Years: or km/mile-
age:
or
Miles:
a)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations, the
date of first registration can be specified instead of the date the vehicle hand-
over.
b)
Depending on which comes first.

565012720AE
1. Vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
(To be filled in by the vendor)
belongs to:
Title, Name / Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:
2. Vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
belongs to:
Title, Name / Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:

565012720AE
Useful links
Before starting off
Adjusting the seat » page 86
Adjusting the steering wheel » page 21
Exterior mirrors » page 84
Headlights/lights » page 74
Windscreen wipers and washers » page 82
Heating and ventilation » page 117
Heated windscreen » page 80
Instrument cluster
Warning lights » page 41
Display operation » page 53
Set the time » page 51
Unlocking and opening
Keyless unlocking (KESSY) » page 62
Luggage compartment lid » page 67
Power windows » page 70
Bonnet » page 278
Connectivity
ŠKODA Connect Online Services » page 13
SmartLink+ » page 176
Connecting Infotainment to the Internet » page 173
Hotspot (WLAN) » page 174
Making telephone calls » page 162
Configuration wizard » page 133
Driving
Automatic gearbox » page 212
Braking and stabilizing systems » page 217
START STOP system » page 206
Adaptive cruise control » page 244
Lane Assist » page 254
Offroad mode » page 219
Parking
Electric parking brake » page 208
Parking the vehicle » page 210
Parking aid » page 221
Reversing camera » page 228
Care and maintenance
Service intervals » page 58
Tyre pressure » page 285
Washing the vehicle » page 269
Folding the windscreen wiper arms securely » page 303
Inspecting and replenishing
Refuelling » page 273
AdBlue
®
» page 275
Engine oil » page 279
Windscreen washer fluid » page 279
Emergencies
Emergency call » page 16
Vehicle tool kit » page 290
Lamp replacement » page 308
Replacing fuses » page 304
Changing a wheel » page 290
Jump-starting » page 296
Towing the vehicle » page 298
Interesting tips
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual » page 10
Tutorial videos » page 11
Digital instrument panel » page 39
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for
new cars 6
Accident data recorder (Event Data
Recorder) 8
Radio equipment - Information on Directive
2014/53/EU 9
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information 10
General 10
Printed Owner's Manual 10
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
10
Tutorial videos
11
Application MyŠKODA App
11
Notes
12
Online services
ŠKODA Connect
13
Service package“ŠKODA Connect”
13
“ŠKODA Connect” website
13
User and vehicle registration, activation of
online services 13
Managing online services 15
Emergency call
16
“Care Connect” Services 17
“Infotainment Online” services
18
Safety
Passive Safety 19
General information
19
Correct and safe seating position 19
Seat belts 22
Using seat belts 22
Inertia reel and belt tensioners 24
Airbag system 25
Description of the airbag system 25
Airbag deactivation 28
Transporting children safely
29
Child seat 29
Fastening systems 32
Operation
Cockpit 37
Overview
36
Instruments and warning lights
38
Instrument cluster
38
Digital instrument cluster 39
Warning lights
41
Information system
51
Driver information system
51
Operation of the information system
53
Driving data (Multifunction display) 54
Menus in the display of the instrument
cluster
56
Service intervals 58
Personalization
59
Unlocking and opening 60
Unlocking and locking 60
Anti-theft alarm system
66
Manually operated tailgate 67
Electric boot lid
67
Window operation 70
Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof 72
Lights and visibility 74
Light 74
Interior lighting 78
Visibility 80
Windscreen wipers and washers 81
Rear view mirror 83
Seats and head restraints
86
Front seats 86
Rear seats 88
Headrests 91
Seat heating and ventilation 92
Heated steering wheel 94
Practical features
95
Passenger compartment features
95
Electrical sockets 104
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
106
Tablet holder
107
Transport of cargo
108
Luggage compartment
108
Variable loading floor in the luggage
compartment (Estate)
114
Transportation on the roof rack
116
Heating and ventilation
117
Heating, manual air conditioning system,
Climatronic
117
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and
ventilation)
122
Infotainment
Introductory information 126
Important information 126
Infotainment Overview 126
3
Table of Contents
Infotainment operation 129
Infotainment operation 129
Voice control 134
Updating the Infotainment software 136
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen,
Bolero 137
Infotainment system settings
137
Radio menu settings 140
Media menu settings 141
Image menu settings 141
Video DVD menu settings 141
Settings 141
SmartLink+ menu settings
142
Navigation menu settings
143
Infotainment settings - Swing 145
Infotainment system settings
145
Radio menu settings
146
Media menu settings
147
Import contactsTelephone menu settings
147
SmartLink+ menu settings 147
Radio
148
service
148
Media
151
service
151
Audio sources 153
Images 157
Image viewer
157
DVD 159
video player
159
Media Command 160
Operation 160
Telephone 162
Introductory information 162
Pairing and connecting 164
Use the SIM card in the external module 167
Telephone functions 168
Text messages (SMS) 171
Data connection
173
Internet connection 173
Connecting via the CarStick device 173
Establishing a connection using a SIM card in
the external module 174
Establishing a connection using the Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile
174
Connecting via WLAN
174
SmartLink 176
Introductory information
176
Android Auto
177
Apple CarPlay
178
MirrorLink
®
179
Application“ŠKODA OneApp” 180
Navigation
181
Introductory information
181
Search for destination and enter
184
Saved destinations
187
Import your own goals 189
Map 191
Route guidance
194
Route 197
Waypoint mode
199
Traffic reports 201
vehicle systems 203
CAR - Vehicle settings
203
Driving
Starting-off and Driving 204
Starting and stopping the engine 204
START STOPsystem 206
Brakes and Parking 208
Manual gear changing and pedals 211
Automatic transmission
211
Running in the engine and economical
driving 214
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 215
Assist systems 216
General information
216
Braking and stabilisation systems
217
Offroadmode
219
Parking aid (ParkPilot) 221
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind
spot”Monitoring
225
Rear View Camera
228
Area View (AreaView)
231
Park Assist 234
Trailer manoeuvring assistant (Trailer Assist)
239
Cruise Control System
241
Speed limiter
242
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
244
Front Assist 249
Select the driving mode (Driving Mode
Selection)
251
Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect
Assist)
253
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist) 254
Traffic jam assistant 256
Assistant for emergencies
257
Traffic sign recognition 257
Fatigue detection system
259
4
Table of Contents
Tyre pressure monitoring 260
Direct tire pressure control system 261
Towing device and trailer 262
Hitch 262
Using hitch 263
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance 267
Service work, adjustments and technical
alterations 267
Cleaning and care 268
Inspecting and replenishing 273
Fuel
273
AdBlue
®
and its refilling
275
Engine compartment
277
Engine oil 279
Coolant
280
Brake fluid
281
Vehicle battery
282
Wheels
285
Wheels and tyres 285
Operating in winter conditions
287
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
289
Emergency equipment
289
Changing a wheel 290
Puncture repair kit 294
Jump-starting
296
Towing the vehicle 298
Remote control and removable light -
changing the battery
299
Emergency unlocking / unlocking of doors 301
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 303
Fuses and light bulbs 304
Fuses 304
Bulbs 308
Technical data
Technical data 313
Basic vehicle data 313
Vehicle-specific details per engine type 317
Index
5
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for new cars
Materials defect liability
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac-
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO a.s. grants you the
ŠKODA warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),”
according to the conditions described below.
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will ensure the following serv-
ices.
Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of paintwork defects on your vehicle that occur within three
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of rust perforation to the bodywork of your vehicle that occurs
within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only rust perforation of
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of rust
perforation on bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
The start of warranty is the date on which the first buyer purchases the new
cars from the ŠKODA Partner
1)
. The ŠKODA Partner must insert this date into
the manufacturer's systems accordingly for your car identified by the Vehicle
Identification Number.
Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re-
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner.
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particu-
lar, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a cour-
tesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages.
The ŠKODA warranty is valid at any ŠKODA service partner.
One of the conditions for service from the ŠKODA warranty is that all service
work has been carried out in a timely and adequate manner and in accordance
with ŠKODA AUTO provisions. It must be proven that service work has been
carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO provisions
when raising a claim from the ŠKODA warranty. In the event of a missed serv-
ice or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA AUTO provisions,
you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you can prove that the
missed service or the failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA
AUTO provisions was not the cause of the defect.
ŠKODA warranty excludes parts that are subject to natural wear such as tyres,
spark plugs, wiper blades, brake pads and brake discs, clutch, bulbs, synchron-
iser rings, batteries etc. The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to
bodywork, installations or conversions provided by third-parties, or vehicle
faults caused as a result. The same applies to accessories that are not factory
installed and/or delivered.
In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the
following:
Unauthorized use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-
loading), improper care and maintenance or unapproved modification to your
vehicle.
Non-compliance with provisions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-sup-
plied instructions.
External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.).
Parts fitted or connected on or in the vehicle whose use has not been ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
rage or was not rectified properly.
It is the customer's responsibility to prove that it was not the cause.
This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from
materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims
from product liability laws.
1)
Due to the requirements of generally binding country-specific regulations,
the date of first registration can be specified instead of the date the vehicle
handover.
6
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for new cars
Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
As part of the mobility warranty, if your car breaks down as a result of an unex-
pected fault when you are on the move, you can access services to ensure
your continued mobility. These services include the following: Breakdown
service at the breakdown location and towing to the ŠKODA Service Partner,
technical assistance by phone or on-site operation.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner
may provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation
(bus, train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc.
More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobili-
ty warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They
will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility war-
ranty with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility war-
ranty coverage available for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA
Service Partner about the possibility of a subsequent agreement.
Optional ŠKODA extended warranty
If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car,
the two-year ŠKODA warranty with regards to all free warranty repairs is ex-
tended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has been
reached, whichever occurs first.
The previously mentioned paint warranty and the warranty against rust perfo-
ration are unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty.
The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils.
The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is
provided by your ŠKODA partner.
Note
The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
7
Liability for defects and ŠKODA Warranty for new cars
Accident data recorder (Event Data Recorder)
The vehicle is equipped with a device that serves as an accident data recorder
(referred to solely as “EDR” from this point). The main purpose of the EDR is
data recording during a traffic accident or other exceptional traffic conditions
(referred to solely as “accident” from this point), where the restraint systems
are activated.
The EDR records the accident in a short time (approximately 10 s), by showing
the following information, for example:
The function of certain vehicle systems,
The driver and passenger seat belt status,
The actuation of the brake and accelerator pedal,
The speed of the vehicle at the time of the accident.
The recorded data helps with the analysis of how the vehicle systems were be-
having shortly before, during and shortly after the accident, thereby ensuring
better information regarding the circumstances under which the accident oc-
curred, which lead to material damage and possibly to personal injury.
The data relating to assist systems in the vehicle is then also recorded. In addi-
tion to the information on whether the affected systems were switched on or
off at the relevant time, whether these were only partially available or were in-
active, there is also the possibility of tracking whether these vehicle functions
controlled, accelerated or braked the vehicle during the accident. Depending
on the vehicle equipment, these functions may include, for example:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Lane Assist
Park Assist
Parking aid
Emergency brake function (Front Assist)
EDR data is only recorded if an accident causes the restraint systems to be ac-
tivated. Under normal driving conditions there is no data recording and there is
no audio or video recording of the vehicle interior or the vehicle environment.
Personal data such as name, gender, age or place where the accident occurred
is also not stored in the EDR. However, third parties such as law enforcement
authorities may use certain resources to connect EDR content to other data
sources, and therefore deduce the identification of some of the people in-
volved in the accident when investigating the causes of the accident.
Reading out the EDR requires special equipment with specific access authori-
zation and a legally prescribed diagnostic connection in the vehicle “on-board
diagnostics”), and the ignition will need to be switched on.
ŠKODA AUTO will not read or otherwise process any accident data from the
EDRwithout the approval of the vehicle owner or other person authorised for
use of the vehicle. Exceptions are specified in the contractual arrangements, or
these are subject to generally binding regulations.
Due to the legal requirements, ŠKODA AUTO is required to monitor the quality
and safety of its products, meaning that it is only entitled to use data from the
EDR for monitoring the product on the market, for further research and devel-
opment, and to improve the quality of the vehicle's safety systems. For the
purpose of research and development, ŠKODA AUTO will also make data avail-
able to third parties. This is done exclusively in anonymous form, i.e. without
any connection to the specific vehicle, the vehicle owner or other authorised
user.
8
Accident data recorder (Event Data Recorder)
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
Fig. 1
ŠKODA websites
Your vehicle has various radio systems.
The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that these systems comply
with the requirements of Directive 2014/53/EU.
To display Information on Directive 2014/53 / EU and the Declaration of
Conformity proceed as follows.
1. Scan the QR code » Fig. 1 or enter the following address in your web
browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
2. Click on “Choose your manual”.
3. Select the desired model - a menu with the manuals is displayed.
4. Select the construction period as well as the language.
5. Select the Information on Directive 2014/53 / EU file in pdf format.
9
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information
General
Read this Owner's Manual carefully, because the operation in accordance with
these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the universally applicable country-specific legal re-
quirements (e.g. for transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use,
road traffic etc.) must always be observed.
Always pay attention when driving! As the driver, you are fully responsible for
road safety.
The Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle, all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
The Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in the Owner's Manual.
The level of equipment in your vehicle refers to your purchase contract for the
vehicle. For any questions regarding the scope of equipment, please contact a
ŠKODA Partner.
The pictures in the Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illus-
trations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to
provide general information.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development
with all vehicles. Changes in terms of supply scope are possible at any time
with regard to design, equipment and technology. The information listed in the
Owner's Manual corresponds to the information available at the time of going
to press.
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-
tions and information contained in the Owner's Manual.
We recommend that the web pages that are referred to in the Owner's Man-
ual are displayed using the classic view. If the web pages are displayed using
the mobile view, they may not contain all necessary information.
Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual includes the most important information relating
to vehicle operation. For complete information, see the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual.
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Fig. 2
ŠKODA websites
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual includes full information regard-
ing vehicle operation.
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual is available on the ŠKODA web-
site and in the MyŠKODA App mobile application.
Displaying the electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Scan the QR code » Fig. 2 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
Click on “Choose your manual”.
Select the desired model.
Select the construction period as well as the language.
Select the desired Owner's Manual.
10
About the Owner's Manual
Tutorial videos
Fig. 3
Tutorial videos
The operation of some vehicle functions can be displayed in the form of video
instructions.
Show menu with video instructions
Scan the QR code » Fig. 3 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals-videos
Note
The video instructions are only available in some language versions.
Application MyŠKODA App
Fig. 4 The MyŠKODA App application is available for devices with the
Android (Google) or iOS (Apple) operating system.
The MyŠKODA App application contains, for example, the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual, quick tips regarding how to resolve certain situations in
relation to the vehicle or a description of the Simply Clever solutions.
You can use this application to get in touch with a ŠKODA partner and to use
its services or to access the breakdown service quickly.
The application can also be used as an RSS reader of favourite websites.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
Installing the MyŠKODA App application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 4 .
11
Introductory information
Notes
Terms used
- Workshop - a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks
for ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist can be a ŠKODA Partner, a ŠKODA
Service Partner, or an independent workshop.
- A workshop that has been contractually author-
ised by ŠKODA AUTO or its distribution partner to perform service work
on ŠKODA vehicles and to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its distribution partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable,
to service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
- Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
- Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
Marker to the next operation step
WARNING
Texts with this symbol draw attention to threats of a serious accident, in-
jury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
“Specialist”
“ŠKODA service partners”
“ŠKODA partners”
“Press”
“Hold”
12
About the Owner's Manual
Online services
ŠKODA Connect
Service package“ŠKODA Connect”
The “ŠKODA Connect” online services extend the vehicle and Infotainment
functions with the “Care Connect” and “Infotainment Online” service pack-
ages.
“ŠKODA Connect” online services are not included in the vehicle delivery. Their
order is made separately via the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” » page 13,
Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”. Rights and obligations of the Parties with
respect to the provision of these services are governed by a separate agree-
ment.
“Care Connect” online services
“Care Connect” services include the following features.
Emergency, information and breakdown call.
Proactive service offering to connect with your ŠKODA service partner.
Remote access to the vehicle using the “ŠKODA Connect” application and
the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website.
For “Care Connect”Services functionality, the vehicle must be within range of a
mobile network through which the “Care Connect”Services are provided.
“Infotainment Online” online services
The “Infotainment Online” services extend the Infotainment functions, e.g.
with the following functions.
Weather forecast.
Filling station search with information on fuel prices.
Online traffic information.
Online destination search.
The Infotainment must be connected to the Internet for the “Infotainment
Online” Services to work» page 173.
Terms of use and availability of services
Current “conditions for the use of the user account” incl. “declaration on the
protection of personal data” can be found on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal”
website » page 13, Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”.
The availability of the services is dependent on the type of vehicle and on the
type of Infotainment system installed in the vehicle. Some services are availa-
ble only in certain countries.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible.
“ŠKODA Connect” website
Fig. 5
Starting the ŠKODA Connect website
The “ŠKODA Connect” website contains information about the online services
and their functions, access to the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website, as well as
the option to download the “ŠKODA Connect” application.
The “ŠKODA Connect” website can be opened by scanning the QR code
» Fig. 5 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
User and vehicle registration, activation of online services
Website “ŠKODA Connect Portal”
Fig. 6 Starting the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
13
ŠKODA Connect
The use of the “ŠKODA Connect” online services requires prior user and vehi-
cle registration on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website as well as activation
of online services in the Infotainment system.
The “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website can be opened by scanning the QR code
» Fig. 6 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
Information on registering for and activating online services
Fig. 7
Instructional video on registration and activation of services
Fig. 8 Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activa-
tion of services
Instructional video on registration and activation of services
Registration and activation are carried out in accordance with the instruction
video.
The instruction video can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 7 or enter-
ing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-video
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activation of
services
Current information on registration and activation of Online Services can be
found in the electronic version of the instructions for the Online Services on
the “ŠKODA Connect” website.
The electronic version of the instructions can be opened by scanning the QR
code » Fig. 8 or by entering the following address in the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-manual
Note
For help with registration, activation as well as the Internet connection, please
contact a ŠKODA service partner.
Activation in Infotainment
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services)
Registration
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during user and vehicle
registration on the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website.
Wait until the message
Registration complete.
is displayed (can take several mi-
nutes)
Confirm the message.
Note
Availability of a GPS signal and a mobile network is required for activation.
In vehicles that only have “Infotainment Online” Services, a GPS signal must
be available and the Infotainment must be connected to the Internet for acti-
vation.
The list of services can be displayed » page 15, Display of service manage-
ment.
Deleting/switching the vehicle user
Deleting the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
Delete owner
Delete
and confirm the delete process.
14
Online services
Changing the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
New owner
Transfer ownership
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during registration of
the new user and during vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website.
If necessary, confirm the change of user by tapping the function surface
Change main users
.
Note
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user account on the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal” website, the user is also deleted in the Infotainment system.
Managing online services
Display of service management
In Services Management, it is possible to display information about the online
services, the validity of their license, or to switch the services on/off.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services)
Services Management
.
To display the designations and the status of the services, select the de-
sired service.
For detailed information about the service tap the function surface
.
To switch the services on/off, tap the function surface with “Checkbox”.
Switch online services on/off in infotainment
Switching
Private mode
function on/off
By switching the
Private mode
function on, the services relating to sending vehi-
cle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of serv-
ices, are deactivated.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services)
Services Management
Private mode
.
Switching “Care Connect” services on/off
By switching the “Care Connect” services off, the services relating to sending
vehicle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of
services, are deactivated.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services)
Services Management
Care Connect
.
Switching “Infotainment Online” services on/off
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (on-
line services)
Services Management
Infotainment Online
.
Note
The emergency call remains fully functional after activation of the
Private mode
function or after deactivation of “Care Connect” services. The functions of the
information and breakdown call are limited.
Online services at ŠKODA Switch service partner off/on
Fig. 9
Sticker with the information
about the switched off online
services
It is possible to have the online services switched off/on exclusively by a
ŠKODA service partner.
After turning off the online services, none of the “ŠKODA Connect” online
services are functioning.
To inform the vehicle user that the “ŠKODA Connect” online services, including
the emergency call are out of order, the service partner applies the the sticker
» Fig. 9 at a visible point in the vehicle (eg at the roof cladding). This Sticker
should not be removed for as long as the online services are off.
15
ŠKODA Connect
CAUTION
It should be noted that the emergency, information and panning call is not
available after switching off the online services. For this reason, no auto-
matic emergency call is made in the event of a serious car accident.
Status Symbols of Online Services
Fig. 10
Status symbols of online serv-
ices
In the Infotainment » Fig. 10 status line, information on the status of the Online
Services is displayed.
The “ŠKODA Connect” online services are available. At the same time the
symbol of the connected network type can be displayed.
The connection to the “ŠKODA Connect” online services is being estab-
lished.
Localisation services are restricted or disabled. Detailed information about
online services can be displayed » page 15, Display of service management.
Localisation services are enabled. Detailed information about online serv-
ices can be displayed » page 15, Display of service management.
localisation services
For the complete functionality of some online services, activated localisation
services are required.
Localisation services include, for example, information on the last parking posi-
tion, area notification or speed notification.
When localisation services are active, one of the following symbols will be dis-
played in the status line in the Infotainment screen
D
» Fig. 10.
A
B
C
D
Emergency call
Fig. 11 Emergency call button
Serious accident
In the event of an accident with an air bag or belt tensioner release, a call to
the emergency call centre is automatically started. The emergency call centre
simultaneously receives information on the accident, e.g. the location and se-
verity of the accident, the number of occupants with fastened seatbelts and
the vehicle identification number (VIN).
Minor accident
The option for establishing a connection to the emergency call centre or to the
breakdown service appears in the Infotainment screen.
Manual start of a call with the emergency call centre
Press and hold the
B
» Fig. 11 button.
In the Infotainment screen or on the instrument cluster display, confirm the
connection setup.
The call can be started manually, for example, if you are reporting an accident
in which you were not directly involved.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 11.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Not illumiated - the system is switched off » page 15.
Note
The emergency service is functional even without user registration and activa-
tion of services.
16
Online services
“Care Connect” Services
Proactive service
Fig. 12 Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services
The proactive service provides an overview of the technical status of your ve-
hicle and on any due service events. It is also possible to establish a connection
to the information or breakdown call centre.
Buttons and warning lights of “Care Connect”services » Fig. 12
Warning light for system status.
Press this button to establish a call to the information number in the
event of problems with the online services or for information regarding
the products and services of the ŠKODA brand.
Press this button to establish a call to the breakdown number in the event
of a breakdown.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 12.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the “ŠKODA
Connect” website» page 13.
A
B
C
Remote access to the vehicle
Fig. 13 ŠKODA Connect application
With the remote access to the vehicle service, you can access some vehicle
functions via the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” website or the “ŠKODA Connect”
application installed on your mobile device.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
Installing the “ŠKODA Connect” mobile application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 13 .
Remote access to the vehicle includes, for example, the following services.
Driving data.
Vehicle condition.
Last parking position.
Vehicle unlocking and vehicle locking.
Online operation of the auxiliary heater.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the “ŠKODA
Connect” website» page 13.
17
ŠKODA Connect
“Infotainment Online” services
Main menu and overview of services
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Fig. 14
Main menu
These services extend the functionality of the Internet-connected Infotain-
ment.
To display the main menu » Fig. 14, tap the

sensor field and then tap the
function surface
.
News from the RSS channels set in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” website
Online search for filling stations with information on fuel prices » page 186
Online search for car parks with information on free parking spaces
» page 186
Weather forecast near the vehicle position, the destination of the route or
in the vicinity of the selected location
Online destination search » page 184
Import of the destinations created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” website » page 190
Import of the routes created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal” website » page 198
Online updating of the navigation data (valid for the infotainment Colum-
bus) and import of POI Categories » page 182
Conditions for the use of online services
Settings of Online Services » page 139
For more information on the available services, see the “ŠKODA Connect”
website» page 13.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this interim period of validity, content changes of these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the “ŠKODA
Connect” website» page 13.
18
Online services
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Introduction
This section of the manual includes important information on the subject of
passive safety. We have combined everything here which you should be famili-
ar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of children and any-
thing similar.
Other important safety information can also be found in the following chap-
ters of this Owner´s Manual. The Owner´s Manual should therefore always be
in the vehicle.
Before setting off
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
Check the function of the lighting and turn signal systems.
Check the function of the wipers and check the wiper blades for wear.
Check the windscreen washer fluid level.
Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
that the mirrors are not covered.
Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant level.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle.
Close all doors as well as the bonnet and boot lid.
Ensure that no parts and components are visibly loose in the vehicle.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children by using a suitable child seat » page 29, Transporting chil-
dren safely.
Adopt the correct seated position. Instruct your passengers to assume the
correct seated position » page 19, Correct and safe seating position.
Driving safety
In the interests of traffic safety, the following information must be observed.
Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g.
by your passengers or mobile telephone calls).
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol or drugs).
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
Correct and safe seating position
Introduction
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not sit only on the front part of the seat.
Do not sit facing to the side.
Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your limbs out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the seat cushion.
19
Passive Safety
WARNING
The adjustable seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match
the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened proper-
ly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 29, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury!
WARNING
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries.
Driver’s correct seating position
Fig. 15
Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel
position
Read and observe on page 20 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
For vehicles equipped with driver knee airbags, adjust the driver's seat in a
forward/back direction so that there is a gap of at least 6 cm between the
legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the knee airbag » Fig. 15 -
B
.
Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 15 -
A
.
Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with integrated headr-
ests) » Fig. 15 -
C
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
WARNING
Maintain a distance of at least 25 cm from the steering wheel, and a dis-
tance of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dash panel at the height of
the knee airbag. Not maintaining this minimum distance will mean that the
airbag system will not be able to properly protect you - hazard!
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 15. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, in the event
of airbag deployment, you could suffer serious injury to the arms, hands
and head.
Ensure that no objects are located in the driver's footwell, as they could
lodge in the pedal system whilst driving. You would then no longer be able
to operate the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
20
Safety
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 16 Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read and observe on page 20 first.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
Swing the safety lever under the steering wheel in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 16.
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in direction of arrow
2
.
Pull the holder in arrow direction
3
until the stop.
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving only when
the vehicle is stationary!
The safety lever must always be locked after adjusting so that the steer-
ing wheel cannot accidentally change position – risk of accident!
Correct seating position of the passenger
Read and observe on page 20 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 15 on page 20 -
C
(not for seats
with integrated headrests).
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
WARNING
Ensure a distance of at least 25 cm to the dashboard, otherwise the air-
bag system will not be able to protect you properly - risk of death!
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you could suffer fatal injuries by adopting an incorrect
seated position!
Correct seating position of the passengers in the second or third
seat row
Read and observe on page 20 first.
For passenger safety on the rear seats and to reduce the risk of injury in the
event of an accident, the following information must be observed.
Adjust the headrests so that the top edge of the headrest is at the same
level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 15 on page 20 -
C
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 22, Using seat belts.
21
Passive Safety
Seat belts
Using seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
The seat belts reduce the kinetic energy considerably. They also prevent un-
controlled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
When transporting children, observe the following information» page 29,
Transporting children safely.
WARNING
Put the seat belt on before starting any journey! This also applies to other
passengers - there is a danger of injury!
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
» page 19, Correct and safe seating position.
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the rear
otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twis-
ted, or chafe against any sharp edges.
Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of safety belts
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
count across your neck.
No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to-
gether.
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
WARNING (Continued)
Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
Do not attach clamps or similar objects to the belt - the function of the
belt retractor could be restricted.
The seat belts for second and third row of seats can only fulfil their func-
tion reliably if the rear seat backrests are correctly locked into position
» page 88.
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of safety belts
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
pair the proper operation of the inertia reel » page 272.
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If parts of the
belt system become damaged (e.g. the belt webbing, the belt connections,
the inertia reel, the locking part etc.), the respective seat belt must be re-
placed by a specialist garage immediately.
Seat belts which have been subjected to stress in an accident must be re-
placed by a specialist garage. Also check the seat belt anchors.
Correct routing of seat belt
Fig. 17 Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap
belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
22
Safety
Fig. 18 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Read and observe on page 22 first.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder part of the belt must run approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (never across your neck) and fit well against your upper body » Fig. 17
-
.
The lap part of the belt must run lap part of the belt must run in front of the
pelvis (must never run across your stomach) and must always fit snugly
» Fig. 17 -
.
In the case of pregnant women, the lap part of the belt must be positioned as
low as possible on the pelvis to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower abdo-
men » Fig. 17 - .
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Push the seat belt guide loop upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 18 -
.
or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows
1
and push the
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 18 - .
Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place and that the belt is blocked reliably » page 24, Iner-
tia reels.
WARNING
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in
minor accidents.
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries as your body is
moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
suddenly held firm by the belt.
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. specta-
cles, ball-point pens, keys, etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 19
Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
23
Seat belts
Fig. 20 Fasten/unfasten seat belt in the third row
Read and observe on page 22 first.
Before fastening
Adjust the headrest properly (does not apply to seats with integrated headr-
ests).
Adjust the seat (applies for the front seats and the second row).
Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
Fasten - in front and in the second row
Slowly pull the belt over the chest and pelvis.
Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle for the seat » Fig. 19 -
until it
audibly clicks into place.
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Unfasten - in front and in the second row
Hold the lock tongue and press the red button in the belt buckle » Fig. 19 -
.
The lock tongue pops out.
Feed the belt back manually so that the seat belt is not twisted and the belt
webbing rolls up completely.
Fasten - in the third row of seats
Slowly pull down the belt on the lock tongue
A
» Fig. 20 in the arrow direc-
tion
1
.
Insert the lock tongue
A
into the lock in the direction of arrow
2
until it
clicks.
Pull the belt on the lock tongue
B
slowly across the chest and pelvis in the
direction of arrow
3
.
Insert the lock tongue
B
in the other lock in the direction of arrow
4
stuck,
until it clicks.
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Unfasten - in the third row of seats
Grip the lock tongue
A
» Fig. 20and press the red button in the lock tongue,
the lock tongue pops out.
Grip the lock tongue
B
and press the red button in the seat belt buckle; the
lock tongue pops out.
Feed the belt back manually so that the seat belt is not twisted and the belt
webbing rolls up completely.
WARNING
The slot of the belt tongue must not be blocked, otherwise the belt tongue
will not lock in place properly.
Inertia reel and belt tensioners
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
When pulling slowly on the seat belt, the belt can move freely. When pulling
sharply on the seat belt, the movement is locked by the inertia reel. The belts
also lock when full braking, when the car accelerates, when driving downhill
and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have the inertia reel
inspected immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
The safety for the driver, front passenger and the two passengers on the outer
seats of the second row of seats who are wearing seat belts is enhanced by
the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front seats and the outer
seats of the second row of seats.
If there is a collision with a certain severity the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a roll-over, minor collisions or
in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
24
Safety
WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
Note
The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
Reversible belt tensioners
As part of the proactive passenger protection system, reversible seat belts in-
crease the safety of the belted up driver and front passenger.
In critical driving situations the seat belt is tensioned tightly over the body and
then released again by the reversible belt tensioner.
Further information » page 253, Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect
Assist).
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Introduction
As a supplement to the seat belts, the airbag system provides additional pas-
senger protection in the event of severe frontal and side collisions.
The best possible protective effect of the airbag can only be achieved if the
seat belts are applied properly. The airbag is not a substitute for the seat
belts.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 44.
System description
Fig. 21 Airbag installation points
Installation locations of airbags » Fig. 21
Front airbags
Driver's knee airbag
Front side airbags
Rear side airbags
Head airbags
A
B
C
D
E
25
Airbag system
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the remaining body parts is
thus reduced.
Front airbags - head and upper body. The airbags can be identified by the
lettering  featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the
passenger side.
Driver's knee airbag - Legs. The airbag features the lettering  on the
dashboard on the driver's side.
Side airbags - for the entire upper body (chest, stomach, pelvis) on the side
next to the door. The side air bags can be identified by a label with the letter-
ing  marked on the front seat backrests. The rear side airbags are provi-
ded with the lettering  in between the entrance area and the rear seat
backrest.
Head airbags - head and neck. The airbags are provided with the lettering

marked on the B-pillar cladding.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts.
Individual airbags.
Warning light
in the instrument cluster» page 44.
Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 28.
Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 28.
Airbag deployment
Fig. 22 Inflated airbags
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
When triggered, the airbag is filled with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the
airbag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
Upon inflation of the airbag, smoke is released. This is not an indication of a
fire in the vehicle.
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. Important here is the hardness of the ob-
ject on which the vehicle impacts, the impact angle, the vehicle speed, etc.
Deceleration during impact plays an important role in the deployment of the
airbags. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured remains be-
low the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the
bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
Driver's front airbag.
Front passenger airbag.
Driver's knee airbag
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side
collision.
Front side airbag.
Rear side airbag.
Head airbag.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
The hazard warning lights are switched on.
All doors are unlocked.
The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is
switched on - switch ).
When there is no air bag deployment?
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment.
26
Safety
Safety instructions
Fig. 23
Safe distance from the steering
wheel and the dashboard
WARNING
General information
The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer proper protection
if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 19.
The airbag develops considerable forces when triggered, which can lead
to serious injuries or even death if the correct seating position or seated
position is not observed. This applies in particular to children who are trans-
ported without using a suitable child safety seat » page 31.
If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
the event of an accident.
The airbag system must be replaced if it has been deployed.
In the area of the front airbag and the knee airbag, the surface of the
steering wheel and the dashboard should be cleaned using only a dry cloth
or one that has been dampened with water.
WARNING
Information about front airbags
It is important for the driver and front passenger to maintain a minimum
distance of 25 cm from the steering wheel or the control panel » Fig. 23 -
A
, If you do not observe this distance, the airbag cannot protect you - risk
to life! The front seats and the head restraints must always be correctly ad-
justed to match the body size of the occupant.
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing
child seat on the front passenger seat » page 28, Airbag deactivation. If
this is not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal in-
juries if the front passenger airbag is deployed.
WARNING (Continued)
No other persons, animals or objects may be positioned in front of the oc-
cupants on the front seats in the deployment area of the front air bags.
The steering wheel and the surface of the dashboard on the front passen-
ger side must not have stickers attached, covered or modified in any other
way. No parts (e.g. cup holders, mobile telephone mounts etc.( should be
mounted in the vicinity of the airbag installation locations and in the airbag
deployment area.
Never place objects on the surface of the dashboard on the front passen-
ger side.
WARNING
Information about knee airbags
Adjust the driver's seat in a forward/back direction so that there is a gap
of at least 6 cm between the legs and the dashboard in the vicinity of the
knee airbag » Fig. 23 -
B
. If it is not possible to meet this requirement due
to your body size, visit a specialist garage.
The surface of the airbag module in the lower part of the dash panel be-
low the steering column not have stickers attached, be covered or modi-
fied in any other way. Nothing may be attached to the cover of the airbag
module or located within the immediate vicinity.
Do not attach any bulky and heavy objects (bunch of keys etc.) to the ig-
nition key. These can be ejected by the knee airbag when it is deployed and
can cause injuries.
WARNING
Information about for side and head airbags
No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be loca-
ted in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury!
Hang only light clothing on clothes hooks in the vehicle. Do not leave any
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets of the clothing. Do not use clothes
hangers to hang the clothing.
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further informa-
tion » page 268.
27
Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
No excessive forces, such as knocks, kicks etc., should be exerted on the
seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side air bags. The side air-
bags would not be deployed in such a case!
Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
ger seats must only be of the type expressly authorized by ŠKODA. In view
of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use of
non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the pro-
tective function of the side airbag.
Have any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installa-
tion point of the side airbags repaired immediately by a specialist garage.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the seat)
must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
» page 268.
No modifications should be made to parts of the airbag system, to the
front bumper or to the body.
Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
Airbag deactivation
Deactivating airbags
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
» Fig. 24 on page 28 -
.
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA service partner to deactivate any other
airbags.
The airbag deactivation is displayed by the warning light » page 44.
Deactivating an airbag should be considered in cases such as the ones
below.
A child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, in which the child is
transported with its back to the direction of travel » page 29.
Despite correct adjustment of the driver's seat, the distance of at least
25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest cannot be main-
tained.
Additional controls for drivers with a physical disability are installed in the ve-
hicle.
Special seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags) are installed in the
vehicle.
WARNING
If an airbag is deactivated upon the sale of the vehicle, the buyer must be
informed of this!
Switch off front passenger airbag
Fig. 24 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
light for front passenger airbag
Positions of the key switch » Fig. 24 -
The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the indicator light  » Fig. 24 illuminates
The front passenger airbag is activated - after the ignition is switched on,
the indicator light illuminates for 65 seconds 
Switch off
Switch off the ignition.
Open the passenger door.


28
Safety
Fold out the key bit completely» . With a KESSY key, remove the emer-
gency key.
Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the passenger door.
Check that the warning light  illuminates after the ignition is switched
on.
Switching on
Switch off the ignition.
Open the passenger door.
Fold out the key bit completely» . With a KESSY key, remove the emer-
gency key.
Carefully insert the key into the slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position

.
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the passenger door.
Check that the warning light

illuminates after the ignition is switched
on.
WARNING
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
If the warning lights   flash, the front passenger airbag will not
be deployed in the event of an accident! Have the airbag system checked
by a specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Introduction
To reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident, children must be trans-
ported in child seats!
The information in this Owner´s Manual as well as the instructions of the child
seat manufacturer must be observed when installing and using the child seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport child seats on
the rear seats. Children should be transported on the front passenger seat only
in exceptional circumstances.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
standard must be used.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: large E within a circle with the test number be-
low.
WARNING
One should never carry children, and also not babies! - on one's lap.
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children might not be capable of leaving the vehicle or helping themselves
independently in the event of an emergency. Can be fatal at very high or
very low temperatures!
The child must be secured in the vehicle during the entire journey! Other-
wise, the child would be thrown through the vehicle in the event of an acci-
dent, causing fatal injuries to both the child and other occupants.
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat as they can suffer severe, or even fatal injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even in mi-
nor accidents.
29
Transporting children safely
WARNING (Continued)
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are running properly.
One should also ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-edged fit-
tings.
When installing the child seat on a seat in the second or third row of
seats, the corresponding front seat must be adjusted so that there is no
contact between the front seat and the child seat or the child being trans-
ported in a child seat.
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
head restraints so that they are as high as possible.
If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even
in the lowest position, you will need to remove them » page 92. After re-
moving the child seat, refit the head restraints.
When using a separate child seat cushion, set the headrest so that the
child's head is flush to the height of the headrest upper edge, but does not
protrude above this » Fig. 15 on page 20
C
.
Note
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 1)
Does not apply to Taiwan
Fig. 25
Warning stickers
Read and observe on page 29 first.
Never use a rear-facing child restraint system on a seat which is protected
by an active airbag positioned in front of it. This could cause serious injury
to the child, even death.
This is indicated also on stickers that are located at the following positions.
On the passenger sun visor » Fig. 25 - .
On the B-pillar on the front passenger side » Fig. 25.
The following instructions must be followed when using a child seat on the
front passenger seat.
The front passenger airbag must be deactivated if using a rear-facing child
seat »
.
If possible, adjust the front passenger seat backrest so that it is as vertical, so
as to ensure secure contact between the passenger seat backrest and the
back of the child seat.
If possible, move the front passenger seat backwards so that there is no con-
tact between the front passenger seat and the child seat behind it.
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
With child safety seats in groups 1, 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around
fittings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not
“jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of in-
jury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the pas-
senger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deploy-
ment area of the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child se-
vere, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
As soon as the child seat, in which the child is transported with their back
in the direction of travel, is no longer used in the front passenger seat, the
front passenger airbag should be switched on again.
30
Safety
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 2)
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 26
Warning stickers
Read and observe on page 29 first.
No babies, infants or children to be carried on the passenger seat.
A sticker to this effect can also be found on the front passenger's sun visor
» Fig. 26.
Child safety and the side airbag
Fig. 27
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly se-
cured – risk from the side air-
bag/Child properly protected by
safety seat
Read and observe on page 29 first.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
» Fig. 27 - .
There must be sufficient room between the child and the area into which the
side airbag will deploy to allow the airbag to provide as much protection as
possible » Fig. 27 - .
Classification of child seats
Read and observe on page 29 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9 - 18 kg
2 15 - 25 kg
3 22-36 kg
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Read and observe on page 29 first.
Overview of the usability of child seats secured with a seat belt on seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
31
Transporting children safely
Group
Passenger seat with activa-
ted front airbag
Passenger seat with de-
activated front airbag
Second row of seats -
outer seats
Second row of seats -
center seat
a)
Third row of seats
a)
b)
0
up to 10 kg
X U
c)
U U X
0+
up to 13 kg
X U
c)
U U X
1
9 - 18 kg
UF U U U X
2
15 - 25 kg
UF U U U L
3
22 - 18 kg
UF U U U L
a)
It is prohibited to attach a child seat with support leg in the middle of the second row and in the third row.
b)
Use the Easy Entry function for access to the third seat row » page 89, When using recommended child seats on the third row of seats, adjust the second row of seats in the /back direction as far forward as possible.
c)
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
U The “Universal” category is suitable for the use of child seats approved in this weight group.
UF The “Universal” category is suitable for the use of forward-facing child seats approved in this weight group.
L Only suitable for recommended child seats of Category 2-3» page 34, Recommended child seats.
X The seat is not suitable for children in this weight group.
Fastening systems
attachment points of the  system
Fig. 28
Labels of the system 

is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.
Two locking eyes for fixing a child seat with the  system are located be-
tween the seat backrest and the seat cushion of the outer rear seats of the
second seat row and front passenger seat.
First, remove the caps
A
in order to access the locking eyes» Fig. 28. After
removing the child seat, replace he caps.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions of the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  system.
Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
intended for the installation of a child seat with the  system – risk of
death!
32
Safety
Note
A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Child seats with the  system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.
Use of child safety seats with the System
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usability of child seats fastened with the  system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class of
the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat
with activated front air
bag
b)
Front passenger seat
with front airbag switched
off
b)
Second row of seats
-
outer seats
c)
Second row of seats
-
center seat
Third row of
seats
0
up to 10 kg
E X X IL X X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X X IL X XD
C
1
9 - 18 kg
D
X X
IL
IUF
X X
C
B
B1
A
2
15 - 25 kg
- X X IL X X
3
22 - 18 kg
- X X IL X X
a)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
b)
If the front passenger seat is fitted with

system attachment points, it is suitable for the installation of an

child seat with “Semi-Universal” approval.
c)
The seat is suitable for the

fixing system.
33
Transporting children safely
IL The seat is suitable for installation of a  child seat with the “Semi-Universal” approval. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child seat with
the  system is approved for your vehicle. Observe the list of vehicles that comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the use of forward-facing child seats approved in this weight group.
X The seat is not fitted with  system attachment points.
Using child seats with the


system
Front passenger seat
with activated front air bag
Front passenger seat
with front airbag switched off
Second row of seats -
outer seats
Second row of seats -
center seat
Third row
of seats
X X i-U X X
The seat is suitable for forward and backward facing  child seats of
the category “Universal”.
The seat is not suitable for the child seat of the category “Universal”.
Attachment points of the   system
Fig. 29
Attachment points of the 
-system
i-U
X
  is a fastening system, which restricts the movement of the upper part
of the child seat.
The attachment points
A
for attaching the attachment belt of a child seat
with the   system are located on the rear of the seat backrests on the
second row of seats » Fig. 29.
Some country-specific models can also be fitted with an attachment point
B
» Fig. 29.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the   system.
Only use child seats with the   system on the seats equipped with
attachment points with the logo  .
Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
Recommended child seats
Group Manufacturer Type Attachment Order number Approval number (E1 ...)
0+
up to 13 kg
Britax Römer Baby Safe Plus Isofix base frame 1ST019907 04 301146
1
9 - 18 kg
Britax Römer Duo Plus TT  and   DDA000006 04 301133
34
Safety
Group Manufacturer Type Attachment Order number Approval number (E1 ...)
2-3
15 - 18 kg
Britax Römer Kidfix XP
a)
Safety and  / safety
belt
b)
000019906K 04 301198
Britax Römer Kidfix II XP
Safety and  / safety
belt
b)
000019906L 04 301323
a)
For optimum protection, especially in the case of a side collision, it is recommended to use this child seat together with back part. For the third row only, this child seat can be used in addition to the back part (the use of a
separate child seat cushion is not possible).
b)
Only use the fastening means of the seat belt if the seat is not equipped with the ISOFIX system.
35
Transporting children safely
Fig. 30 Cockpit example for LHD
36
Operation
Operation
Cockpit
Overview
Electric power windows 70
Electric exterior mirror adjustment
84
Door opening lever 64
Air outlet vents 122
Parking ticket holder 96
Operating lever (depending on equipment):
Indicator light and high-beam headlight 75
Speed regulating system
241
Speed limiter 242
Headlight assist
76
Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front airbag
25
Buttons for operating the information system
51
Instrument cluster
38
Operating lever:
Windscreen wipers and washers
81
Information system
51
Infotainment
126
Interior rear-view mirror
84
Tray (up / down) on the passenger side 101
Front passenger airbag 25
External Infotainment module (in the passenger storage com-
partment) 128
Key switch for front passenger airbag deactivation (on the dash-
board side)
28
Power window in the front passenger door 70
Storage compartment
96
Light switch 74
Button for the boot lid
67
Bonnet release lever 278
Storage compartment 96
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Operating lever for adaptive cruise control 246
Steering wheel locking lever 21
Depending on equipment fitted:
Ignition lock 205
Starter button 205
Bar with buttons and warning lights (depending on the equip-
ment fitted):
START STOP
206
Park Assist 234
Parking aid 221
Area View 231
Hazard lights 78
Central locking system 62
 /  Warning lights for the front seat passenger air-
bag
28
Depending on equipment fitted:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox)
211
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
212
Bars with buttons (depending on the equipment fitted):
Selection of travel mode 251
Auto Hold
209
Electric parking brake
208
Stabilisation control ESC / Traction control TCS
217, 218
Offroad mode 219
Storage compartment 97
Depending on equipment fitted:
Phone box 97
12 volt power socket 104
Cigarette lighter
107
Ashtrays
106
USB input
98
Controls for heating/air conditioning
118
Note
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in » Fig. 30.
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
37
Cockpit
Instruments and warning lights
Instrument cluster
Introduction
Fig. 31
Instrument cluster
Engine revolutions counter » page 38
with warning lights » page 41
Display » page 51
Speedometer
with warning lights » page 41
Coolant temperature gauge » page 38
Bar with warning lights » page 41
Operation button
Set the time » page 51
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 51
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
» page 58
Fuel gauge » page 39
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to
switch on the lights in due time.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in
the menu

/ → →
Light
.
Engine revolutions counter
The tachometer
1
» Fig. 31 on page 38 shows the actual engine speed per mi-
nute.
The beginning of the tachometer red scale range indicates the maximum per-
mitted speed for an engine that has been driven-in and has reached operating
temperature.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached, or select mode D/S on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 51.
CAUTION
The pointer of the engine revolutions counter must reach the red area for only
a short time - there is a risk of engine damage!
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 32 Coolant temperature gauge: Version 1/version 2
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
Cold area, The engine has not yet reached its operating temperature.
Avoid high speeds and high engine loads.
The operating range
High temperature range, the warning light illuminates in the instrument
cluster » page 47.
A
B
C
38
Operation
Fuel gauge
Fig. 33 Fuel gauge: Version 1/version 2
The display only works if the ignition is switched on.
The capacity of the fuel tank is approximately 58 litres for vehicles with front-
wheel drive, and approximately 60 litres for vehicles with four-wheel drive.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level
A
, the » Fig. 33 indicator light in the
instrument cluster
illuminates » page 46.
WARNING
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely – risk of accident!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the
exhaust system.
Note
The arrow next to the symbol within the fuel gauge displays the installa-
tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
Display in the rear centre console
Fig. 34
Display in rear centre console
The following information is shown in the display depending on the equipment
installed on the vehicle.
Time
Exterior temperature information
Information on the Climatronic set temperature for occupants in the rear
seats
Digital instrument cluster
Introduction
Fig. 35 Digital instrument panel
Bar with warning lights » page 41
Coolant temperature gauge » page 38
1
2
39
Instruments and warning lights
Display » page 40
Fuel gauge » page 39
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
on the ambient lighting throughout.
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in
the menu

/ → →
Light
.
Display in the digital instrument cluster
Fig. 36
Display versions / example of the classic display
Display versions (from the left)
Classic display
Advanced display
Modern display
Basic display
Sporty display
Central display area
Additional information
3
4
A
B
C
Operating the instrument cluster
Fig. 37
Buttons/dial on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel
Rotate - Movement in the selected menu / setting values / Manually
change map scale (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Press - confirm selected menu item
Turn and press - switch on automatic change of the map scale (applies to
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Press - Change the display version » Fig. 36 on page 40
Hold - Display the prefix options menu with additional information
Press - display main menu / return to a previous level in the menu
» page 56
pre-selection options for additional information
Fig. 38
Set the pre-selection
option in Infotainment
Select the pre-selection option
Hold the button on the  multi-function steering wheel.
Select and confirm one of the following pre-selection options.
Auto
- additional information is displayed depending on the driving mode se-
lected
Classic
- Information on the engaged gear and the current speed
A

40
Operation
View 1
- adjustable pre-selection option
View 2
- adjustable pre-selection option
View 3
- adjustable pre-selection option
Set the preselection option
The area code options
View 1
.
View 2
and
View 3
can be found in infotainment in
the menu

/ in the
Dig. Instrument cluster
menu item.
The desired additional information can be selected by moving your finger
vertically across the display in the
A
» Fig. 38 areas.
Hold the desired function surface for the preselection option in area
B
to
save the selection.
Warning lights
Introduction
Parking brake » page 42
Brake system » page 42
Front seat belt warning light » page 42
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 42
Power steering
Steering lock (KESSY system)
» page 43
Stabilisation control (ESC)
Traction control (TCS)
» page 43
Traction control (ASR) deactivated » page 43
Antilock brake system (ABS) » page 44
Rear fog light » page 44
Exhaust control system » page 44
Glow plug system (diesel engine) » page 44
 EPC fault light (petrol engine) » page 44
Safety systems » page 44
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Tyre pressure control system (RDK)
» page 45
» page 45
Brake pads » page 46
Fuel reserve » page 46
Lane Assist » page 46
Turning signal system » page 46
Trailer turn signal lights » page 46
Fog lights » page 46
Speed regulating system
Speed limiter
» page 46
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) » page 46
Auto Hold function » page 46
Main beam » page 46
Automatic gearbox » page 47
Rear seat belt warning light » page 47
Alternator » page 47
Coolant » page 47
Engine oil pressure » page 47
Engine oil level » page 48
AdBlue
®
level too low (diesel engine) » page 48
AdBlue
®
error (diesel engine) » page 48
Bulb failure » page 48
Display when the light is switched off » page 48
Particle filter » page 48
Windscreen washer fluid level » page 49
Headlight assist » page 49
START STOP system » page 49
Display of a low temperature » page 49
Water in fuel filter (diesel engine) » page 49
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 49
Distance warning (Front Assist) » page 50
Front Assist » page 50
Emergency call » page 50
Economy mode » page 50
Offroad mode » page 50
Adaptive chassis (DCC) » page 50
Service » page 50
41
Instruments and warning lights
The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go
out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
Warning lights in the display
Depending on the significance, the warning light (danger) or (warning) il-
luminates along with some other warning lights in the display.
Depending on vehicle equipment fitted, some indicator lights can be shown in
the display. For example. the coolant warning light can be shown as follows.
- monochrome (“black and white”) display
- coloured display
WARNING
Ignoring illuminated warning lights and related messages or instructions
in the display of the instrument cluster may lead to serious personal injury
or damage to the vehicle.
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and switch on the hazard
warning lights » page 78. Place the warning triangle at the prescribed dis-
tance.
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. While working
in the engine compartment, be sure to observe the following warnings
» page 277.
Parking brake
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the parking brake is switched on.
Parking brake error
illuminates
Message:
Fault: electronic parking brake
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Parking on a slope that is too steep
illuminates
Message:
Parking brake: gradient too steep. Log book!
Find a parking space on a flat surface or on a slope that is not so steep.
Braking system
Read and observe on page 42 first.
lights up – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the level of the brake fluid
» page 281.
WARNING
If warning light illuminates simultaneously with warning light
» page 44, Anti-lock braking system (ABS), stop driving! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
Front seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
At a speed of more than approximately 30 km/h, the warning light flashes
and an audible warning sounds at the same time.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light
illuminates permanently.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – the ACC delay is not sufficient.
Apply the brake.
For more information about the ACC system » page 244.
42
Operation
Power steering/steering lock (KESSY system)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Fault in the power steering
lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
illuminates - this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces may be greater.
Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance.
If the warning light does not go off, stop the vehicle, do not continue
your journey. Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the warning light does not go off, you can drive on, exercising appropri-
ate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Steering lock defect (KESSY system)
flashes
Message:
Steering lock faulty. Stop!
Park the vehicle, and
stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no
longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components
(e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
flashes
Message:
Steering lock: workshop!
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Steering column lock not unlocked (System KESSY)
flashes
Message:
Steering lock: workshop!
Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock-
ing the steering lock.
If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is re-
quired.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
out, there is a system error.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction control (TCS)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently being activated.
illuminates – there is an ESC or TCS fault.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
If the warning light
comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
switched off for technical reasons.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light
does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
the TCS is fully functional again.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light
comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
For more information on the ESC system » page 217 or TCS system
» page 218.
Traction control (TCS) deactivated
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – the TCS system is disabled.
43
Instruments and warning lights
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
lights up – there is an ABS fault.
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If warning light illuminates simultaneously with warning light
» page 42, Braking system, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist
garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – risk of accident!
Rear fog light
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the rear fog light is switched on.
Emission control system
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Preheating unit (diesel)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come
on or illuminates continuously.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
 EPC warning light (petrol engine)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
 lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Safety systems
Read and observe on page 42 first.
System fault
illuminates
Message:
Error: airbag
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
illuminates for 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
tool
lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
flashes for approximately 12 seconds
Message:
Airbag/belt tensioner deactivated.
ProActive passenger protection
illuminates and the following message is shown in the information cluster
display
Message:
Proactive passenger protection unavailable.
or
ProActive passenger protection: funct. restricted.
44
Operation
The seat belt for the driver and front passenger needs to be replaced.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
When a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not
being triggered in the event of an accident. Therefore, this must be
checked immediately by a specialized garage.
Tyre pressure monitoring
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Change of tyre pressure values
illuminates - there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressures » page 285.
Correct the tyre pressure if necessary or replace the affected wheel
» page 290 or use the repair kit » page 294.
Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 260.
System fault
flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light flashes after starting the engine again, there is a system
error.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Other incidents
The illumination of the warning light can have the following reasons.
The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
Snow chains are mounted.
A wheel has been changed.
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light can be delayed or does not light up at all.
Tyre pressure control system (RDK)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates
Message:
Flat tyre!
The tyre pressure of at least one tyre is below 1.4 bar (20 psi, 150 kPa) or
tyre damage is present.
Check all wheels for external damage and foreign objects.
Park the vehicle, do not continue your journey. Seek help from a special-
ist garage.
illuminates
Message:
Tyre pressures too low!
There is a clear tyre pressure loss. Check the tyre pressure of all tyres.
Change the wheel or proceed with a correspondingly careful driving mode
and immediately enlist the help of a specialist company.
illuminates
Message:
Please check tyre pressures.
A loss of tyre pressure has occurred. Check the tyre pressure of all tyres.
flashes - the system function is temporarily restricted.
Switch the ignition off and on again. If the indicator light continues to flash,
enlist the help of a specialist company.
45
Instruments and warning lights
Brake linings
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the brake pads are worn.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Fuel reserve
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approxi-
mately 6 litres).
Fill up with fuel » page 273.
Note
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The warning lights indicate the status of the Lane Assist system.
More information about the Lane Assist System » page 254.
Turn signal system
Read and observe on page 42 first.
flashes - the left turn signal is switched on.
flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its
normal rate (does not apply when towing).
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Trailer turn signal lights
Read and observe on page 42 first.
flashes - the trailer turn signals are switched on.
If a trailer is hitched and the warning light is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
Check the trailer bulbs.
Fog lights
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the fog lights are switched on.
Speed regulating system/speed limiter
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulating system
and/or the adaptive cruise control or by the speed limiter.
flashes - the speed set with the speed limiter has been exceeded.
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
lights up – apply the brake.
Auto Hold function
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the Auto Hold function is activated.
For more information about the Auto-Hold Function » page 209.
Main beam
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the main beam or headlight flasher is switched on.
46
Operation
Automatic gearbox
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Gearbox overheated
illuminates
Message:
Gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
Transmission overheated. You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
illuminates
Message:
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
If the warning light does not go off,
stop driving! Seek help from a special-
ist garage.
Transmission problem
illuminates
Message:
Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely!
illuminates
Message:
Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear.
Error: gearbox. Speed is limited.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Rear seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
illuminates - a rear seat belt is fastened.
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
and indicates the current belt status!
Generator
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the battery is not being charged while the engine is running.
CAUTION
If in addition to the light the light lights up while driving, stop driving -
There is a risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance
from a specialist garage.
Coolant
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Coolant level too low
illuminates
Message:
Please check the coolant level. Log book!
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool.
Check the coolant level » page 280.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light lights
up again, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
Switch off the ignition.
Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light
lights up
again, stop driving!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Coolant temperature too high
illuminates
Message:
Engine overheat. Stop! Observe log book.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and let it cool.
Continue your journey only after the warning light has disappeared.
Engine oil pressure
Read and observe on page 42 first.
flashes - the engine oil pressure is too low.
47
Instruments and warning lights
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
Even if the oil level is correct, do not drive any further if the warning light
is flashing! Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Engine oil level
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Engine oil level too low
illuminates
Message:
Please add engine oil.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
if necessary.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
onds. If the engine oil is not replenished, the warning light will come on again
after driving about 100 km.
Engine oil level too high
illuminates
Message:
Please reduce oil level.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
In the event of an oil level which is too high, you can drive on, exercising ap-
propriate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Fault on the engine oil level sensor
illuminates
Message:
Oil sensor: please visit workshop.
Immediately drive to the nearest specialist garage with appropriate caution.
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
AdBlue
®
level II low (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Illuminates - AdBlue
®
level too low.
Replenish Add AdBlue
®
» page 275.
AdBlue
®
error (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – there is a fault in the AdBlue
®
system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Lamp failure
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - one of the lamps is faulty.
A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp.
Display when the light is switched off
Read and observe on page 42 first.
Applies to vehicles with the digital instrument cluster.
lit - no light is on.
Message:
Please turn on the light.
Particulate filter
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The particulate filter separates and burns the soot particles from the exhaust.
illuminates - the filter is clogged with soot.
To clean the filter, if allowed by the traffic conditions » , you should drive at a
speed between 50-120 km/h in the recommended gear.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light extinguishes.
48
Operation
If the indicator light does not go out within 30 minutes, the filter was not
cleaned.
Immediately drive to the nearest specialist garage with appropriate caution.
WARNING
Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-
rain and traffic conditions.
The particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a fire haz-
ard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the vehicle at
places where the underside of your vehicle can come into contact with
flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel or
the like.
CAUTION
As long as the warning light illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
As long as the indicator light is lit, the START-STOPfunction is not availa-
ble.
Note
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This supports the correct
function of the particulate filter.
Windscreen washer fluid level
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
Top up the windscreen washer fluid » page 279.
High-beam assistant
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the high beam assistant is activated » page 76, Light Assist.
START-STOPsystem
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The warning lights indicate the status of the START STOP system
» page 206.
Display of a low temperature
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
WARNING
Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road sur-
face! Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside tempera-
ture display that there is no ice on the road.
Water in the fuel filter (diesel engine)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The fuel filter with water separator, filters out dirt and water from the fuel.
If too much water is present in the separator, the following information ap-
pears on the instrument cluster display.
illuminates
Message:
Water in fuel filter. Log book!
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
The warning lights indicate the condition of the ACC system
» page 244.
49
Instruments and warning lights
Front Assist
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini-
mum.
Information on the Front Assist system» page 249.
front Assist
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates
Front Assist has recognised the risk of a collision or automatically triggered
an emergency braking manoeuvre » page 249.
An automatic deactivation of Front Assist took place when activating ESC
Sport » page 217 and when deactivating the ASR » page 218.
Front Assist is not available » page 251.
Illuminates with the lettering

- Front Assist is deactivated » page 251.
emergency call
Read and observe on page 42 first.
lights up – there is a fault in the emergency call system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Economy mode
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the vehicle is in economy mode due to the intervention of the
active cylinder management or due to the neutral position of the automatic
gearbox.
Offroad mode
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates - the Offroad mode is enabled.
illuminates - the hill descent assistant is activated.
flashes (stronger) – the hill descent assistant is engaged at the moment.
Adaptive chassis (DCC)
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – there is a DCC fault.
It is possible to continue driving with due caution. Seek assistance from a
specialist garage immediately.
Service
Read and observe on page 42 first.
illuminates – note regarding a due service appointment » page 58, Display-
ing the distance and days until the next service interval.
50
Operation
Information system
Driver information system
Display in the instrument cluster
Fig. 39
Display overview
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 39.
Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
START STOP system indicator lights
Compass display
Detected traffic signs
Driving data (multifunction display)
Warning lights
Information messages
Door alarm
Eco tips
Service interval display
Outside temperature
Cruise control / speed limiter
Total distance travelled
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning
appears in the display.
1
2
3
4
5
6
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
The counter can be reset by tapping button
A
» Fig. 40 on page 51 or Info-
tainment in the

/
Instrument cluster
menu.
Setting the time
Fig. 40
Button in the instrument cluster
The time can be set in Infotainment in the

time and date
menu or
with the button in the instrument cluster.
Set the time using the button in the instrument cluster
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 40until the
time
is shown in the display.
Release the button
A
and the system switches to the hour setting function.
Press the button
A
again and set the hours.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting.
Press the button
A
again and set the minutes.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting.
Gear recommendation
Fig. 41
Information on the selected
gear / Gear recommendation
51
Information system
A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
Display » Fig. 41
Optimal gear engaged
Gear recommendation (e.g. means that it is advantageous to switch
from 3rd to 4th gear )
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations, such as overtaking.
Vehicle condition
Fig. 42
Vehicle condition
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster.
While the operational faults remain unrectified, the messages are always indi-
cated again. After the message is displayed for the first time, the warning
lights (danger) or (warning) continue to be displayed.
The vehicle condition can be displayed in Infotainment in the menu

/
Vehicle status
.
In the screen, information regarding vehicle condition or function of the tyre
pressure monitor is displayed.
Using the function surfaces select the menu item Vehicle status.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 42
A
Vehicle representation (the zones of the vehicle are shown in different
colours, corresponding to any warning messages that occur. The warn-
ing messages are displayed once you touch the “vehicle”)
 No message/warning messages relating to vehicle status and the num-
ber (if there is only one message, one warning message text is dis-
played)
Display information about the status of the START-STOP system
Activation / deactivation of notes relating to START-STOP-Sys-
tem messages in another screen display
Display information on sporty driving in Infotainment
Fig. 43
Infotainment display
The display of data on sporty driving is used to evaluate current motor values.
To display in the Infotainment menu

/
tap on function surface
Sports
.
Using the functional surfaces the Information sports the menu item is
chosen.
A swipe of the finger vertically across the screen allows three of the following
displays
A
to be shown » Fig. 43.
Boost pressure display
Acceleration display
Power display
Coolant temperature display
Oil temperature display
52
Operation
laptimer
Show (stopwatch) in the infotainment
Fig. 44
Infotainment display
To display in the Infotainment menu

/ tap on function surface
Sports
.
Using the functional surfaces choose the laptimer menu item.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 44
Total time, display of intermediate time for 5 s
Start/stop the time measurement
Current lap time
Statistics - Evaluation / Reset of measured times
New lap - start measuring the next lap time
interim
Stop timing
After the termination of the time measurement, the following functional areas
for the completion of the measurement are displayed on the screen.
The current lap time is saved
The current lap time is not saved
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Only use the
Lap timer
when you are in any traffic situation where you have
full control of the vehicle.
Note
If the measured times are not reset, then these are stored even after turning
off the ignition.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Operation of the information system
Operation using the control lever
Fig. 45
Buttons on the operating lever
Operating the multifunction display
Press (up or down) - select data / set values
Press - display / confirm indication
Operation of the display menus
Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Operation using the multifunctional steering wheel
Fig. 46 Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Switch on/off voice control
Turn - sets the volume
Press - sound on / off
A
B
A
B
A
53
Information system
Skip to next track/station
Switch to previous track/station
Display the assistance systems menu
Depending on equipment:
Operating a digital instrument cluster » page 40
Show previous menu (if one has been selected) / display Telephone
menu
Operating the multifunction display
Turn - select data / set values
Press - display / confirm indication
Operation of the display menus
Hold - display main menu
Press - return to a previous level in the menu
Turn - move in the selected menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Driving data (Multifunction display)
Introduction
The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on.
The units can be adjusted in Infotainment in the menu

/
Units
.
The journey data can be set/reset in Infotainment in the menu

/
Instrument cluster
.
Note
The setting of the information display is stored in the active user account per-
sonalisation » page 59.
Information Overview
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca-
pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value
can increase.

B
B
AdBlue
®
range - drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing
AdBlue
®
tank capacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more effi-
ciently this value can increase. When the system detects that AdBlue
®
can be
refilled, an indication of the minimum and maximum AdBlue
®
refilling quantity
appears.
Average fuel consumption - is calculated continuously since the last time the
memory was deleted. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the
first 100 m driven.
Current fuel consumption - when the vehicle is stationary or slowly moving,
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (--,- km/l appears on models for some
countries).
Oil temperature - if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in
the system for checking the oil temperature, the

symbols are displayed.
Warning when the preset speed is exceeded - allows the setting of a speed
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message ap-
pears on the display of the instrument cluster.
Dynamic Road Sign Display - traffic signs display » page 257, Traffic sign rec-
ognition.
Current speed - digital speedometer.
Average speed - is calculated continuously since the last time the memory
was deleted. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Driving route - distance driven since the last time the memory was deleted.
Driving time - driving time since the last time the memory was deleted.
Conv. consumers - information about the total consumption of the comfort
consumers in l/h and a list of three consumers (e.g. air conditioning etc.), which
have the largest share of fuel consumption.
54
Operation
Infotainment display
Fig. 47
Driving data
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface → Tap
Journey data
.
Screen display » Fig. 47
Distance travelled
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Transit point rating (
DriveGreen
Function)
Graphic fuel level display (if the estimated range is less than 300 km, the
vehicle starts to approach the symbol
)
Approximate range
Use the function surfaces
to select one of the following presets.
Since start - Driving data for the individual trip
Long-term - Long-term driving data
Since refuel - Data since refuelling
Warning when exceeding the set speed
The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
Select the menu item
Warning at
and confirm.
Set the desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps.
Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Select the menu item
Warning at
and confirm.
Drive at the desired speed.
Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
Reset the speed limit
Select the menu item
Warning at
and confirm.
By confirming the stored value, the speed limit is reset.
The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
on. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
deactivated.
Memory
Fig. 48
Memory display
The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are
displayed at the position
A
» Fig. 48.
Since start
In the memory, driving data is saved for the time between switching on and
switching off the ignition. New data will also flow into the calculation of the
current driving information if the trip is continued within 2 hours after switch-
ing off the ignition.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Long-term
The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to
a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9999 kilometres driven.
55
Information system
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is
exceeded.
Since refuel
The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling.
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up.
For the Storage choice, repeatedly confirm the selected indication and se-
lect the desired memory.
For Deleting the memory for the selected information, hold down the but-
ton confirming the specification.
The following driving data are stored.
Average fuel consumption
Distance travelled
Average speed
Driving time
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
Menus in the display of the instrument cluster
Introduction
The instrument cluster display is a user interface which, depending on the
equipment configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the
multifunction display, the assistance systems etc.
The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 53.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
Driving data
» page 54
Assist systems
» page 57
Navigation
» page 56
Audio
» page 56
Telephone
» page 56;
Vehicle
» page 52
Lap timer
» page 57
Note
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
to access the main menu.
The display language can also be set in Infotainment » page 138, Setting the
Infotainment language and» page 145, Setting the Infotainment language.
Navigation
menu item
The following information is displayed in the
Navigation
menu item.
Driving recommendations
Compass
Last destinations
Navigation map (applies to digital instrument cluster)
audio
menu item
E.g. the following information is displayed in the
Audio
menu item.
Radio
Currently playing station (name/frequency).
The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the
station button (e.g. FM3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
TP traffic announcements.
Media
Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source.
Telephone
menu item
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the
Telephone
menu item.
Incoming call
Outgoing call
Missed call
Symbols in the display
Telephone battery charge (this function is only supported by some mobile
phones)
Signal strength (this function is only supported by some mobile phones)
56
Operation
A telephone connected to the Infotainment system
Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown
next to the symbol)
Switch-off microphone
Apple CarPlay
An external device connected to the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay
can be operated via the multifunction steering wheel as well as via menus in
the instrument cluster display.
The following symbols are displayed in the
Telephone
menu option.
Answer the incoming call
Reject incoming call / end call
Activate / deactivate microphone (applies for the infotainment Swing)
Assist systems
menu item
The following systems are activated/deactivated in the
Assist systems
menu
item.
Lane Assist
ACC (vehicle with speed limiter)
Cruise control system (vehicle with speed limiter)
Speed limiter
Front Assist
Assist system for blind spot monitoring
Rear Traffic Alert
menu item
Laptimer
(Stopwatch)
The Laptimer function offers the possibility of calculating the lap time, for ex-
ample when driving on a race course. The measured time is shown in the dis-
play.
The following functions are available.
Start time
- start the timing manually or continue the interrupted measure-
ment
Since start
- Start the timer automatically upon start-up
Statistics
- Evaluate and reset the measured times
Time measurement
To start the measurement manually, choose the menu item
Lap timer
-
start
.
To start the measurement automatically, choose the menu item
Lap timer
-
Since Start
. Timing will begin automatically when starting up.
To start the measurement of the next lap during time measurement, choose
the menu item
new lap
.
During timing, information about the fastest and the last lap time are also
shown in the display.
Measure split time
During the timing, select the menu item
split time
. The split time data is dis-
played for 5 seconds in the display.
Stop measurement
During the timing, press the menu item
Stop
.
The time measurement is stopped, the following functions are now available.
Continue
- Continue measurement of the current lap time
New lap
- Start measurement of the next lap time.
Abort lap
- Cancel the timer (the current lap time is not stored)
Hang up
- End timing (the current lap time is stored)
Evaluate recorded times
Select the menu item
Lap timer
-
Statistics
.
The following information is displayed.
Fastest:
- The fastest lap
Slowest:
- The slowest lap
Average:
- The average lap time
Overall time:
- The total of all the lap times
Reset measured times
Select the menu item
Lap timer
-
Statistics
-
Reset
.
WARNING
Concentrate fully at all times on your driving! As the driver you are fully
responsible for the operation of your vehicle.
Only use the
Lap timer
when you are in any traffic situation where you have
full control of the vehicle.
57
Information system
Note
If the measured times are not reset, then these are stored even after turning
off the ignition.
Service intervals
Introduction
Compliance with the service intervals is of crucial importance for the serv-
ice life and value retention of the vehicle. Never exceed the service date.
The specialist garage will inform you about the type of service interval, the op-
tion to change it, and the service scope.
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will notify
you when a service is due.
Proof of service
A specialist garage will confirm the corresponding service record in the service
information system called Digital Service Plan.
We recommend that you always print out the respective service record.
Note
The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including
changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated
otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other binding agreements.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
Fig. 49
Button in the instrument cluster
The details regarding the remaining kilometres or days until the next scheduled
service can be displayed in Infotainment in the menu

/
Events
or
with the button in the instrument cluster.
Use the key to display
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 49 until the
Service
menu item is shown in
the display.
Release the button
A
.
In the display, the symbol appears for 4 seconds along with the following
message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
Service messages
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol
as well as a
message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the
display after the ignition is switched on.
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol
appears in the display after
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
Reset service interval display
Have the display reset by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display can cause problems to the vehicle.
Variable service interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis-
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating
conditions of the vehicle.
58
Operation
Personalization
Introduction
Thanks to the personalisation, more drivers have the opportunity to use a vehi-
cle with individually set system functions by means of a user account which is
assigned to the respective vehicle key.
WARNING
Make all adjustments when the vehicle is stationary - otherwise there is the
risk of accident!
Operating principle
Fig. 50
Switching to a different user account
Read and observe on page 59 first.
After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door, all the personalised
functions are adjusted according to the user account that is assigned to the
key which was used to unlock the vehicle.
Any change to the set personalised functions is automatically stored in the ac-
tive user account.
As part of the personalisation, three default user accounts as well as a
Guest
account are provided.
Switch to a different user account
You can switch to a different user account in the instrument cluster display
» Fig. 50 within 10 seconds after turning on the ignition.
An account can be changed at a later time in Infotainment in the menu

/
Vehicle status
(if the
Tyre Pressure Monitoring System
is displayed first of
all, then use the arrow or switch to
Vehicle status
).
If an account is selected in which not all of the points required by the system
are set, a configuration wizard can be automatically displayed on the Infotain-
ment screen » page 133.
Electrically adjustable driver's seat (referred to only as seat in the
following)
The seated position adjustment is carried out in the following cases.
After unlocking the vehicle and opening the driver's door (in this case: before
the vehicle was locked, an account with a certain seat setting was selected.
After vehicle unlocking, an account is activated to which a different seat set-
ting is assigned).
After switching to a different user account and at a speed less than 5 km/h.
The seat adjustment can be terminated as follows.
By tapping on the function surface
Cancel
on the Infotainment screen.
By pressing any key on the seat » page 87.
Note
Vehicles with the personalisation function are provided with three vehicle
keys.
Overview of some personalized functions
Read and observe on page 59 first.
Setting the electrically adjustable driver's seat.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
Driving mode - setting the
individual
mode
Assistance systems - Lane Assist, parking aid (Park Pilot).
Light - ambient lighting, convenience turn signal, COMING HOME / LEAVING
HOME.
Climatronic - temperature in each individual area, fan speed, recirculation
mode.
Infotainment settings - brightness level of the screen, keyboard arrange-
ment.
Radio - sound settings, station sorting.
Media - shuffle / repeat title, selected video format.
59
Information system
Voice control - acoustic signals.
Navigation - home address, alternative routes, recommended route, reminder
of the lack of fuel.
Note
The scope of the personalisation functions is dependent on the type of Info-
tainment package.
Setting the personalization
Read and observe on page 59 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
Per-
sonalisation
.
The following menu items are displayed.
Personalisation
Active
- activate/deactivate the personalisation
Select a user account
A list of user accounts with the option to manage user accounts and to switch
to another account.
- Account management with the following options:
Rename user account
- rename the user account (not applicable to the
Guest
account)
Copy settings to another account
- copy the settings of an active user account
to another user account
Reset user account
- reset the selected user account to factory settings
Setting
Key assignment:
- options for assigning the vehicle key to the user account:
Manual
- detected vehicle key must be assigned to the active user account
manually
Automatic
- detected vehicle key automatically assigned to a different ac-
count of the active user account
Assign vehicle key to current user account
- manual assignment of the detected ve-
hicle key to the active user account - follow the instructions on the Infotain-
ment screen
Reset all
- reset the personalisation and the user accounts to factory settings
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Introduction
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 63.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle has been locked, the
turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorized
persons (e.g. children) could lock the car, turn on the ignition or start the
engine - there is a danger of injury and accidents!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
Can be fatal at very high or very low temperatures!
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
Keep the keyway clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a negative
effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
60
Operation
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Fig. 51 Key with fold/out key bit/KESSY key
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
Description of the key » Fig. 51
Unlock button
Lock button
Depending on equipment fitted:
Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding opera-
tion)
Open/close/ the boot lid Stop movement of the boot lid (vehicles with
electric folding operation)
Locking button for folding the key bit in/out
Warning light for the battery charge - if the warning light does not flash
when a button on the key is pressed, the battery is discharged.
Unlock/unlatch the boot lid (vehicles fitted with manual folding operation)
By pressing the button , the lid is unlocked.
By holding the button , the lid is unlocked and unlatched (partially open).
If the lid is unlocked or unlatched using the button, then the lid is automati-
cally locked after closing. The period after which the lid is locked can be set
» page 67.
A
B
CAUTION
The remote control may be affected by signal superposition of transmitters
that are in the vicinity of the vehicle.
The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be re-
placed if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
less than approximately 3 m away » page 300.
Remove KESSY emergency key
Fig. 52
KESSY key
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
The emergency key is, for example, intended for the operation of the child
safety, and for switching off/on the front passenger airbag.
Remove retainer tabs
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 52.
Remove the emergency key
B
in the direction of the arrow
2
.
61
Unlocking and opening
Locking / unlocking - KESSY
Fig. 53 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
Grip the door handle to unlock the vehicle » Fig. 53 -
.
Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger to lock » Fig. 53 -
the vehicle.
When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Information on locking
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
After locking the vehicle, it is not possible to unlock within the next 2 seconds
by touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is
locked.
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
If one of the doors is closed after the vehicle has been locked and the key with
which the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehi-
cle will be automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn sig-
nal lights will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehi-
cle is automatically locked again.
If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatical-
ly unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.
Deactivating KESSY
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.
Within 5 s, touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger » Fig. 53 on
page 62 -
. Deactivation is confirmed by a single flash of the direction indi-
cators.
To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds and then pull the door
handle. The door must remain locked.
The KESSY system is activated again automatically after the vehicle is un-
locked.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the central locking button
Fig. 54
Central locking button
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button.
The vehicle is not locked from the outside.
All doors are closed.
62
Operation
Tolock, press the button Press » Fig. 54
Locking is displayed in the button by the illumination of the symbol.
The following applies after locking.
Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
SafeLock
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
SafeLock prevents the doors from behind opened from inside as well as win-
dow operation. This makes it more difficult for anyone to break into the vehi-
cle.
Switching on
SafeLock switches on when the vehicle is locked.
This function is enabled after switching off the ignition with the message
Check
SAFELOCK! Owner's manual!
in the instrument cluster display.
Switch-on display
With the activated SafeLock, the warning light in the driver´s door flashes for
2 seconds in rapid succession, this then starts to flash at longer intervals.
Switching off
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
or: by deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection
» page 66.
The warning light in the driver´s door flashes fast for about 2 seconds, goes
out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
If the vehicle is locked and the safe securing system is switched off, the door
can be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on opening lever.
The safelock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the safe securing system activated, no people must
remain in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or
open a window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for
rescuers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
Individual settings
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
The following central locking functions can be set individually in Infotainment
in the menu

/
Opening and closing
.
All doors
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
Single door
The function allows you to unlock only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors
and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
touched.
Doors on a vehicle side
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the fuel
filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of
both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The
other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is un-
locked or touched.
Automatic locking/unlocking
The function allows all doors and the boot lid to be locked at a speed of 15
km / h. Opening the doors and the boot lid cannot be opened from the outside.
The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
Note
The individual adjustment of the central locking system is stored (depending
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
63
Unlocking and opening
Open / close door
Fig. 55 Door handle/door opening lever
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
To open from outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle
A
in the
direction of arrow » Fig. 55.
To open from inside, pull on the door opening lever
B
and push the door
away from you.
To close from inside, grip the handle
C
and close the door.
WARNING
The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst driving -
risk of death!
Only open and close the door when no one is located in the opening/clos-
ing range – risk of injury!
Never drive with the doors open - it can be fatal!
An opened door can close automatically if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on an incline – risk of injury!
Note
On vehicles with door warning lights, these illuminate after the door is opened.
Door edge protection
Fig. 56
Remove protective strip
Fig. 57
Insert protective strip
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the doors can be equipped with one protec-
tive strip. This moves out when opening the door and protects the central area
of the door edge from damage. When the door closes the protective strip re-
tracts.
Removing and installing the protection strip
The protective strip may be replaced if damaged.
Remove the protective strip from the tie rod in the door in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 56.
Insert» Fig. 57 a new protective strip in groove in direction of arrow.
Open the door approximately 15 cm wide and push in the strip. Otherwise, it
is not possible to close the door and there is a risk of damage to the strip and
the door.
If any part of an broken protective strip remains in the mounting, seek assis-
tance from a specialist garage.
64
Operation
WARNING
When handling the protective strip, exercise extreme caution to avoid
pinching of fingers or other body parts by the door - there is danger of in-
jury!
CAUTION
Do not open the vehicle door too hastily or abruptly. If the door is swung too
strongly against an obstacle, the strip cannot prevent damage - there is a risk
of damage to the strip and the door.
When opening / closing the door, do not touch the protective strip - there is
a risk of damaging the operating mechanism of the strip.
Note
A new bottle of sealant can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Parts.
Child safety lock
Fig. 58 Rear door: Child safety system switch on / off
Fig. 59
Child safety lock with electric
operation
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
The child safety lock can be operated manually or electrically depending on
equipment.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Manually controlled parental settings
To switch on, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position
» Fig. 58.
To switch off, turn the parental control with the vehicle key in position .
Child safety lock with electric operation
To switch on/off the child safety lock in the left rear door, press the button
A
in the driver's door » Fig. 59.
To switch on/off the child safety lock in the right rear door, press button
B
in the driver's door.
Locking is displayed in the button by the illumination of the symbol
.
When with electric operation in addition to the electric window is blocked in
the respective door.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 60 first.
Synchronising the remote control
If the buttons on the remote control key have been operated several times be-
yond the effective range of the system or the battery in the remote control
key has been replaced and the vehicle cannot be unlocked using the remote
control, the key must be synchronised.
Press any button on the remote control key.
Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Fault with the central locking
If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
A fault in the central locking system means the vehicle doors and the boot lid
cannot be emergency locked or emergency unlocked» page 301.
65
Unlocking and opening
Failure of the system KESSY
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the
battery » page 300.
Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm).
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release.
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, it must be checked that all of the windows, doors
and the sliding/tilting roof are locked in order to ensure the full functionality of
the anti-theft alarm system.
Note
The alarm system has its own power source, service life of which is 5 years. In
order to ensure functionality of the alarm system, we recommend that you get
the alarm checked after this time by a specialist garage.
Alarm trigger
Read and observe on page 66 first.
The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is acti-
vated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
Opening the bonnet.
Opening the boot lid.
Opening the doors.
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
Towing the vehicle.
Movement in the vehicle.
Sudden and significant voltage drop of the electrical system.
Uncoupling the trailer.
An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the lock cylinder.
The alarm is switched off by pressing the button on the key or switching on
the ignition.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Read and observe on page 66 first.
The interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle and then
triggers the alarm.
The anti-towing detects tilts in the locked vehicle and then triggers the alarm.
These functions should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm
will be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle
interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed.
Disable both functions once
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
Open and close
,
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
Safelock is switched off during deactivation » page 63.
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in-
terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
66
Operation
Manually operated tailgate
Introduction
WARNING
Never drive with the boot lid open or ajar, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – risk of accident!
Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack
– risk of injury!
Open/close boot lid
Fig. 60 Opening / closing tailgate
Read and observe on page 67 first.
To open, press the
A
button in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 60.
Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
2
.
To close, grab the mount
B
and pull in the direction of arrow
3
.
Note
Button
A
» Fig. 60 is deactivated when starting or at a speed of more than 5
km/h. The button is activated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
Setting the delayed locking of the boot lid
Read and observe on page 67 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the button on the key, the lid is automatical-
ly locked again after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically.
Electric boot lid
Introduction
The boot lid (hereinafter as lid) can be operated electrically and manual in the
event of an emergency » page 69.
WARNING
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open while the vehicle is moving - risk of accident.
Never drive with the lid open or unlatched, as otherwise exhaust gases
may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning!
Only open and close the lid when no one is located in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
Make sure that no limbs are caught or crushed when closing the lid - risk
of injury!
CAUTION
Do not attempt to close the lid manually during electrical motion - there is a
risk of damaging the electric lid operation.
Lock the vehicle before driving through a car wash (or with the central lock-
ing button). In some car washes the boot lid might open automatically due to
the pressure action of the washing brushes - there is a risk of damage to the
vehicle interior, as well as to the objects being transported.
67
Unlocking and opening
CAUTION
Before opening / closing the flap, check that there are no objects in the
opening / closing area that could damage the flap, and if there are any objects
in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle that could damage the vehicle interior
and the objects being transported.
In certain circumstances, if the lid is loaded (e.g. by a thick layer of snow), the
opening process of the lid can be interrupted. Remove the snow from the lid to
re-enable the electrical operation.
If the lid closes automatically (e.g. under load of snow), you will hear an inter-
mittent beep.
The flap is always to be close before disconnecting the battery.
Description of operation
Fig. 61
Lid operation
Read and observe and on page 67 first.
Ways to open the lid
By pressing the handle
A
» Fig. 61.
By pulling the button
C
.
By holding the button
D
on the key.
If the lid hits an obstacle when closing, it stops and an audible signal sounds.
Ways to close the lid
By pressing the button
B
» Fig. 61.
By holding the button
D
on the key (applies to vehicles with the KESSY key-
less unlocking system). The key must be located at a maximum distance of 2
m from the lid.
By pressing the handle
A
.
By pulling and holding the button
C
. The opening process stops when one
releases the button.
By briefly pressing the lid downwards.
If the flap meets an obstacle when it is closed, it stops, an acoustic signal
sounds and the flap moves back a few centimetres.
Ways to stop the lid movement
By pressing the button
B
» Fig. 61.
By pulling on the button
C
or by releasing the button.
By holding the button
D
on the key.
By pressing the handle
A
.
Audible signals
An acoustic signal is sounded when opening/closing the lid by means of the
button
C
or
D
.
Note
Button
A
» Fig. 61 is deactivated when starting or at a speed of more than 5
km/h. The button is activated again after the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
If you rapidly enter the vehicle during the opening or closing process of the
lid, the whole vehicle may jerk and, as a result, the movement of the lid can be
interrupted.
Set the top position of the lid
Read and observe and on page 67 first.
The top position of the lid can be adjusted (e.g. in a limited space to open the
lid due to the garage height or for a more comfortable operation, depending
on the height of the person).
Adjusting the top position of the lid
Stop the lid in the desired position.
68
Operation
Press and hold button
B
» Fig. 61 on page 68 until you hear an acoustic sig-
nal.
Adjusting the top starting position of the lid
Carefully raise the flap manually to the limit.
Press and hold button
B
» Fig. 61 on page 68 until you hear an acoustic sig-
nal.
Note
The top position which is reached when the lid opens automatically, is always
lower than the maximum top position which can be reached when the lid is
opened manually.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 67 first.
Examples of operational malfunctions
Description of the malfunc-
tion
Remedy
The lid cannot be opened Unlocking the lid » page 302
The lid does not react to an
opening signal
Removing a possible obstacle (e.g. snow), re-
opening the lid » page 68
Press handle
A
» Fig. 61 on page 68 and pull
the lid upwards
The lid remains in the top
position
Manual closing of the lid
The lid is open and the bat-
tery was disconnected
Close manually
Close the door slowly, push down the lid, push in the lock on the centre of the
edge, above the ŠKODA logo.
Operating contactless boot lid
Fig. 62
Opening the boot lid
Read and observe and on page 67 first.
Depending on equipment the boot lid can be operated without contact.
The ignition must be switched off and you have to have the vehicle key on
your person.
To open/close, move one foot in the sensor area below the rear bumper
quickly in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 62.
The flap opens / closes automatically. When opening the fully closed flap, the
brake light in the rear window lights up. An acoustic signal is sounded when
closing the lid.
If the lid does not move, then repeat the operating process after a few sec-
onds.
The lid movement can be stopped by a rapid swinging of the foot. Swinging
the foot again will continue the lid movement.
The function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Opening and closing
“Easy Open”
.
We recommend that the function is deactivated in the following cases:
Installation of a roof rack.
Connecting a trailer (accessory) to the towbar.
Manual vehicle wash.
Maintenance and repair work in the back of the vehicle.
When connecting a device to the trailer socket the deactivation of the func-
tion takes place.
69
Unlocking and opening
Note
With heavy rain or a dirty rear bumper, under certain circumstances that there
may be limitations, or the automatic deactivation of the contactless opening
function of the boot lid may occur.
Window operation
Introduction
WARNING
Always close the window carefully and controlled. Doing so may may
cause yourself or fellow passengers considerable crushing injuries.
The system is fitted with a force limiter » page 71. If there is an obstacle
(e.g. In the event of a body part becoming trapped) the closing process is
stopped and the window goes down by several centimetres. However, the
windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury.
CAUTION
Keep the windows clean to ensure the correct functionality of the electric
power windows.
Always close the windows before disconnecting the battery.
Note
If the windows are opened, dust and other dirt can get into the vehicle and the
wind noise is more at certain speeds.
Open / close Window
Fig. 63 Power window buttons
Fig. 64
Button of the window lifter on
the passenger side
Read and observe and on page 70 first.
All windows can be operated from the driver's seat. The window in the front
passenger door and the windows in the rear doors are operated via the button
in each door.
Power window buttons » Fig. 63
Front door left
Front door right
Rear door, left
Rear door, right
Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats)
Deactivation / activation of the key in the rear door left (part of the child
safety lock with electric operation)
Deactivation / activation of the key in the back door right (part of the child
safety lock with electric operation)
Open/close window
To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win-
dow has moved into the desired position.
or: Press the button to the stop; the window automatically opens fully. Re-
newed pressing of the button causes the window to stop.
To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold
until the window has moved into the desired position.
or: Pull the button briefly to the stop, the window automatically closes fully.
Renewed pulling of the button causes the window to stop immediately.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
70
Operation
Disable / enable buttons in the rear doors
To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the
E
button. If
the buttons in the rear doors are deactivated, the warning light illuminates
in the
E
button.
or: On vehicles with child safety lock with electric operation, press the re-
spective key
F
or
G
. If the buttons in the rear doors are deactivated, the
warning light illuminates in the respective button
F
or
G
.
Note
After switching off the ignition, the windows can still open and close for
about 10 minutes.
After the driver or front passenger door is opened, the operation of the win-
dow is only possible with the button
A
» Fig. 63, in which case this is pressed
or pulled for approx. 2 seconds.
Force limiter
Read and observe and on page 70 first.
The electrical power windows are fitted with a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
Window convenience operation
Read and observe and on page 70 first.
The convenience operation for the window offers the option to open/close all
the windows at once (or only the window in the driver's door). The conven-
ience operation function can be adjusted individually in Infotainment in the
menu

/
Opening and closing
.
Opening
Press and hold the button on the key.
or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key
A
until it
stops in the open position » Fig. 63 on page 70.
Closing
Press and hold the
button on the key.
or: Switch off the ignition, open the driver's door and hold the key
A
until it
stops in the closed position » Fig. 63 on page 70.
In the KESSY system, hold your finger on the sensor on the outside of the
door handle of the front door » Fig. 53 on page 62.
The convenience operation will only function correctly if all the windows auto-
matically open/close properly.
Convenience opening or closing the window using the key in the driver's door
locking cylinder is only possible within 45 seconds of locking the vehicle.
The movement of the window is stopped immediately when the respective
button is released.
Note
The settings for the window convenience operation are stored (depending on
the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 70 first.
Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism
to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the
window again as soon as the operating mechanisms has cooled down.
After disconnecting the vehicle battery, automatic opening / closing the win-
dow can be deactivated. In this case the system must be activated as follows.
71
Unlocking and opening
Activate window operation
Switch on the ignition.
Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
Release the button.
Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof
Introduction
The panorama sliding/tilting roof (hereinafter referred to as sliding/tilting roof)
can only be operated when the ignition is turned on and when the outdoor
temperature is no lower than -20 °C.
The sliding/tilting roof can still be operated for approx. 10 minutes after
switching the ignition off. After opening the driver or front passenger door, it
is no longer possible to operate the sliding/tilting roof.
WARNING
When operating the sliding/tilting roof and the sunshade, proceed with
caution to avoid causing crushing injuries – risk of injury!
CAUTION
During the winter, remove any ice and snow in the vicinity of the sliding/tilt-
ing roof before opening it to prevent any damage to the opening mechanism.
Always close the sliding/tilting roof before disconnecting the battery.
Operation
Fig. 65 Operation of the sliding/tilting roof
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
Operation of the sliding/tilting roof » Fig. 65
Gradual opening
Complete opening
Gradually reset
Fully reset
Gradual opening
Fully opening
After the first press, the sliding/tilting roof stops in the position where the
intensity of the wind noise is low (at speeds of approx. less than 80 km/h).
Press again and the sliding/tilting roof goes to the stop.
Gradual closing
Complete closing
Force limiter
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
The sliding/tilting roof is fitted with a force limiter.
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the glass pane re-
tracts by several centimetres.
WARNING
If the sliding/tilting roof is closed by holding down the switch
7
/
8
,
» Fig. 65 on page 72and the closing process is hindered by an obstacle, then
when attempting to close for a third time, the force limiter is rendered in-
operable (if the period of 5 s is not reached between the individual at-
tempts to close). The sliding/tilting roof closes with full force - it may cause
injury.
Convenience operation of the sliding / tilting roof
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
The convenience operation makes it possible to open or close the sliding/tilt-
ing roof using the key or the KESSY system via the sensor in the door handle
of the front door.
To open out, press and hold the button on the key.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
72
Operation
To close, press and hold the button (with KESSY, hold your finger on the
sensor on the outside of the door handle of the front door).
By interrupting the locking process, the closing operation is interrupted.
Activate operation of the sliding/tilting roof
Fig. 66
Operation of the sliding/tilting
roof
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
If the operation of the sliding/tilting roof is deactivated (e.g. after disconnect-
ing and connecting the battery), then operation will have to be activated.
Switch on the ignition, pull the switch on the recess all the way down in the
direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 66 and hold.
The sliding/tilting roof opens/closes again after around 10 seconds.
Release the lever.
Electrically operated sunshade
Fig. 67
Button for operating the sun-
shade
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
Operation of the sunblind » Fig. 67
Open - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
Close - by pressing (press again - sunshade stops moving)
The sunshade can also be operated by pressing and holding the appropriate
button (starts movement of the sunshade) and releasing it when the sunshade
reaches the desired position.
Activating operation of the sunshade
Read and observe and on page 72 first.
If the operation of sunshade is deactivated (e.g. after disconnecting and con-
necting the battery), then the operation will have to be activated.
Switch on the ignition, press and hold the
» Fig. 67 on page 73 button.
The sunshade opens and closes again after around 10 seconds.
Release the button.
73
Unlocking and opening
Lights and visibility
Light
Introduction
Unless otherwise stated, the lights only work when the ignition is switched on.
For the basic position of the light switch, use position .
Note
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is switched on, the
light-emitting surface demists after a short period of time.
Operating the lights
Fig. 68
Light switch
To switch on/off the lights, turn the
A
» Fig. 68 switch to one of the following
positions (equipment-dependent).
Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
Switching the light on/off automatically » page 75
Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 78
Switching on the low beam
Headlight range control of the Halogen headlights
The headlight range can be set in Infotainment in the menu

/
Light
.
The range of the halogen headlights can be set on the screen, in accordance
with the vehicle load, to the following basic settings.
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty

All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded
In the event of another vehicle loading condition, the setting for positions . .
can be used.
The LEDFront headlights s automatically adjust to vehicle loading and driving
conditions, so they do not have manual headlight range control.
WARNING
Always adjust the headlight range control to comply with the following
conditions and prevent accidents.
The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
cles.
The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Note
If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. Does not apply to
the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME
function . The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed
(for vehicles with the KESSY system, after opening the driver's door).
If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights illuminate the area in front of and to the rear of the
vehicle (only applicable for some countries).
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are
met.
The light switch is in the position or .
The ignition is switched on.
WARNING
Always switch on the low beam when visibility is poor.
Note
The light can operate automatically under certain circumstances, even if the
light switch is in position .
74
Operation
Turn signal and main beam
Fig. 69
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
Control stalk positions » Fig. 69
Switch on the right turn signal
Switch on the left turn signal
Switch on main beam (spring-tensioned position)
Switch off main beam / headlight flasher on (spring-tensioned position)
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
The headlight flasher can be used even if the ignition is switched off.
The turn signal switches off automatically depending on the steering angle af-
ter turning.
Use the control stalk to switch on/off the headlight assistant» page 76.
Comfort indicating
When the control talk is pressed slightly up or down, the respective turn signal
indicates three times.
If during the convenience turn signal, the operating lever is pressed in the op-
posite direction, the indicating will stop.
Convenience signalling can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the
menu

/
Light
/
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.

Note
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the convenience turn signal is stored
(depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisa-
tion » page 59.
Automatic driving light control
Fig. 70
Light switch: Position 
If the light switch is in position

» Fig. 70, then the lights are automatically
switched on/off to suit current light or weather conditions (rain), depending on
the equipment.
If the light switch is in position

, the lettering

illuminates next to the
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol also illumi-
nates next to the light switch.
Automatic driving light control in the rain (referred to as function in the
following)
The dipped beam is switched on automatically if the following conditions are
met.
The function is activated.
The light switch is in the position .
The windscreen wipers are on for more than 30 s.
The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
Setting, activation/deactivation
The following functions can be set or activated/deactivated in Infotainment in
the menu

/
Light
.
Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions
for automatic driving light control
Automatic driving light control during rain
75
Lights and visibility
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control (position ) only operates as a sup-
port and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the
lights and, if necessary, to switch on the light depending on the prevailing
light conditions.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can be
affected.
Note
The setting (activate/deactivate) of the automatic driving light control during
rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account
personalisation » page 59.
LED headlights
The LED headlights (hereinafter referred to as just system) use the journey da-
ta to automatically ensure the best possible light cone in front of the vehicle.
The system operates automatically in the following modes: urban, remote, mo-
torway and bad weather.
A component of the system is the static side light. This light is used in some
light modes, e.g. for bend illumination during reversing.
The system works as long as the light switch is in position

.
WARNING
If there is a system malfunction the headlights are automatically lowered to
the emergency position, which prevents a possible dazzling of oncoming
traffic. This reduces the cone of light in front of the vehicle. Seek help from
a specialist garage.
Light Assist
Fig. 71 Installation location versions of the sensor / system on/off
The system automatically switches the high beam on/off in accordance with
the existing traffic (other vehicles) and environmental conditions (e.g. driving
through a lit village).
The high beam on/off is controlled by a sensor or a camera » Fig. 71.
The system can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Light
Light Assist
.
Conditions for the system function
The system is activated.
The light switch is in the position

.
The vehicle speed is over 60 km/h or for some countries more than 40
km/h.
The windscreen is clean in the sensor area.
Switch on the system
Push the lever into the sprung position
A
» Fig. 71. The following indicator
light lights up in the instrument cluster display.
Switch off the system
If the high beam is switched on automatically, move the lever into the sprung
position
B
. The warning light goes out. The high beam turns off.
If the high beam is is not switched on automatically, move the lever into the
sprung position
A
. The warning light goes out. The high beam turns on.
The high beam switches off automatically when the speed falls below 30 km/h
(but the system remains switched on).
76
Operation
If there is a fault, the error message will appear in the instrument cluster dis-
play. Seek help from a specialist garage.
WARNING
The system is used only for support, thus the driver is not released from his
obligation to manually adjust the main or low beam according to the given
ambient conditions (e.g. in unfavourable lighting and weather conditions, as
when passing poorly lit road users, if necessary, when the area in front of
the sensor is covered by an obstacle).
CAUTION
Do not cover the sensor and keep the front screen clean - system functionality
can be impaired.
Note
The setting for the high-beam assistant in Infotainment is stored (depending
on the Infotainment type) in the active user account for personalisation
» page 59.
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fig. 72
Light switch – switch on front
and rear fog lights
Switching on the fog lights/rear fog lights is possible under the following
conditions.
The lights switch is in position , or » Fig. 72.
To switch on the fog lights, turn the light switch to position
1
; the warning
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
To switch on the rear fog lights, pull the light switch to position
2
; the
warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is not equipped with fog lights, the rear fog lights can be switch-
ed on by pulling the light switch to the only possible setting.
Switch off the fog lights/rear fog lights in reverse order.
Note
If an accessory is connected to the trailer socket, the rear fog lamp does not
light up on the vehicle.
function CORNER
The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering or steering), if the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
The turn signal is turned on or the front wheels are severely locked (in the
event of conflict between the two versions, has turn signal has the higher
priority).
The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
switch is in the position .
The two functions can be used in Infotainment in the menu

/
Light
(activated/deactivated and adjusted).
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is evaluated by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in
the holder of the rear-view mirror. Do not cover the sensor - the system can
be affected.
If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
Note
The setting of the two functions is stored (depending on the Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
77
Lights and visibility
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 73
Button for hazard warning light
system
To switch on/off, press the button » Fig. 73.
When switching on, all the turn signal lights as well as the warning light
in
the button flash simultaneously with the control lights
in the instrument
cluster.
The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switch-
ed off.
If one of the airbags is deployed, the hazard warning light system will switch
on automatically.
The automatic activation of hazard warning lights can take place during a
heavy braking. After starting or accelerating the hazard warning system is au-
tomatically switched off.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn signal is switched on, the
hazard warning lights are switched off temporarily and only the turn signal
flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle.
Parking light
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
Switching on the side light on one side
Switch off the ignition.
Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops » Fig. 69
on page 75.
The parking lights on the respective side of the vehicle are turned on.
Switching on the side light on both sides
Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position » page 74.
Switch off the ignition and lock the car.
After removing the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible warn-
ing sounds. After a few seconds, or after closing the driver's door, the acoustic
warning signal stops.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically.
Entry space lighting
The lighting is positioned on the lower edge of the exterior mirror and illumi-
nates the entry area of the front door.
The lighting switches on after unlocking or opening the vehicle door (depend-
ing on the lighting conditions).
The lighting switches off after around 30 seconds after closing the front door
or switching on the ignition.
Driving abroad
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
left/right), headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic.
Therefore, the LEDFront headlight setting must be adapted by turning on trav-
el mode in infotainment in the

/
Light
menu. In this mode, no auto-
matic beam adjustment is made ahead of the vehicle.
It is necessary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage.
Interior lighting
Introduction
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
off (or after a door is opened),the lights will automatically switch off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
78
Operation
Operation of the lights from the front seats
Fig. 74
Operation of the lights from the
front seats
Switch on/off (by pressing the relevant switch) » Fig. 74
Automatic operation

Rear lighting
Depending on equipment fitted:
Reading lamp left
Front and rear lighting
Reading lamp right
Automatic operation - switch
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is unlocked.
One of the doors is opened.
The ignition key is removed.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is locked.
The ignition is switched on.
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
A
B
C
D
Interior light, rear
Fig. 75
Interior lights at the rear: Variant
1
Fig. 76
Interior lights at the rear: Version 2/version 3
The rear lighting (variants 1 and 3) is controlled together with the automatic
operation of the lighting from the front seats.
Variant 1 - switch on/off (by pressing the relevant switch) » Fig. 75
Reading lamp left
Reading lamp right
Variant 2 - operation (by moving the light lens
C
) » Fig. 76
Switching on
Switching off
Automatic operation (the light is switched on/off automatically together
with the front light)
Variant 3 - switch on/off (by pressing the relevant switch) » Fig. 76
Reading lamp left
Reading lamp right
A
B
D
79
Lights and visibility
Ambient lighting
Fig. 77
Setting the ambient lighting
The ambient lighting illuminates the side door trim panels in colour, and the
footwell in white.
The switching on of the lighting takes place automatically after opening the
door, switching off occurs automatically after the locking of the vehicle or 30
seconds after the closing of the door with the ignition switched off.
The ambient lighting can be adjusted in Infotainment in the menu

/
Background lighting
.
Description of the function surfaces » Fig. 77
Enable / disable the background lighting
Activating of the brightness setting for all areas at the same time
Activating the brightness controls for the door area
Activating the brightness setting for the footwell area
Choice of colour options / brightness adjustment
Function surfaces for selecting lighting colour / brightness adjustment
To display
B
,
C
, and
D
, tap the function surface .
Vehicles by selecting the driving mode
For vehicles with driving mode selection » page 251 The lighting can be
switched on automatically or manually
A
» Fig. 77. A change in the illumination
colour occurs automatically due to the driving mode change or manually by se-
lecting one of the colour options. In individual mode, the last manually selected
colour is displayed.
Note
The adjustment of the ambient lighting is stored (depending on Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Visibility
Introduction
WARNING
No objects should be attached to the sun visors, which could limit the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or should the ve-
hicle collide.
Windscreen and rear window heater
Fig. 78
Buttons for the front and rear window heater: Climatronic /
manual air conditioning
Read and observe on page 80 first.
The heating for quick defrosting and ventilation of the front /and rear window.
The heating only works when the engine is running.
Buttons for the heating (depending on vehicle equipment) » Fig. 78
Switching the windscreen heater on/off
Switch on/off the rear window heater
When the heating is switched on, a light illuminates inside or below the button.
The heating automatically switches off after ten minutes.
If the engine is switched off when the heating is on and turned back on again
within 10 minutes, the heating is continued.
80
Operation
Note
If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
» page 282, Automatic consumer shutdown - discharge protection of the vehi-
cle battery.
If the lighting inside or below the button flashes, the heater will not work be-
cause of the low charge of the battery.
If the Climatronic recognises that the windshield could fog up, the windshield
heating is automatically switched on. This function can be activated/deactiva-
ted on the Climatronic control panel in the menu

Front sun visors
Fig. 79
Fold down flap / flip up flap / make-up mirror and parking per-
mit holder
Read and observe on page 80 first.
Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 79
Swivel the visor towards the windscreen
Swivel cover towards the door
Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of
the arrow)
Light (turns on when the cover of the make-up mirror is pushed to one
side)
Parking ticket holder
1
2
A
B
C
Sunshade in the rear doors
Fig. 80 Sun blind on the rear door
Read and observe on page 80 first.
To roll down, pull out the sunshade by the handle
A
in direction of arrow
1
and suspend in the holder
B
on top edge of the door in the direction of ar-
row
2
» Fig. 80.
To roll up, hold the sunshade by the handle
A
and remove it from the holder
B
against the direction of arrow
2
. Hold the sunshade so that this can
slowly roll back in without damaging.
Windscreen wipers and washers
Introduction
The windscreen wipers and the wash system operate if the ignition is switched
on and the bonnet and boot are closed.
WARNING
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures, without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
81
Lights and visibility
CAUTION
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 303.
In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.
Carefully release the frozen-on windscreen wiper blades from the wind-
screen and remove snow and ice.
Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is the risk of damaging the
windscreen with the windscreen wiper arms.
Do not switch on the ignition when the front windscreen wiper arms are fol-
ded down - there is the danger of damaging the bonnet by the windscreen
wiper arms.
If there is an obstacle on the windscreen, the wipers will try to push away the
obstacle five times. Thereafter, the wipers will stop to prevent them becoming
damaged. Turn on the wipers again only after the obstacle has been removed.
Note
Each time the ignition switches off for the third time, the position of the
windscreen wipers changes. This counteracts an early fatigue of the wiper
blades.
The windscreen washer nozzles for the windscreen are heated when the en-
gine is running and the outside temperature is less than +10 °C.
Front wipers and washers
Fig. 81
Operating the windscreen wip-
ers and washing system at the
front
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Fast disk wiping
Slow disk wiping
Depending on equipment fitted:
Intermittent wipe of the windscreen
Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain
Wipers and washers off
Single windscreen wipe (sprung position)
Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position  - by setting the
switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
often
Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position)
Spraying and wiping the windscreen
After releasing the operating lever, the wipers will make from 2 to 3 wiper
strokes.
At a speed of more than 2 km/h, the wiper wipes once again 5 seconds after
the last wiper stroke in order to wipe the last drops from the windscreen. This
function can be activated/deactivated by a specialist garage.
Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain can be used in Infotainment in the
menu

/
Mirrors and wipers
(activated/deactivated).
WARNING
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is not released
from the responsibility to set the function of the windscreen wipers man-
ually depending on the visibility conditions.
Note
If the wiping is carried out without interruption, the wiping speed varies de-
pending on the vehicle speed.
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the automatic windscreen wiping in
the rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user ac-
count personalisation » page 59.




A
82
Operation
Rear window wipers and washers
Fig. 82
Operating the windscreen wip-
ers and washing system
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the
control stalk, the wipers perform another 2 to 3 wiper strokes
Windscreen wiping
Wipers and washers off
Automatic rear wiper
If the windscreen wiping is performed without interruption, then the automat-
ic regular intermittent wiping of the rear window takes place.
This function can be used in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and
wipers
(activated/deactivated).
Note
The rear window is wiped automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected.
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the automatic rear window wiping in
the rain is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the active user ac-
count personalisation » page 59.
Headlight cleaning system
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Headlights are cleaned under the following conditions.
The low beam is switched on.
The outside temperature is about -12° C to +39° C.

The headlights are cleaned every first and tenth (for every twentieth, for some
countries) spray of the front windscreen. Setting the spray interval can be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).
Rear view mirror
Introduction
WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, make objects appear
smaller and further away. Therefore, use the rear-view mirror to determine
the distances to the following vehicles.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respira-
tory system.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolyte fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes with plenty of water. Seek
medical assistance if required.
83
Lights and visibility
Interior mirror dimming
Fig. 83 Interior rear-view mirror: with manual dimming/auto-darkening
Read and observe on page 83 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 83
Basic position of the mirror (not dimmed)
Mirror blackout
Mirror with automatic dimming
The mirror dimming » Fig. 83 is automatically controlled after the engine start.
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
WARNING
Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external de-
vice can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - it could cause an acci-
dent.
The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The
sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror.
1
2
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 84
Exterior mirror operation
Read and observe on page 83 first.
The exterior mirrors can (depending on vehicle equipment) have a manual or
electric fold-in function, automatic dimming and memory function.
The rotary knob can be moved into the following positions (depending on
vehicle equipment)
Adjusting the left-hand mirror area
Switch off mirror control
Adjusting the right-hand mirror area
Mirror heating (only works when the engine is running)
Folding in the mirrors electrically (to fold back, move the rotary knob to
another position) »
Setting the mirror area
Move the rotary knob in the direction of arrows » Fig. 84.
If the mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted manually by
pressing on the edge of the mirror area.
Setting the mirror surfaces synchronously
This function allows the simultaneous adjustment of the two mirror areas. The
function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and wipers
(activated/deactivated).
Turn the knob for the mirror control to the position for the driver mirror ad-
justment.
Adjust the mirror areas to the desired position.
84
Operation
Manual folding mirrors
The mirror can be manually folded towards the side windows. To put it back to
its original position, it should be folded back from the side window until it audi-
bly clicks into place.
Automatic folding in/back of both mirrors
The exterior mirrors are automatically collapsed after locking the vehicle in the
park position. After unlocking the vehicle, the mirrors are folded back to the
driving position » .
This function can be used in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and
wipers
(activated/deactivated).
Mirror with automatic dimming
The exterior mirror dimming is controlled together with the automatic rear-
view mirror dimming » page 84.
Memory function for mirror (vehicles with electrically adjustable driver's
seat)
It is possible to save the current setting of the exterior mirror when saving the
driver's seat position with » page 87, Memory Function of the electrically ad-
justable seat or » page 87, Memory function of the remote control key.
Tilting the mirror area of the front passenger mirror (vehicles with
electrically adjustable driver's seat)
The front passenger mirror area can be tilted to the stored position to improve
the view to the curb when reversing.
Operating conditions
The function can be activated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and wipers
.
The setting of the mirror area has been previously stored » page 87,
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat or. » page 87, Memo-
ry function of the remote control key.
The reverse gear is engaged.
The knob for the mirror control is in the position for the passenger mirror
adjustment.
The mirror area returns to its initial position after the rotary knob is set to an-
other position or if the speed is greater than 15 km/h.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces, if the exterior mirror heating is
switched on - hazard of burning.
CAUTION
Never manually fold in/out the electrically folding exterior mirrors - there is a
risk of damage to the mirror!
When the mirror is swung by external influences (due to impact during ma-
noeuvring, for example), then first fold-in the mirror by turning the knob and
wait for a loud clapping noise.
Note
The setting of the mirror functions is stored in Infotainment (depending on the
Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
85
Lights and visibility
Seats and head restraints
Front seats
Introduction
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer injuries or bruises as a
result of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
Manual adjustment
Fig. 85
Control elements on the seat
Read and observe on page 86 first.
Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing the control
lever must lock audibly)
Adjusting height of seat
Adjust the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjusting)
Setting the extent of the curvature of the lumbar support
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism of the
backrest angle.
A
B
C
D
Electrical adjustment
Fig. 86 Control elements on the seat
Read and observe on page 86 first.
seat adjustment
1 - Move in the longitudinal direction
2 - Change in inclination
3 - Change in height
Adjusting the seat backrest
4 - Change in inclination
Adjusting lumbar support
5 - Change curvature
6 - The degree of curvature change
WARNING
The electric front seat adjustment is functional even with the ignition off.
Therefore, when leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not com-
pletely independent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a
danger of injury!
Note
If the inclination angle of the seat backrest relative to the seat surface is
greater than approx. 110°, then it is not possible for safety reasons to save this
setting in the memory of the electrically adjustable seats or the remote control
key.
On vehicles with personalisation, the driver's seat setting is stored in the ac-
tive user account personalisation » page 59.
A
B
C
86
Operation
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable seat
Fig. 87
SET button and memory but-
tons
Read and observe on page 86 first.
Among the memory buttons
B
on the driver's seat, a setting for the driver´s
seat and exterior mirror position can be saved » Fig. 87.
Storing seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forward
Switch on the ignition, adjust the seat and the exterior mirrors, as required.
Press the

A
» Fig. 87 button and then, within 10 seconds, press the de-
sired memory button
B
. Storing is confirmed by an acoustic signal.
Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing
The function for lowering the front passenger's mirror area during reversing
can be activated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and wipers
.
Turn on the ignition and press the desired memory button
B
» Fig. 87.
Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the
front passenger mirror area » page 84.
Engage reverse gear.
Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
Disengage reverse gear. The set position of the exterior mirror is stored.
Retrieving the saved setting
With the ignition off and the driver’s door open
-press-
the desired memory
button B.
In other cases (e.g. if the ignition is switched on or the driver's door closed),
hold the button.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
Press any button on the seat that is to be set. The driver's seat can also be
stopped by pressing the button on the radio-operated key.
Note
Every time you save new seat and exterior mirror settings for driving forwards,
you must also save the front passenger mirror setting for reversing again.
Memory function of the remote control key
Applies to vehicles that do not have the personalisation function.
Read and observe on page 86 first.
Every time the vehicle is locked, the driver´s seat and exterior mirror settings
are saved and assigned to the key with which the vehicle was locked.
After the following unlocking of the vehicle with the same key and opening the
driver’s door, the driver´s seat and exterior mirrors that are saved to this key
will be adopted.
This function can be used in Infotainment in the menu

/
Seats
acti-
vated/deactivated.
Storing front passenger´s exterior mirror settings for reversing
The function for lowering the front passenger's mirror area during reversing
can be activated in Infotainment in the menu

/
Mirrors and wipers
.
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key and switch on the ignition.
Turn the rotary knob for the exterior mirror control to the position for the
front passenger mirror area » page 84.
Engage reverse gear.
Adjust the front passenger's mirror to the desired position.
Disengage reverse gear. The adjusted position of the exterior mirror is stored
in the remote control key memory.
Stopping the ongoing adjustment
Press any button on the driver's seat or the button on the remote control
key.
87
Seats and head restraints
Folding front passenger seat
Fig. 88
Folding the front passenger seat
forward
Read and observe on page 86 first.
The front passenger seat can, (depending on equipment fitted), be folded for-
ward into a horizontal position.
To fold down, pull the lever in direction of arrow
1
, fold the seat backrest in
the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 88. The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place.
To fold up, pull the lever in direction of arrow
1
, fold back the seat backrest
against the direction of arrow
2
. The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place.
Check this by pulling on the seat and on the backrest.
WARNING
If the seat backrest is folded down, only the seat behind the driver´s seat
can be used to transport passengers.
When transporting objects on the folded seat backrest, the front passen-
ger airbag should be deactivated » page 28.
Do not adjust the seat backrest while driving - it can cause injury and ac-
cidents!
When moving the seat backrest, keep limbs out of the area between the
seat and seat backrest – risk of injury!
Never transport the following items on the seat backrest when folded
forwards.
Objects that could restrict the driver's view.
Objects which make it impossible for the driver to control the vehicle,
e.g. if they roll under the pedals, or could protrude into the driver's zone.
Objects which could lead to injury to passengers due to a change of di-
rection or braking manoeuvre when accelerating sharply.
Armrest setting
Fig. 89
Adjust armrest
Read and observe on page 86 first.
To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow
A
into one
of the locking positions » Fig. 89.
To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow
A
past the stop and then
fold down again.
To Set the armrest lengthways in the direction of arrow
B
Move to the de-
sired position.
Rear seats
Setting the second seat row
Fig. 90
Setting the second seat row
88
Operation
Fig. 91
Adjusting the seat backrest
Move in the longitudinal direction
Pull lever
A
in the direction of arrow
1
and move the seat to the desired po-
sition in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 90. After releasing the control lever
the latch must engage audibly.
Adjusting the angle of the seat backrest
Pull on the strap in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 91 and press the seat
backrest in direction of arrow
2
. The locking mechanism must audibly snap
into place.
To adjust the seat backrest to upright position, pull on the loop in the direc-
tion of arrow
1
and hold the arm in the forward movement until the lock
clicks.
Easy Entry function
Fig. 92 Easy Entry function
The Easy Entry function provides the access to the third seat row of the seat-
seat version
Fold and slide the seat forward
Pull the unlock handle in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 92.
Fold the seat forwards and slide the seat in the direction of arrow
2
.
An reach the third seat row easier, the seat belt to the strap can be fastened to
the tab
A
on the interior trim of the rear body pillar.
Fold back seat
Adjust the seat longitudinally and fold back the backrest.
Check this by pulling on the seat and on the backrest.
Fold down outer backrests of the second seat row
Fig. 93 Fold forward from the passenger compartment / from the lug-
gage compartment
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the seat backrests. Remove
the rear headrests if required » page 92.
Folding forwards from the passenger compartment
Pull on the strap in the direction of arrow
1
in the side seating area and fold
forward the seat backrest in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 93. The locking
mechanism must audibly snap into place.
Fold forward from the luggage compartment
Pull the corresponding lever in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 93. The re-
spective seat backrest is unlocked or folded forward.
Folding backwards
Pull on the strap
1
and fold back the seat backrest against the direct of ar-
row
2
» Fig. 93. The seat backrest mechanism must audibly snap into place.
89
Seats and head restraints
Fold forward middle seat backrest
Fig. 94
Fold forward middle seat back-
rest
Before folding the middle seat back, set the headrest as low as possible - there
is a risk of damage to the slats of the air vents at the rear.
To fold forward, press the securing tab in direction of arrow
1
and fold for-
ward the backrest in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 94.
To fold back, lift the seat backrest in the opposite direction to arrow
2
. The
seat backrest mechanism must audibly snap into place.
WARNING
The seat backrests in the occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no objects
from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compartment
under sudden braking – risk of injury.
CAUTION
When operating the seat backrests, the seat belts must not be pinched - there
is a risk of damage to the seat belts.
Folding seat backs of the third row of seats up / down
Fig. 95 Fold up/down seat backrests
Before folding up/folding down the seat backrests, move the second row
of seats forward, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the seats,
Before folding up the seat backrest, the foldable luggage compartment cover
must be removed .
To fold up, pull the strap
A
in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 95. The seat back
must engage audibly after folding up.
To fold down, press the unlocking tab
B
in direction of arrow
2
and fold
forward the seat backrests in the direction of arrow
3
.
When seat backrests are folded down in vehicles with the variable loading
floor, place the foldable parts
C
on the variable loading floor.
Third-row seats fold up / fold down
Fig. 96 Fold seats up/down
90
Operation
Before lowering the seats, the buckle tongues of the seat belts are to unlock
(the straps must be completely rolled up under the trim of the rear body pillar)
- otherwise there is a risk of damage to the locks, lock tongues as well as the
seats.
Fold the seat backs forwards.
To fold up, pull the straps simultaneously in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 96. The seats are raised in the direction of arrow
2
.
To fold down, press the seats in the direction of arrow
3
.
Fold down armrest
Fig. 97
Fold down armrest
The armrest can be folded down by pulling on the loop
A
in the direction of
arrow » Fig. 97.
The folded-down armrest can be used as a side table.
Headrests
Introduction
Note
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can-
not be adjusted in height.
Adjust height of front head restraint
Fig. 98
Setting the height of the front
headrest
To adjust the height, hold the locking button
A
and move the rest in the de-
sired direction » Fig. 98.
CAUTION
If the tablet holder adapter is secured to the guide rods of the headrests
» page 107, do not push the headrests down to the stop - risk of damaging the
headrests.
Adjust head restraints in the second seat row
Fig. 99
Adjust the height of the headrest in the second seat row
91
Seats and head restraints
Fig. 100
Fold down side bolsters of the
comfortable headrests
Setting the height
Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of
1
» Fig. 99.
To move the restraint down, hold the locking button
A
in the direction of
arrow
2
and push the rest in the direction of arrow
3
.
Comfortable headrests
The head restraints of the second row of seats can be equipped with side bol-
sters. These reduce uncontrolled movement of the head sideways (e.g. when
sleeping).
Adjust the headrest to the initial pulled out position » page 91, Adjust head
restraints in the second seat row.
Fold down the sides of the head restraint in the direction of arrow » Fig. 100.
Removing / insert headrests in the second seat row
Fig. 101 Removing / inserting headrest in the second seat row
To remove, pull the rest out of the seat backrest up to the stop.
Press locking button
A
in the direction of arrow
1,
and pull out the head
restraint in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 101.
To insert, push the rest into the seat backrest in the direction of arrow
3
until the locking button clicks into place.
Adjust the height of the head restraints of the third seat row
Fig. 102
Adjust the height of the headrest of the third seat row
Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of
1
» Fig. 102.
To move the restraint down, hold the locking button
A
in the direction of
arrow
2
and push the rest in the direction of arrow
3
.
Note
The head restraints of the third seat row can not be removed.
Seat heating and ventilation
Introduction
Fig. 103
Button arrangement: Heated front seats (and ventilation) /
heated rear seats
92
Operation
Depending on the equipment, the front seats can be heated or heated and
ventilated. The outer rear seats can only be heated.
Buttons for the seat heating and ventilation » Fig. 103
Left seat heating
Right seat heating
Seat heating and ventilation left
Seat heating and ventilation right
The seat heating / ventilation only works when the engine is running.
When the ignition is switched off, the seat heating / ventilation is also switch-
ed off. if the engine is started again within 10 minutes, then the driver's seat
heating / ventilation is switched on again automatically according to the set-
ting before switching off the ignition.
WARNING
If you have a limited pain and / or temperature sensitivity, e.g. due to medi-
cation, paralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recom-
mend that you do not use the seat heating. If the seat heating is used, we
recommend to make regular breaks in your journey when driving long dis-
tances, so that the body can recuperate from the stress of the journey.
Please consult your doctor, who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
Do not heat seats that do not contain occupants.
Do not heat seats in which objects are secured or resting (e.g. children´s
seat, a bag etc.).
Do not heat seats on which additional slipcovers or protective covers are fit-
ted.
Front and rear seats with seat heating
Fig. 104 The seat heating is switched on at maximum heat: Front
seats/rear seats
Read and observe
and on page 93 first.
To turn on the heating with maximum heat » Fig. 104, press button
or
.
With repeated pressing of the button, the level is down-regulated until it
switches off . The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illu-
minated warning lights underneath / in the button.
Increase in heating power of the rear seat heating can be locked/unlocked.
To do this, press button

on the Climatronic → Tap the function surfaces
/
on the Infotainment screen (applies to vehicles with Climatronic controls
in the rear). In the locked heating power increase, the heating power can only
be adjusted down to turn off.
93
Seats and head restraints
Front seats with heating and ventilation
Fig. 105 Heating switched on / ventilation switched on / heating and
ventilation are switched on simultaneously
Fig. 106
Infotainment screen: Front seat heating and ventilation with
maximum heating / ventilation level switched on
Read and observe and on page 93 first.
Press the button or on the control panel of the air conditioner, a menu
for operating the front seat heating and ventilation is displayed on the Info-
tainment screen » Fig. 106.
Function surfaces for setting the ventilation level
Function surfaces for setting the heating power
Functional surfaces for switching off the ventilation (in addition to the
function surfaces
A
) or for switching off the heating (in addition to the
function surfaces
B
)
If the seat heating was switched on before the ignition was switched off, then
pressing the buttons and will switch the seat heating » Fig. 105 on with
maximum output .
If the seat ventilation was switched on before the ignition was switched off,
then pressing the buttons and , will switch the seat ventilation » Fig. 105 on
with maximum ventilation output .
By repeatedly pressing the button or. , the heating or ventilation output is
controlled down to off. The power of the seat heating is indicated by the num-
ber of illuminated warning lights underneath the switch.
Only the heating or ventilation can be operated using the buttons
or.
.
If ventilation and heating are switched on simultaneously on the Infotainment
screen, under each button
or.
the blue and red warning light illuminates
» Fig. 105 -
, the button
or.
is not functioning (as long as the ventilation
and the heating are switched on simultaneously).
Heated steering wheel
Fig. 107 Steering wheel heating: Manual air conditioning/Climatronic
A
B

94
Operation
Switching heating on/off (applies to the manual air conditioning)
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 107.
Switching heating on/off (applies to Climatronic)
Press the button  on the Climatronic, then tap the function surface
B
1)
on the Infotainment screen » Fig. 107.
When the heating is switched on, the symbol in the function surface
B
is or-
ange.
The heated steering wheel only works when the engine is running.
Setting the heating power (applies to the Climatronic)
Press the button  on the Climatronic, then tap the function surface
Steering wheel heating on the Infotainment screen.
Setting the heating power.
The heating power is displayed by the number of segments in the indicator
light
C
» Fig. 107.
Steering wheel heating together with the driver's seat heating (applies to
the Climatronic)
To activate / deactivate the heated steering wheel with the driver's seat
heating, press the button

on the Climatronic, then tap the function sur-
face
Link seat/steering wheel heating
in the Infotainment screen.
To switch on / off the heated steering wheel, press the button for the driver
seat heating.
If the heated steering wheel is turned on together with the driver's seat heat-
ing, then the function surface
is displayed on the Infotainment screen. This
can be used to switch the heated steering wheel off/on.
Practical features
Passenger compartment features
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
cause an accident!
Do not carry any objects on the front passenger seat except objects de-
signed for this purpose (e.g. child seats) – risk of accident!
No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments must be closed while
driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened cover or from the items in
the compartment.
Make sure that no objects protrude from the compartments - there is
danger of injury!
Do not exceed the permissible load for the storage compartments and
pockets - it may cause injury or there is the risk of damaging the compart-
ments and pockets!
Ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like may only be placed in the ashtray - risk
of fire!
The storage compartments and the waste containers are not a substitute
for the ashtray and must also not be used for such purposes – risk of fire!
CAUTION
No not place large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and pockets
- there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
1)
Depending on the equipment, one of the function surface versions is displayed.
95
Practical features
Parking ticket holder
Fig. 108
Parking ticket holder
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The ticket holder is provided for the attachment of e.g. parking tickets.
Storage compartment on the driver's side
Fig. 109
Opening the storage compartment / card holder
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
To open, lift the handle and fold out the compartment » Fig. 109 .
To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
A card holder is located in the storage compartment » Fig. 109 .
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 0.5 kg.
Storage compartments in the doors
Fig. 110 Storage compartments: in the front door/in the rear door
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
Storage compartments » Fig. 110
Storage compartment
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
The reflective vest can be stowed in the storage compartments in the door
» page 289.
WARNING
The storage compartment
A
» Fig. 110n the front door is to be used exclu-
sively for storing objects which do not protrude - there is the danger of
limiting the operating range of the side airbags.
A
B
96
Operation
Storage compartment in the front centre console
Fig. 111 Opening storage compartment/ non-lockable storage compart-
ment
Read and observe
and on page 95 first.
To open, press the ridge in the direction of arrow » Fig. 111 -
.
To close, pull on the ridge against the direction of the arrow.
Certain models do not have a storage compartment lid» Fig. 111 -
.
Phonebox
Fig. 112
Phonebox
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The storage compartment in the front centre console can be equipped with
the Phonebox function.
If a phone is placed face up on the pad in the storage compartment » Fig. 112,
the phone signal is amplified by the roof antenna.
Telephones that support the standard for wireless Qi charging can be charged
wirelessly in the storage compartment.
While wireless charging is taking place, no objects may be between the pad
and the telephone being charged.
WARNING
The telephone may become warm during wireless charging, so this should
be removed carefully from the tray.
Metal objects between the pad and the telephone to be charged can get
hot due to the action of the induction field - There is a risk of injury. If there
is a metal object in the storage compartment that has become hot, then
take out the telephone and let the object cook in the storage compart-
ment!
CAUTION
Metal objects between the pad and the telephone to be charged can get hot
due to the action of the induction field - There is a risk damage to the tele-
phone.
With some telephones, the charging process may be interrupted or the tele-
phone may switch off due to getting hot.
No electronic or magnetic storage media (e.g. SD cards, USB sticks, cards
with magnetic strips or chip) may be placed between the support and tele-
phone to be charged - there is a risk of data loss and damage to this data carri-
er.
If a message appears in Infotainment that the telephone can not be charged,
then proceed as follows.
Check that no objects are between the pad and the telephone being charg-
ed. If this is the case, then take out the object and the telephone. Place the
telephone on the pad centrally on the telephone symbol.
Check if the position of the telephone to be charged has not changed dur-
ing the journey. If this is the case, then take out the telephone and place it
back on the pad centrally on the telephone symbol.
Note
At the start of the wireless charging process, the appropriate message ap-
pears on the Infotainment screen.
For the optimum telephone signal strength and uninterrupted wireless
charging, we recommend position the telephone in the storage compartment
without the protective sleeve, if possible.
Place a max. 160x80 mm phone in the storage compartment.
97
Practical features
USB inputs
Fig. 113 USB front inputs
Fig. 114
USB rear input
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The USB input is located in the lockable storage compartment or above the
non-lockable storage compartment in the front centre console » Fig. 113,
The USB input is also in the rear centre console depending on the equipment
fitted » Fig. 114.
The USB inputs in the front centre console can be used for charging and for
data transmission. The USB inputs in the rear centre console can only be used
for charging.
Information for use » page 154, USB input.
Cup holders
Fig. 115 Cup holder in front/rear centre console
Fig. 116
Cup holder in the armrest: second row of seats / third row of
seats
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The cup holders are located in the front centre console
A
, rear
B
» Fig. 115
and in the rear armrest
C
-- » Fig. 116.
In the holders
A
, a beverage container can be opened with one hand by push-
ing the container into the holder and turning the lid.
The cup holder is also located in the folding table » page 103.
98
Operation
WARNING
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
Note
Behind the cup holders
D
there is a storage compartment for the mobile
phone.
Waste container
Fig. 117 Waste container: inserting and moving/opening
Fig. 118 Replace bags
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
Insert waste container
Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
Push the waste container in the rear area in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 117.
If required, push the waste container in the direction of arrow
B
.
Remove the waste container
Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow
A
» Fig. 117.
Open/close waste container
Lift the cover in the direction
C
» Fig. 117.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
Remove the waste container from the slot.
Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 118.
Pull the bag together with the frame downwards in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bag from the frame.
Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the bag frame in the di-
rection of arrow
3
.
Insert the bag containing the frame in the direction of arrow
4
into the con-
tainer body, so that the two lugs engage audibly with the frame.
Note
We recommend that you use 20 x 30 cm bags.
99
Practical features
Storage compartment underneath the front armrest
Fig. 119 Open storage compartment / interior of the compartment
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
To open the storage compartment, lift the armrest until it stops » Fig. 119.
To close, lower the armrest.
Interior of the compartment » Fig. 119;
Cup holder
Storage compartment for storing the cover of the 12-volt power outlet
Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
Storage compartment for storing two coins and a card
Storage compartment
The part with the cup holder can be removed or rotated. By removing, the in-
terior of the storage compartment is increased, turning creates an additional
tray.
Storage net in the front centre console
Fig. 120
Storage net
A
B
C
D
E
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The storage nets» Fig. 120 are intended for the storage of e.g. maps, maga-
zines, etc.
The maximum permissible load of the net is 0.5 kg.
Glasses storage box
Fig. 121
Opening the glasses storage box
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
To open, press the
--
button. The compartment folds in the direction of the
arrow » Fig. 121.
To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it
audibly clicks into place.
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
The box must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.
100
Operation
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 122 Open storage compartment / close storage compartment and
open air supply
Fig. 123
Open upper storage compart-
ment
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
Lower storage compartment
The storage compartment below with an inner light (the light is on when open-
ing the storage compartment) equipped, a pen, card holder, with storage com-
partments for storing coins, a map and an air outlet.
To open, press the -- button. The cover folds in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 122.
To close, swivel the cover in the direction of arrow
2
until it audibly clicks
into place.
Upper storage compartment
To open, press the -- button. The cover folds in the arrow direction» Fig. 123.
To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
Air supply
To open, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position » Fig. 122.
To close, turn the rotary switch until it stops in the position .
Opening the air supply when the air conditioning system is switched on allows
cooled air to flow into the storage compartment.
Opening the air inlet when the air conditioning system is on causes fresh or in-
terior air to flow into the storage compartment.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is above 1.5 kg, of
that of the storage compartment below 3 kg.
Storage compartment under the front seat
Fig. 124
Opening the storage compart-
ment
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
To open, pull the handle in direction of arrow
1
pull and open the compart-
ment in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 124.
To close, push in the compartment away from arrow
2
until it audibly clicks
into place.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 1.5 kg.
101
Practical features
Storage compartments for umbrellas
Fig. 125
Storage compartment for an
umbrella - view example in the
left door
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The storage compartments in the front doors » Fig. 125 can be used to store
an umbrella.
Clothes hook
Fig. 126
Clothes hooks
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the middle door pillars of the vehicle and on
the handle of the headliner above each of the rear doors » Fig. 126.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.
WARNING
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
of clothing hung up.
To hang the clothes do not use hangers - there is a risk of limiting the ef-
fectiveness of head airbags.
Ensure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impair your vision
to the outside.
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats
Fig. 127
Map pockets
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The map pockets are intended for storage of maps, magazines, etc.
Storage pockets at the inner sides of the front seats
Fig. 128
Storage pocket
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The storage pockets are located on the inside of the front seats » Fig. 128 and
are used to store small and light objects (e.g. mobile phones).
The maximum permissible load of each of the pockets is 200 g.
102
Operation
Folding table on the front seat rest
Fig. 129 Table fold up / fold down table and slide out cup holders
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
Folding up/folding down
To fold up, lift the table in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 129.
To fold down or adjust tilt press the locking button in the direction of the
arrow
2
and adjust the tilt or fold down the table the direction of arrow
3
until stop.
The maximum permissible load for the table is 8.5 kg.
Cup holder
With the table folded up, the cup holder can be slid out in the direction of ar-
row
A
» Fig. 129.
Insertion takes place in the reverse order.
WARNING
During the trip to the table must be in folded-down - otherwise there is
danger of injury.
Do not use any cups or beakers which are made of brittle material (e.g.
glass, porcelain). This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. If the vehicle moves,
they may spill – risk of scalding!
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Fig. 130
Non-lockable storage compart-
ment
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
Depending on equipment, a non-lockable storage compartment is located in
the rear center console » Fig. 130.
Removable through-loading bag
Fig. 131 Secure through-loading bag front / rear
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
The removable through-loading bag (hereinafter referred to as bag) is used ex-
clusively for transporting skis and poles (max. 2 pairs).
Stowing bag and skis
Fold the middle seat backrest forward » page 90. If necessary, fold down the
third row of seats » page 90.
Push the skis and poles with the tips backwards into the bag and secure the
bag. The loading bag can be shortened in relation to the length of the ski by
means of the bands attached inside the bag.
103
Practical features
Place the empty bag in the opening in such a way that the end of the bag
with the zip is in the boot.
Securing bag and skis
Tighten the drawstring
A
around the skis on the base of the bindings
» Fig. 131. The strap must hold the skis tight.
Insert the lock tongue
B
into the belt buckle of the middle seat.
The carabiners on the two sides latch into the lashing eyes
C
. To better ac-
cess the eyelets, fold forward the seat backrests of the second seat row
» page 89.
Pull the belt
D
taut.
WARNING
The total weight of the skis which are transported must not exceed 10 kg.
Always stow and secure the skis and the bag securely - otherwise there is
a risk of injury or accident!
Blanket
Read and observe and on page 95 first.
To increase comfort for the occupants, the vehicle may be equipped with a
blanket.
The blanket is in a bag that can be attached to one of the following locations.
On the guide rods of the front headrests.
In the storage pockets on the backs of the front seats.
On operating lever for adjusting the second seat row in the longitudinal di-
rection.
Electrical sockets
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dashboard. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
cause an accident!
WARNING (Continued)
Safely stow all devices during the journey to prevent them from being
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – risk of death!
The devices may warm up during operation – risk of injury or fire!
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
The 12-Volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving
the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle.
CAUTION
When using the 12 volt power outlets the following notes are to be observed.
The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts, otherwise the
electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.
12-volt socket in the front centre console
Fig. 132 Cover of the 12 volt power outlet
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
To use, open the storage compartment, remove the cover of the socket
» Fig. 132 and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket.
104
Operation
12 volt socket in the rear centre console
Fig. 133 Cover of the 12 volt outlet / Open the cover of the 12 volt out-
let
Read and observe
and on page 104 first.
To use, open the cover
A
or fold open the cover
B
in the direction of arrow
» Fig. 133.
Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
12 volt socket in luggage compartment
Fig. 134
Cover of the 12 volt power out-
let
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
To use, open the cover of the socket » Fig. 134 and plug the electrical appli-
ance plug into the socket.
230-volt socket in the rear centre console
Fig. 135 Open the cover of the 230 volt outlet / 230 volt outlet
Read and observe and on page 104 first.
The 230-volt socket has a child safety lock. When inserting the plug, the fuse
is released, the socket is activated and the warning light above the socket is
illuminates green (if this flashes red, then the socket is deactivated).
The socket works with the engine running (in STOP mode in vehicles with the
START-STOP system) and for about 10 minutes after the engine is switched
off, provided an appliance was still connected prior to switching off the engine
(the warning light flashes green)).
To use, fold up the cover of the socket in the direction of arrow » Fig. 135
and plug the electrical appliance plug into the socket.
An automatic deactivation of the socket can take place, for example, for
the following reasons.
Excessive current.
Low state of charge of the battery.
High outlet temperature.
If disabling reasons no longer exist, the automatic activation of the socket can
be done.
Should no automatic activation of the socket take place, the connected devi-
ces must be disconnected from the power outlet and reconnect after a short
time.
105
Practical features
WARNING
Make sure that no liquid or moisture enters into the socket - it can be fa-
tal! If fluid does manage to get into the power socket, completely dry out
the socket before reuse.
The child lock on the power socket is unlocked when using adapters and
extension cables which carry volts – risk of injury!
Do no insert any objects (e.g. knitting needles) into the contacts of the
power socket – risk of death!
CAUTION
The power socket can only be used for connecting approved electrical ac-
cessories with a two-pin 230V plug, with a total power uptake of up to
150 watt.
The plug of the electrical appliance must be plugged in up to the stop, other-
wise the child safety lock can be unlocked and the socket may be activated
but the electric appliance is still not receiving power.
Do not connect bulbs with neon tubes in the socket - there is a risk of dam-
aging the lamp.
For appliances with an independent power source (e.g. such as notebooks),
first connect the power source itself and only after that connect the appliance.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Introduction
The ashtray can be used for disposing of ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like etc
WARNING
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Ashtray
Fig. 136 Removing/opening/disassembling the ashtray
Read and observe on page 106 first.
Removing/inserting
Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 136. To insert, pro-
ceed in reverse order.
Open/close
To open the ashtray, turn the cover in the direction of arrow
B
. Closing
takes place in reverse order.
Disassembling / assembling
To disassemble turn the entire cover in the direction
1
until it stops and re-
move in direction of arrow
2
. Assembly takes place in reverse order.
106
Operation
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 137 Cigarette lighter
Read and observe on page 106 first.
To use, open the respective storage compartment and push in the lighter un-
til it stops » Fig. 137.
Wait until the glowing lighter protrudes, remove it immediately and use.
Put the lighter back in the socket and close the storage compartment.
WARNING
The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burning, fire or
damage to the vehicle interior.
Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - it can cause burns.
Note
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12 volt socket.
Tablet holder
Introduction
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and
max. 195 mm can be secured in the holder.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
Attaching the rear headrests
Fig. 138
Inserting: Adapter/Holder
Fig. 139 Removal: Holder/Adapter
Read and observe on page 107 first.
Toinsert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
and clip in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 138 » .
Clip in the holder in the direction of arrow
2
into the adapter.
To remove, pull on the securing tab
A
in direction of arrow
3
and take the
holder out of the adapter in the direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 139.
Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow
5
from the
guide rods of the headrest.
107
Practical features
WARNING
Be care with the adapter - otherwise there is a risk of finger injury.
Handling the holder
Fig. 140
Tilting and rotating the holder
Fig. 141
Adjusting the holder size
Read and observe on page 107 first.
The holder may be by 30° in the direction of the arrow
1
tipped and by 360°
in the direction of arrow
2
turned » Fig. 140.
To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A
in the direction of ar-
row
3
and push the part
B
in the direction of arrow
4
to the desired posi-
tion » Fig. 141.
Note
If there is no external device in the holder, then we recommend that the part
B
is moved fully down. Otherwise, irritating noises may occur at certain
speeds.
Transport of cargo
Luggage compartment
Introduction
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to
the shift in centre-of-gravity. Therefore, adjust the speed and driving mode ac-
cordingly.
When transporting cargo the following the instructions must be adhered to
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or securing nets so that they can-
not slip.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
Tyre pressure is to match the load.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the boot lid is opened or closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will extinguish au-
tomatically after around 10 minutes.
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – risk of injury!
An unfixed or improperly fixed load can slip during a sudden manoeuvre or
an accident - danger of injury!
Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death!
When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats .
108
Operation
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged.
Make sure that the heating elements of the rear window heater, the ele-
ments of the integrated aerial in the rear window or in the rear side windows
are not damaged by abrasive items.
Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the lug-
gage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the com-
partments.
Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
Fastening elements
Fig. 142
Fastening elements: Version 1/version 2
Fig. 143
Fastening elements: Variant 3
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.
Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 142and » Fig. 143
Mounting bar with integrated hooks for fixing fastening nets.
Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and securing nets
Fixing hooks of fastening systems in the trough of the foldable luggage
compartment cover
Lashing eyes for fastening cargo and securing nets
Hooks for securing fastening nets
The maximum permissible static load for the individual lashing eyes
B
and
D
is 350 kg.
Fixing nets
Fig. 144
Fastening examples for nets: Fastening examples for nets: five-
seat version/five-seat version with the variable loading floor
A
B
C
D
E
109
Transport of cargo
Fig. 145 Fastening examples for nets: Seven-seat version
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 144 and » Fig. 145
Horizontal pocket
Floor net
Vertical pocket
Longitudinal net
Variable net
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
If also equipped with the variable loading floor and the spare or emergency
wheel five-seat version, the lashing eyes
D
can be used for securing the longi-
tudinal pocket » Fig. 142 on page 109.
Fastening strip with moveable hook
Fig. 146 Sliding hook onto the fastening strip/removing hook
A
B
C
D
E
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
A fastening bar is located on both sides of the luggage compartment with two
moveable hooks each, in order to attach small items of luggage, such as bags,
etc.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 7.5 kg.
Moving the hook
Hold hook upward in direction of arrow
1
and move to the desired position
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 146.
Fold down the hook until it stops in the arrow direction
3
.
Removing hooks
The hook can be removed only in the front area of the attachment bar.
Fold the hook upwards in direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 146 until it disengages,
and remove in the direction of arrow
5
.
Inserting hook
The hook can be removed only in the front region of the attachment bar.
Position the hook on the fastening strip in a vertical position in direction of
arrow
5
and lightly press on it » Fig. 146.
Fold down the hook until it stops against the direction of arrow
4
.
Foldable hook
Fig. 147
Fold down hook
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
One foldable hook for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., is
provided on each side of the luggage compartment.
To use it, pull down the hook in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 147.
110
Operation
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
Fasten the flooring
Fig. 148
fixing the floor covering
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The floor covering can be fixed by means of a hook on the frame of the lug-
gage compartment lid » Fig. 148.
CAUTION
Do not lift the floor covering too high when attaching the hook - there is a risk
of damage to the roof trim.
Floor covering on both sides
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
A double-sided floor covering can be fitted in the luggage compartment. One
side is made of fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet
or dirty items ).
CAUTION
The double-sided flooring can be used in the five-seat variant, and for vehicles
without the variable loading floor.
Roll-up cover
Fig. 149 Roll-up cover: extending/retracting/removing
Fig. 150 Stowing the roll-out cover
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
Extending
Grasp the cover at grip-point
A
and pull it out in the direction of the arrow
1
until it audibly clicks into place» Fig. 149.
111
Transport of cargo
Retracting
Push the cover in the handle area
A
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 149.
The cover rolls up automatically. The rolled-up cover can now be removed.
Removing/inserting
Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow
3
and remove
the cover in the arrow direction
4
» Fig. 149.
To insert, proceed in reverse order.
Stowing - seven-seat variant
The removed roll-up cover can be stowed in the recesses of the luggage com-
partment side trim.
Lift the variable loading floor in direction of arrow
1
and slide cover into the
side recesses » Fig. 150.
Open the side pockets on both sides of the luggage compartment in the di-
rection of arrows
2
.
Insert the roll-up cover in an inclined position in the recess of the right side
panel in the direction of arrow
3
and stow in arrow direction
4
.
Close the side pockets on both sides of the luggage compartment in the op-
posite direction to arrow
2
and restore the original position of the variable
loading floor.
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the roll-up cover - there is a risk of damage
to the cover and a risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or a vehicle
collision!
CAUTION
It is possible that the roll-up luggage compartment cover rolls more slowly
during winter weather conditions. This is not a defect.
Net partition
Fig. 151
Net partition behind the rear seats
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The net partition can be installed behind the front or rear seats (in the seven-
seat variant behind the second row of seats).
When installing the net partition behind the second seat row, fold forward the
third seat row.
Install / remove net partition behind the rear seats (behind the second seat
row)
To the install the cross rod into the mount
A
, first insert it at side and then
press it forward. Insert the transverse rod into the mount
A
on the other
side of the vehicle in the same way » Fig. 151.
Latch the carabines
B
at the belt ends into the lashing eyes
C
.
In the case of vehicles with the variable loading floor,lock the carabiners into
the front lashing eyes
D
» Fig. 142 on page 109.
Pull the straps at the free ends tightly
D
» Fig. 151.
Removingis carried out in the reverse order.
Fitting/removing net partition behind the front seats
The process is analogous to that behind the rear seats and behind the second
row of seats.
The lashing eyes for hooking the carabiner are located under the central body
pillars.
112
Operation
Side storage compartment and trays
Fig. 152 Side shelf removal / open side pocket
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The integrated storage compartment
A
is suitable for stowing small objects
weighing up to 1.5 kg in total » Fig. 152.
Side shelf - five-seater variant
The side shelf with removable cover
B
is designed for storing small objects of
up to a total weight of 2.5 kg.
Remove the compartment cover
B
in direction of arrow » Fig. 152.
To insert, proceed in reverse order.
Side compartment - seven-seat variant
To open, pull on the loop
A
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 152.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
The side compartment must be closed while driving.
Cargo elements
Fig. 153
Removal: Removing: Variant 1/Variant 2/Variant 3/fastening ex-
ample of the load
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The cargo elements are designed for mounting and securing loads with a maxi-
mum gross weight of 8 kg.
Before use, remove the Cargo elements in the direction of the arrows
» Fig. 153 - , , .
To access the Cargo elements in version 3, first fold down the side parts of
the floor covering in the direction of arrows
A
» Fig. 153 - .
Use the cargo elements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear
seats » Fig. 153
.
After use, stow the Cargoelements in their original position.
113
Transport of cargo
Removable light
Fig. 154
Removable light
Fig. 155
Removing light/inserting light
Read and observe and on page 108 first.
The lamp is for the illumination of the luggage compartment or it can be used
as a portable lamp.
The lamp is equipped with a magnet. As a result, this can, for example, be fitted
to the vehicle body.
Description of the light » Fig. 154
Button to turn the light that has been removed on / off
Part that lights up when the lamp is in the mount
Part that lights up when the lamp is not in the mount
If the light is in the mount, this will illuminate when the boot lid is opened.
To remove, hold the light in the area
D
and swivel in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 155.
A
B
C
To switch on the removed light, press button
A
» Fig. 154. Pressing the light
again will switch it off.
To insert, first of all insert the light with the rear part
E
into the mount
» Fig. 155 and then push the light in the direction of arrow
2
until it audibly
clicks into place.
If the light is not switched off and is correctly inserted in the mount, the LED
diodes in the front part of the light
C
» Fig. 154 are automatically switched off.
If the lamp is not correctly inserted into the holder, this does not light up when
the boot lid is opened and the rechargeable batteries are not charged.
Lamp charges
The lamp is supplied by three rechargeable type NiMH AAA batteries (voltage
1.2 V). The batteries are charged continuously with the engine running (to fully
charge the battery takes approximately 3 hours).
Replace batteries » page 301.
CAUTION
The light is not waterproof, so it must be protected from humidity - otherwise
there is risk of damage.
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment (Estate)
Introduction
In its five-seat variant of the variable loading floor of two panels. The panels
can be handled separately.
In the seven-seat variant of the variable loading floor consists of one panel.
114
Operation
Set the variable loading floor to the upper/lower position
Fig. 156
Set the variable loading floor to the upper/lower position
The front and rear panels of the variable loading floor can be set in the upper
or lower position as follows. The handling of the two panels is identical.
Raise the variable loading floor by the handle
A
in direction of arrow
1
and
slide partially in the direction of arrow
2
.
To set to the upper position, lift the variable loading floor in the front area
and lay on the edge
B
.
To set to the lower position slide the variable loading floor in direction of ar-
row
2
. After this has detached from the edge
B
, place the front of the pan-
el on the floor covering of the luggage compartment.
Insert the panel in the direction of arrow
3
until it stops and lay in direction
of arrow
4
.
Note
For vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, the variable
loading floor cannot be adjusted to the lower position.
Positions of the variable loading floor
Fig. 157
Setting options of the variable loading floor
The panels of the variable loading floor can be adjusted to the following posi-
tions » Fig. 157.
Both panels in the upper position
The front panel in the upper position, the rear panel in the lower position
The front panel in the lower position, the rear panel in the upper position
Both panels in the lower position
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor in the upper posi-
tion » Fig. 157 - is 25 kg. For the transport of heavy loads, set the panel to
the lower position.
The maximum permissible load on both panels simultaneously in the top posi-
tion in the five-seat version » Fig. 157 - is 75 kg. To transport heavy loads, set
the panels to the lower position.
Note
For vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, the variable
loading floor cannot be adjusted to the lower position.
115
Transport of cargo
Dividing the luggage compartment
Fig. 158 Dividing the luggage compartment
To subdivide the luggage compartment, lift the rear panel of the variable
loading floor by the handle
A
in direction of arrow
1
and insert into the
grooves behind the guide tabs
B
in direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 158.
In the grooves, the variable loading floor is secured against movement.
Fold up/fold down the variable loading floor
Fig. 159
Fold front panel forward
To fold up the front panel, lift this using handle
A
in direction of arrow
1
.
The panel is inserted into the grooves behind the guide tabs
B
» Fig. 159.
To fold down the panel, slide up the panel so that it releases from the groove.
Then fold down the panel.
Variable loading floor on both sides
Fig. 160
Reversible variable loading floor
The rear panel of the variable loading floor is reversible. One side is made of
fabric, the other side is washable (suitable for transporting wet or dirty items ).
Note
On vehicles with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment, the rear pan-
el of the variable loading floor is not double-sided.
Removable partition
Fig. 161 Remove partition: Five-seater variant/seven-seat variant
The luggage compartment contains a partition that prevents cargo from shift-
ing into the passenger compartment.
The partition can be removed in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 161.
Transportation on the roof rack
The roof cross beams can be attached to the roof rail depending on the equip-
ment fitted.
116
Operation
Mounting and dismounting of the roof bars is carried out according to the in-
structions provided.
Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. the carrier is 75 kg.
WARNING
For road safety when transporting cargo on the roof rack, observe the fol-
lowing instructions.
Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly us-
ing suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, the handling of the car may change as a result of the
displacement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to the current circumstances.
The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and permissible total ve-
hicle weight must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk of acci-
dent!
CAUTION
Make sure that the sliding / tilting roof or the boot lid does not collide with
the roof load when opened.
Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported.
Note
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Heating and ventilation
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
Introduction
The heating heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning sys-
tem also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system works under the following conditions.
The cooling system is switched on.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is below 2 ° C.
The blower is switched on.
Fogging is prevented when the cooling system is switched on.
It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly acti-
vating the air recirculation system » page 121.
Health protection
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
The difference between the indoor temperature and the outdoor air temper-
ature should not be greater than about 5 ° C.
The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
Once a year, the air conditioning should be disinfected by a specialist garage.
WARNING
The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there could be an accident.
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
117
Heating and ventilation
Note
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
After switching on the cooling Condensation from the evaporator of the air
conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is not a
leak!
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
ensure that the engine cools down.
Heating and manual air conditioning
Fig. 162
Controls of the heating / air conditioning
Read and observe on page 117 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding button » Fig. 162.
Setting temperature
Reduce the temperature/
Increase the temperature
Set the blower speed (Level 0: Adjust the fan speed (level 0: fan off; level
6: highest speed)
Setting the direction of the air outlet » page 122
Depending on equipment fitted:
Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 123
Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 80
Switch the cooling system on/off
Switch on/off the rear window heating » page 80
Switch recirculation on/off » page 121
A
B
C
D

When the function is switched on, the indicator lamp below the button lights
up.
Information on the cooling system
After pressing the button , the warning light underneath the button illumi-
nates even if not all conditions are met for the cooling system. The cooling
system starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met
» page 117.
When the air distribution control is turned to position the cooling system is
activated.
Note
To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air condi-
tioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstan-
ces.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 163 Front operating elements
118
Operation
Fig. 164
Rear operating elements
Read and observe on page 117 first.
Individual functions can be set or switched on by turning the dial or pressing
the corresponding button » Fig. 163.
Display the temperature setting for the left side
Display the temperature setting for the right side
Setting the direction of the air outlet » page 122
Adjust fan speed (the setting is indicated by the number of illuminated
control lamps shown in the knob)
Turn to the left: Reduce speed up to turning off the Climatronic
Turn to the right: Increase speed
Adjust the temperature for the left side (or for both sides)
1)
Reduce the temperature/
Increase the temperature
Adjust the temperature for the right side (or for both sides)
2)
Reduce the temperature/
Increase the temperature
Depending on equipment fitted:
Auxiliary heating and ventilation on / switch off » page 123
 Residual heat function on / off » page 119
Interior temperature sensor
Display of the temperature set in the rear » Fig. 164
Set the rear temperature- deactivation/activation of the keys can be car-
ried out by pressing the button  on the Climatronic → by tapping the
function surfaces
on the Infotainment screen.
Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Switch recirculation on/off » page 121
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Intense air flow to the windscreen on / off (when switching on, the air
flow to the windows and  is also switched on)
Switch on/off the rear window heating » page 80
Switching the windscreen heater on/off » page 80
Setting Climatronic in Infotainment ( can also be operated with some
functions)
Synchronize the temperature inside the entire vehicle according to the
temperature setting on the driver's side
Switching automatic mode on » page 120
Switch the cooling system on/off
When the function is switched on, an indicator lamp lights up inside or below
the button.
Setting temperature
The temperature can be set on the Climatronic control unit or in Infotain-
ment» page 120. In the range between 16 °C to 29.5°C, an automatic tempera-
ture control takes place.
At a temperature setting below 16 ° C,

lights up in the temperature display,
the Climatronic functions with maximum cooling performance.
At a temperature setting over 29.5 ° C,

lights up in the temperature display,
the Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
Residual heat function

After switching off the ignition, the engine residual heat is used for heat reten-
tion in the vehicle interior. The function can only be switched on with the igni-
tion off within 30 minutes after stopping the engine. The residual heat func-
tion turns off after about 30 minutes, or when the battery has a low charge
state.
CAUTION
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor
H
» Fig. 163 - the function of
the Climatronic could be affected.




1)
Applies to left-hand drive vehicles.
2)
Applies to right-hand drive vehicles.
119
Heating and ventilation
Note
In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in en-
gine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
The setting of the Climatronic is stored in the active user account personali-
sation » page 59.
Operate Climatronic in Infotainment
Fig. 165
Infotainment: example display of
the main Climatronic menu
Read and observe on page 117 first.
To display the main menu press the button

on the Climatronic control
unit.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 165
A
Displays the current operation mode (or set the operation mode) of
the Climatronic
B
Set the desired temperature (front - left side)
C
Set the desired temperature (front - right side)
D
Setting the power in  operation
E
Switching on/off and adjusting the fan speed, cooling system, air dis-
tribution and air recirculation
a)
F
Set the desired temperature (rear)
Colour representation of the air flow from the air vents at the front
(Blue colour - temperature reduction / red colour - temperature in-
crease)
 Switching on/off the Climatronic
 Switch the temperature synchronisation on/off throughout the entire
interior of the vehicle according to the temperature setting on the
driver's side
a)
Locking/unlocking of the temperature setting and heating of the rear
seats using the rear buttons
a)
  Switch Air Care function on/off
Set the auxiliary heater and ventilation
Switch the windscreen heating on/off
a)
Turn the steering wheel heating on/off
a)
Other Climatronic settings
a)
When function is switched on, the symbol in the function surface is green.
Other Climatronic settings
Press the  button on the Climatronic control panel → Tap the function sur-
face on the Infotainment screen.
Air con. profile
- Setting the operating performance

during operation (ap-
plies to Infotainment Swing)
Automatic air recirculation
- Automatic re-circulated air mode on/off
Automatic auxiliary heater
- Quick interior heating on/off
Automatic windscreen heating
- Activates/deactivates the automatic windscreen
heating
Climatronic - automatic operation
Read and observe on page 117 first.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
To turn on, press

» Fig. 163 on page 118 .
To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
speed. The temperature regulation is continued.
Holding the button  will turn on  automatically.
Operating modes
Automatic mode works in three modes - moderate, medium, and intensive.
Setting the different modes is carried out via the function surface
D
» Fig. 165
on page 120.
After the automatic mode is switched on, Climatronic works in the last selec-
ted mode. The currently selected mode is displayed in the Infotainment dis-
play.
120
Operation
Air distribution control
Read and observe on page 117 first.
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the In-
terior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
To switch on, press the button. The warning light below the button lights
up.
To switch off, press the button again. The warning light below the button
goes out.
Heating and manual air conditioning system
If the air distribution control is set to position when the recirculation modes
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off. By pressing the
button, the air recirculation also in this position can be switched on again.
When the cooling system (

button) is switched on and the temperature reg-
ulator is “turned” to the left, the recirculated-air mode is switched on.
Climatronic
The Climatronic can have a sensor that measures the air recirculation mode
and automatically turns on if there is an increased concentration of pollutants
in the incoming air.
When the pollutant concentration decreases to the normal level, the recircula-
ted air mode is automatically switched off.
Automatic switch-on/switch-off of the air recirculation function can be set in
the Infotainment screen, by pressing the

button on the Climatronic and by
then pressing the function surface
Automatic air recirculation
.
A shut-off of the air recirculation function takes place automatically by press-
ing the button, possibly depending on the moisture conditions in the vehi-
cle interior.
WARNING
The air recirculation cannot be switched on for a longer period of time be-
cause there is no supply of fresh air from the outside. “Stale air” may result
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as the windows mist up, turn the air
recirculation mode off immediately - there is a risk of accident!
CAUTION
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air opera-
tion is switched on. The smoke sucked from inside the vehicle is deposited on
the evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when
the air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through
considerable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Climatronic - Air Care function
Fig. 166
Example display of the Air Care
function
Read and observe on page 117 first.
The Air CareFunction reduces pollutant penetration contained in the outside
air into the vehicle.
When the function is activated, the air in the vehicle is circulated and cleaned
at the same time. The cleaning process is displayed by the zones displayed in
the Infotainment screen.
To switch on/off, press the

button on the Climatronic control panel, and
then tap on the function surface


Active
on the Infotainment
screen» Fig. 166.
To ensure correct Air Care functioning, all doors and windows including the
panoramic sliding/tilting roof must be closed.
When opening a door or a window, the corresponding message is displayed in
the Infotainment screen.
121
Heating and ventilation
Air outlet vents
Fig. 167
Air vents at the front
Fig. 168 Air vents at the rear
Read and observe on page 117 first.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4
» Fig. 167 and 6 » Fig. 168, and the vents can be opened and closed individually.
The setting of the airflow direction is carried out by moving the adjustment el-
ement
A
» Fig. 167 or » Fig. 168 in the desired direction.
Opening
Turn the regulator
B
» Fig. 167 downwards.
Turn the regulator
C
» Fig. 168 upwards.
Closing
Turn the regulator
B
» Fig. 167 downwards.
Turn the regulator
C
» Fig. 168 downwards.
Depending on the setting of the air distribution, the air stream comes out of
the following air vents.
Set the direction of the air
outlet
Air vents » Fig. 167 and » Fig. 168
 1, 2, 4
1, 2, 4, 5, 7
3, 4, 6
4, 5, 7
3, 4, 5, 6, 7
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation)
Introduction
The auxiliary heating heats the vehicle interior as well as the engine. For heat-
ing, fuel is consumed from the fuel tank.
The auxiliary ventilation enables fresh air to flow into the vehicle interior with
the engine switched off, whereby the interior temperature is effectively de-
creased (e.g. with the vehicle parked in the sun).
The auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventilation) (referred to just as auxil-
iary heating in the following) ensures the heating / ventilation depending on
the setting of the air conditioning and the air outlet vents before switching off
the ignition.
122
Operation
WARNING
The auxiliary heating must never be operated in closed rooms (e.g. garag-
es) – risk of poisoning!
The auxiliary heating must not be allowed to run during refuelling – risk of
fire.
The exhaust pipe of the auxiliary heating is located on the underside of
the vehicle. If you want to use the auxiliary heating, do not park the car in
places where the exhaust fumes can come into contact with flammable
materials such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spilled fuel etc. - risk of
fire.
CAUTION
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free (e.g. of ice, snow or
leaves) to ensure that the auxiliary heating operates properly.
Note
The auxiliary heating switches the blower on, if it has achieved a coolant tem-
perature of approx. 50 °C.
In the engine compartment, water vapour may form during the operation of
the heater.
Power on/off
Fig. 169 Button for switching on / off (Climatronic / manual air condi-
tioning)
Read and observe and on page 123 first.
Functional requirements of the auxiliary heating.
The charge state of the vehicle battery is sufficient.
The fuel supply is adequate (the warning light is not illuminated in the
instrument cluster).
Manual on / off
Using the button on the control panel of the air conditioner» Fig. 169.
Using the (switch on) /  (switch off) button on the remote control opera-
tion.
Automatic on / off
Via an enabled pre-selection time in Infotainment.
According to the environmental conditions.
After switching off the system, the coolant pump and the auxiliary heating will
continue running a little while longer in order to burn the remaining fuel in the
heating.
Setting automatic on / off
Climatronic: On the Climatronic, press the

button → tap the
function
surface on the Infotainment screen. There will be a display of the last set oper-
ating mode with the option to change this.
Manual air conditioning: in Infotainment in the menu

/
tap the
func-
tion surface.
Then follow the instructions in the Infotainment screen.
When automatic switching on is activated, the warning light in the
symbol
button lights up for about 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off » Fig. 169.
123
Heating and ventilation
Operation in Infotainment
Fig. 170 Auxiliary heater: Main menu/set preset time
Read and observe and on page 123 first.
Call up the main menu
On the Climatronic, press the

button → Tap on the function surface
in
the Infotainment screen.
Or vehicles with manual air conditioning:
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap the function surface.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 170
Departure time - Day and time when the vehicle is to be ready for use
Setting the operating mode (heating / ventilation)
List of pre-selected times, activation / deactivation of the preset time
Set the preset times 1-3 and the duration (10-60 minutes)
When heating the windows are shown in red / with continuous aeration,
the windows are shown in blue
Currently displayed preset time
Activation of the currently displayed preset time
Setting the departure time: Day, hour, minute
Only one preset time can be active. The activated preset time will be deactiva-
ted again after it has started automatically. For the next start, activate one of
the preset times.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Note
When selecting the day in the preset time, there is an option between Sun-
day and Monday without the specified day. If this setting is selected, the vehi-
cle will be ready for use at the selected time, regardless of the current day.
If a different time is set, the activated preset time is automatically deactiva-
ted. The preset time must be reactivated.
Radio remote control
Fig. 171
Wireless remote control
Read and observe and on page 123 first.
Description of the remote control » Fig. 171
Warning light
Aerial
Switch on the auxiliary heating
Switch off the auxiliary heating
The auxiliary heating is switched on/off by pressing the button. To switch the
remote control on or off, hold the remote control vertically, with the aerial
B
» Fig. 171 pointing upwards. Do not cover the antenna with the fingers or the
palm of the hand.
Display warning light
A
Meaning
Lights up green for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating has been switch-
ed on.
Lights up red for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating has been switch-
ed off.
Slowly flashes green for 2 seconds. The ignition signal was not received.
A
B

124
Operation
Display warning light
A
Meaning
Quickly flashes green for 2 seconds.
The auxiliary heating is blocked, e.g.
because the tank is nearly empty or
there is a fault in the auxiliary heating.
Flashes red for 2 seconds.
The switch off signal was not re-
ceived.
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was re-
ceived.
Lights up orange for 2 seconds, then
flashes green or red.
The battery is weak, however the
switching on or off signal was not re-
ceived.
Flashes orange for 5 seconds.
The battery is discharged, however
the switching on or off signal was not
received.
Replace the battery
» page 301.
CAUTION
The remote control must be protected against moisture, severe shocks and
direct sunlight - otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the remote control.
The range of the remote control with a charged battery is a few hundred me-
tres (depending on obstructions between the remote control and the vehicle,
weather conditions, the battery condition etc.).
125
Heating and ventilation
Infotainment
Introductory information
Important information
Introduction to the subject
WARNING
Only use Infotainment in such a way that you have control of the vehicle
in every traffic situation (e.g. Do not write text messages while driving, do
not link or connect the telephone, do not work with the contact list, do not
enter any destinations, do not connect WLAN or SmartLink etc.) Otherwise
there is the risk of an accident!
Always route the connection cable of the external device in such a way
that it does not restrict you when driving.
WARNING
Adjust the volume to ensure that acoustic signals from outside the vehi-
cle, e.g. sirens from emergency vehicles, can be heard at all times.
High volumes can cause hearing damage!
CAUTION
In some countries, some Infotainment features can no longer be selected
when the vehicle is running faster than a certain speed. This is not a malfunc-
tion, but complies with the national legal regulations.
Mobile devices and applications
Fig. 172
QR code with reference to web
pages for checking the compati-
bility of devices
The availability of some of the functions described in this Owner's Manual
depends on the type of device to be connected and the applications instal-
led in it.
Compatibility
On the ŠKODA pages, check to see if Infotainment is compatible with the se-
lected mobile devices. This check takes place by reading the QR code
» Fig. 172 or after typing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Applications
Applications can be installed in external devices (e.g. Mobile, tablet) making it
possible to display additional information in the Infotainment screen or to op-
erate Infotainment.
Due to the variety of applications as well as their ongoing development, the
available applications may not work in all external devices. ŠKODA AUTO can
accept no liability for their proper function.
The range of available applications and their functionality is dependent on the
Infotainment type, as well as vehicle and region.
Infotainment Overview
Description - Infotainment Columbus
Fig. 173 Infotainment Columbus
126
Infotainment
Switches Infotainment on/off

Overview of Infotainment menu » page 132

- Display of the main screen “HOME” » page 133
Volume up
Volume down
Touch screen » page 128
Description – Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 174
Infotainment Amundsen
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 148

- Media menu » page 151

- Telephone menu » page 162

- Voice control » page 134

- Navigation menu » page 181

- SmartLink menu » page 176

- Vehicle system settings » page 203

Overview of Infotainment menu » page 132
Touch screen » page 128
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description – Infotainment Bolero
Fig. 175
Infotainment Bolero
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 148

- Media menu » page 151

- Telephone menu » page 162

- Voice control » page 134

- Infotainment settings » page 137

- SmartLink menu » page 176

- Vehicle system settings » page 203

Overview of Infotainment menu » page 132
Touch screen » page 128
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
127
Introductory information
Description – Infotainment Swing
Fig. 176
Infotainment Swing
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 148

- Media menu » page 151
Depending on equipment fitted:

- Telephone menu » page 162

Muting

- Infotainment settings » page 145
Depending on equipment fitted:

- Menu SmartLink (Press) / turn on / off the voice control function
SmartLink (hold) » page 176

- Sound settings » page 145

- Vehicle system settings » page 203
Touch screen » page 128
SD card slot » page 154
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
External module
applies to Infotainment Amundsen and Columbus.
Fig. 177
Example of an external module
Depending on the vehicle configuration and Infotainment type, all the follow-
ing elements must not be included in the external module.
The external module is located in the storage compartment on the front pas-
senger side » Fig. 177.
SD1 card slot
SD2 card slot
- CD / DVD eject button
CD / DVD slot
SIM card slot
Touch screen
The Infotainment can be operated by lightly touching the screen with your
fingers.
The brightness level of the screen can be set by » page 137 or » page 145.
To protect the screen, a suitable protective film for touch screens can be used.
The screen can be cleaned with a soft cloth and pure spirit if necessary.
1
2
3
4
5
128
Infotainment
Infotainment operation
Infotainment operation
Screen areas
Fig. 178
Screen areas
Description of the display » Fig. 178
Status line with time and outdoor temperature data and other information
Information and the operation of the current menu
Function surfaces of the current menu
Operation principles
Fig. 179
Screen display
Description of the display » Fig. 179
Identification of the current menu
Return to the higher-level menu
Scroll symbol – moving in the menu is possible by moving fingers up or
down on the scroll symbol
A
B
C
A
B
C
Menu item with “Checkbox”
- Function is switched on
- Function is switched off
Opens a sub-menu of the menu item with a “pop-up window”
Functional surfaces
The screen areas which confirm a function or a menu are called “function sur-
faces”.
White text - the surface is active and thus selectable
Grey text - the surface is inactive and thus not selectable
Green frame - currently selected surface
Selecting menu/menu item/function
Drag your finger over the screen in the required direction.
By moving your finger over the slider
Turning the knob
(not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
Confirming menu/menu item/function
By tapping on the function surface.
Press the wheel
(not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
Returning to higher-level menu
By tapping the function surface
.
By tapping on the screen outside of the “pop-up window”.
By pressing the corresponding button next to the screen (e.g. in the Media
menu, by pressing the sensor field/the

button) (not applicable to Info-
tainment Columbus).
Select the menu item / function value
- Selected menu item/function value
- Deselected menu item/function value
Set value
By tapping the function surface or the bottom of the screen.
By touching or moving your finger over the scale.
Turning the knob (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus).
Note
Depending on the equipment, the Infotainment can also be operated by means
of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Further information
» page 53.
D
E
129
Infotainment operation
Operating the menus
Fig. 180 Operating the menus
Operating the menus » Fig. 180
Browse the menu- List entries
Enlargement/reduction of the menu window (applies to the infotainment
Columbus)
Expand/reduce the menu window (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Open / close the menu window
Close the menu window
Alphanumeric with keyboard
Fig. 181
Example of the keyboard display
The alphanumeric keypad is used to enter for letters, numbers and characters.
A
B
C
D
Description of the alphanumeric keyboard » Fig. 181
Input line
Context-dependent:
- Toggle upper case to lower case and vice versa
 - Switch to special characters
 - Switch to numbers
Context-dependent:
 - Switch to numbers
 - Switch to Latin letters
- Switch to Cyrillic letters
- Display of visited entries (the number of visited entries is displayed in the
function surface)
Erase the entered characters
By holding the variants of each type are displayed.
Switch between keyboards with specific characters of the selected
languages » page 138 or » page 145
Enters a blank
Move the cursor within the input line to the left
Move the cursor within the input line to the right
Confirmation of the entered number
Search
While entering characters, a search is made for corresponding entries.
The entry such as a telephone contact to be searched for must be entered
along with the special characters (diacritics).
By tapping the function surface a list of matching entries opens.
A
B
C

130
Infotainment
Gesture control
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Fig. 182
Example of a menu with
gesture control
Some menus of Infotainment Columbus can be operated by means of hand
gestures by slowly moving the hand back and forth approximately 8 cm above
the Infotainment screen.
The menus with gesture control feature the symbol
in the lower right-hand
corner » Fig. 182.
Switching the function on / off
The gesture control function is switched on at the factory.
To switch the function on/off, tap the sensor field

and then the function
surface
Screen
Hand gesture
.
Acoustic confirmation of gesture
When the function is switched on, Infotainment indicates that a gesture has
been recognised by means of an acoustic signal.
To activate/deactivate the acoustic confirmation of a recognised gesture,
tap the sensor field

and then the function surface
Screen
Audible
hand gesture feedback
.
Visual confirmation of the gesture
When the function is switched on and a gesture has been recognised, Infotain-
ment shows an animation with the bottom bar moving in the direction of the
hand movement.
To activate/deactivate the visual confirmation of a recognised gesture, tap
the sensor field

and then the function surface
Screen
Visual hand
gesture feedback
.
Switching Infotainment on/off
Only applies to Infotainment Columbus
To switch on Infotainment, press
.
To switch off Infotainment, hold
.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
To power on/off Infotainment, press
.
Automatic switch-on of Infotainment
If Infotainment was not turned off with
before the ignition was turned off,
it will automatically switch on when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment
If the vehicle key is pulled out of the ignition lock while Infotainment is switch-
ed on, Infotainment will switch off automatically.
If the vehicle is fitted with the starter button, Infotainment will switch off au-
tomatically after the engine is switched off and the door is opened.
With the ignition off, Infotainment will automatically turn off after about 30
minutes.
Infotainment turns off automatically under certain circumstances. Infotain-
ment informs of this via a text message on the Infotainment screen.
Restart Infotainment
If Infotainment does not respond (if it “freezes”) This can be restarted by hold-
ing
for longer than 10 s.
Show time and date on the screen
Standby mode
With the ignition off and infotainment (standbyMode), it is possible to display
the time and date in the Infotainment screen.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

sensor field and
then tap the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
The display mode can be changed by finger motion across the screen side-
ways.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
131
Infotainment operation
"Screen off" mode
With the ignition on and functions
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
and
Display clock
when screen is off
» page 137 enabled, it is possible to display the time and date
when the Infotainment screen is switched off.
The display type depends on the display mode selected in standby mode (does
not apply to the Infotainment Swing).
Adjusting the volume
Every change in volume is displayed on the screen.
Only applies to Infotainment Columbus
To increase the volume, tap the function surface
.
To decrease the volume, tap the function surface
.
To activate/deactivate the mute setting, tap the sensor field
.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
To increase the volume, turn the controller
clockwise.
To reduce volume, turn the controller
anticlockwise.
To mute, turn the controller
to the left to 0.
or: To activate/deactivate the mute setting, press the button

(applies
to Infotainment Swing).
The following symbol appears in the display when the sound is muted
.
If, at the time of muting, sound is being played from a source in the Media
menu, then the playback is stopped.
CAUTION
High volumes can cause sound resonance in the vehicle.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
Electronic voice amplification for driver and passenger
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
The voice enhancer allows transmission of the driver's and passenger's voice
on the speakers in the rear.
To set the voice amplification volume, tap the sensor field

and then tap
the function surface
Volume
Voice Enhancer
.
or: While setting the volume, tap the function surface .
Infotainment menus
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 183
Overview of Infotainment me-
nus: Grid display
Fig. 184
Overview of Infotainment me-
nus: List
To display the overview of Infotainment menus, press the

sensor field.
To set the display mode, press the button

sensor field and then tap the
function surface
Screen
Menu:
.
Select the
Grid display
» Fig. 183 or
Horizont. Display
» Fig. 184 option.
Overview of Infotainment menus
Radio menu » page 148
Media menu » page 151
“ŠKODA Connect” Online Services » page 13
SmartLink menu » page 176
With a connection established to an external device, the actual connec-
tion is shown instead of a symbol
Android Auto
» page 177
Apple CarPlay
» page 178
MirrorLink®
» page 179
132
Infotainment
Telephone menu » page 162
Vehicle system settings » page 203
Navigation menu » page 181 (Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund-
sen)
List of traffic reports (TMC) (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amund-
sen) » page 201
Media Command menu (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
» page 160
Images menu » page 157
- Sound settings » page 137
Air conditioning menu » page 120
Infotainment settings » page 137
Main screen “HOME”
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Fig. 185
HOME main screen
To display the information, tap the

sensor field.
The “HOME” main screen contains three windows.
In the left window » Fig. 185 the navigation map is always displayed. By tap-
ping the screen within this window, the Navigation main menu is displayed.
The contents of the window to the right can be changed. By holding the func-
tion surface
A
, the list of selectable menus is displayed.
By tapping the function surface
A
or by double-finger tapping on the screen
within each window, the appropriate main menu is displayed.
If there are other pages in the window, then the associated symbols are dis-
played in area
B
. By moving your finger across the screen within each win-
dow, it is possible to display these pages.
Configuration wizard
The Configuration wizard is automatically displayed if there are at least two
non-selected menu items after turning on Infotainment, or if a new user ac-
count in personalisation is selected.
For manual display in Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen and Bolero, tap the

sensor field and then tap on the function surface
Configuration wizard
.
For manual displayin Infotainment Swing, press the

button, then tap the
function surface
Configuration wizard
.
The Configuration wizard allows you to set the following menu items in se-
quence.
Identification of the personalisation user account » page 59
Time and date format
Storing the radio station with the strongest reception signal at present
Pairing and connecting a telephone to Infotainment
Home Address provided (valid for Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Setting “ŠKODA Connect” online services
The selected menu item is marked with the
symbol.
Operating using an application in the external device
Some Infotainment functions can be operated using an application in the sup-
ported external device.
For the complete functionality of the application, data transmission from ex-
ternal devices must be activated and, if necessary, operation of the Infotain-
ment via the application must be approved.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Activate data transfer in Infotainment. To do so, tap the

sensor field and
then the function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data transfer
for ŠKODA Apps
.
Release Infotainment operation using the application. To do so, tap the

sensor field and then the function surface Tap→
Mobile device data transfer
Operation via apps:
Confirm
/
Allow
.
Connect Infotainment to an external device via WLAN» page 174.
In the external device, launch an application for Infotainment operation (e.g.
ŠKODA Media Command).
133
Infotainment operation
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Activate data transfer in Infotainment. Press the

button and then tap on
the function surface
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
.
Note
The description of Infotainment operation ŠKODA Media Command is part of
the application.
Voice control
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
The navigation, telephone, radio and media menu can be operated by voice
commands.
The voice control system can be used either by the driver or by the front pas-
senger.
Function requirements for voice control
Infotainment is switched on.
There will be no telephone call using a telephone connected to Infotain-
ment.
The parking aid is not active.
Requirements for optimum voice command recognition
The voice commands must only be issued when the symbol is displayed on
the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded.
Speak at your normal volume without intonation and long breaks.
Avoid poor pronunciation.
Close the doors and window in order to avoid disturbing environmental influ-
ences on the function of the voice control.
You are recommended to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the sound of
your voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise.
During voice control, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk-
ing at the same time.
WARNING
The emergency number should be dialled manually. Your voice commands
may not be recognized in such situations. The telephone connection may
not be established or the connection may take too much time to complete.
CAUTION
The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
For some Infotainment languages, there is no voice control available. Info-
tainment indicates this fact through a text message that is displayed after set-
ting the device language screen.
Note
During voice control, no nav. announcements and traffic announcements are
played.
Voice control on / off
Fig. 186
Voice control: Main menu
Switching on
Press the button
on the multifunction steering wheel or the

sensor
field on the Infotainment (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus).
The main menu is displayed » Fig. 186.
Switching off
Press the button twice on the multifunction steering wheel or the

sensor field on the Infotainment twice (does not apply to Infotainment Co-
lumbus).
or: Issue the voice command “End voice control”.
134
Infotainment
Operation principle
Fig. 187
Example of screen display
In the voice control main menu » Fig. 186 on page 134 There are basic voice
commands for the individual menus.
Other voice commands are displayed by tapping the respective functional area
or issuing the name of the respective command (e.g. Navigation). The screen
shows the following » Fig. 187.
Context-dependent:
The system is waiting for a voice command
The system recognises a voice command
The system plays a message
Voice command entry was stopped
Available list entries
Possible voice commands
Display other possible voice commands
Voice commands that can be issued, are indicated in “quotation marks”.
Note
The display of the voice control symbols
A
» Fig. 187 are dependent of the
equipment fitted also on the display of the instrument cluster.
A
B
C
Voice commands
Enter
The voice command must only be issued when the symbol is displayed in
the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. The input
tone can be switched on / off. To do so, tap the

sensor field and then the
function surface
Voice control
.
It is not necessary to wait for the end of message playback when Infotainment
is playing a message. The Infotainment message can be acknowledged by tap-
ping the

sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or press-
ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel. Then a voice command
can be issued. The voice control is hereby much faster.
Stop
This allows for more time for input of the voice command (e.g. in the list of
visited contacts).
The process for the voice command input can be stopped by moving a finger
up/down across the screen or by turning the controller
(not applicable to In-
fotainment Columbus).
When stopping, the symbol changes from
.
Restore
The procedure for voice command input can be restarted in one of the follow-
ing ways.
By tapping the function surface
.
By tapping the

sensor field on the Infotainment (does not apply to Info-
tainment Columbus).
By pressing the key on the multifunction steering wheel.
Not recognising a voice command
If a voice command is not detected three times in succession by Infotainment,
then the voice control is stopped.
Correction of a voice command input
A voice command can be corrected, modified or re-entered by tapping the

sensor field (does not apply to Infotainment Columbus) or pressing the
button on the multifunction steering wheel. However, this is only possible
as long as the symbol appears on the screen.
You do not have to wait until the voice command is recognised by Infotain-
ment.
135
Infotainment operation
Voice commands can be used during voice control
Voice command Operation
Back Return to the previous menu
Help
reproducing and displaying possible voice com-
mands
Voice commands that can be used while browsing the list entries
Voice command Operation
Next page
Browse menu / list / directory
Previous page
First page
Last page
Additional Information
Navigation - applies to Infotainment Columbus
If the set Infotainment language matches the language of currently selected
country when entering the destination, then the destination address can be
entered in one step.
The voice command “Navigate” can be issued and straight away, the city,
street and street number (if it is included in the navigation data) Interest (POI)
or a contact with the previously stored address.
Navigation - applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To the destination, you are first required to issue the command“enter ad-
dress” and then follow Infotainment instructions.
It is not necessary to spell city and street names if the entered destination is
located in a country that has no voice control available for the language.
Online POI search – applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen
When “Infotainment Online” » page 18 services are activated, a POI search can
also be carried out online by issuing the voice command “Find online POI”.
Radio
In order for a radio station can be selected using voice command, the station
must be stored in the list of available stations » page 149 or in the preset list
» page 149.
Updating the Infotainment software
Fig. 188
Available software updates on
the ŠKODA website
The software update ensures optimum operation of Infotainment (e.g. Com-
patibility with new telephones).
Information on Infotainment compatibility can be found on the following
ŠKODA Internet pages. This takes place by reading the QR code » Fig. 188 or
after typing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
To determine the software version, tap the

sensor field and then the
function surface
System information
.
To start the software update, tap the

sensor field and then tap the
function surface
System information
Update software
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To determine the software version, press the

button, then tap on the
system information
function surface.
To start the software update, press the

button, then tap on the
system
information
update software
function surface.
136
Infotainment
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Infotainment system settings
sound settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
Volume
- Volume settings
Radio announcements
- Volume adjustment of traffic announcements (TP)
Navigation announcements
- Volume adjustment of navigation announcements
(does not apply to infotainment Bolero)
Voice control
- volume setting for voice output
Maximum switch-on volume
- Setting the maximum volume when switching on
Infotainment
Speed-dependent Volume adjustment
- Increases the volume as speed increases
Bluetooth audio:
- Volume setting of the device connected via Bluetooth
®
au-
dio profile
Quiet
- Low volume
Medium
- Medium volume
Loud
- High volume
Entertainment fading while parking
– Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) with activated parking aid
Entertainment fading (nav. announcements)
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio
volume) in the event of a navigation announcement
Voice Enhancer
- Volume adjustment of voice amplification for driver and front
passenger to the speakers in the rear
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Setting the equalizer
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
CANTON Equaliser
- Setting the equalizer
Individual
- Adjustment of treble, mid and bass
Profile
- Setting of the profile (e.g.
Rock
,
Classical
and so on.)
CANTON Optimisation
-Setting the optimum room sound perception
All areas
- Setting optimised for the whole vehicle interior
Front
- Optimised setting for the front seats
Driver
- Optimised setting for the driver
CANTON surround
- Setting the surround sound levels (“-9 ”Stereo / “+9”full
surround)
Subwoofer
- Subwoofer volume settings
Sound focus
-Setting the optimum room sound perception
All areas
- Setting optimised for the whole vehicle interior
Driver
- Optimised setting for the driver
Touchscreen tone
- Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
No navigation sound during call
- Switching on / off the nav. announcements dur-
ing a telephone conversation (does not apply to Infotainment Bolero)
Screen settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface Tap→
Screen
.
Menu:
Setting the Infotainment menu display
Horizont. Display
- Horizontal display » Fig. 184 on page 132
Grid display
- Grid display » Fig. 183 on page 132
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Display clock when screen is off
- Time and date display when the screen is
switched off
Brightness:
- Adjusts the brightness of the screen
Touchscreen tone
- Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
Menu button tone
- Turn on / off the acoustic signal by pressing a button next to
the screen
Hand gesture
- Enable/disable the gesture control using hand movements via
the Infotainment screen (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Visual hand gesture feedback
- Enable/disable the animation when a gesture is
recognised (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Audible hand gesture feedback
- Enable/disable acoustic signal when a gesture is
recognised (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Animation when finger near screen
- Turn the proximity sensors on/off (When the
function is on, e.g.Navigation will be shown in the main menu when moving a
finger towards the bottom bar with the functional surfaces on the screen)
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Time and date settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Time and date
.
Clock time source:
Time source settings: manual/GPS (applies to Infotainment
Columbus, Amundsen)
Time:
- Time settings
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
137
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Automatic summer time
- Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
Time zone:
- Select the time zone
Time format:
- Set the time format
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Set the date format
Setting the Infotainment language
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
In some languages, after selecting the function surface
Female
and
Male
are dis-
played for the choice of voice prompts for Infotainment.
Note
When a language is selected which does not support voice control, Infotain-
ment will indicate with a message on the screen.
The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
Additional keypad language settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Additional keypad
languages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow the entering of
characters other than those in the currently selected language.
Unit settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface Tap on→
Units
.
Distance:
- Distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Fuel consumption:
- Consumption units
Pressure:
- Pressure units for tyre pressure
Settings for data transfer
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment sys-
tem and the external device or the operation of some Infotainment functions
using the applications of the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Mobile device data
transfer
.
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Turning data transfer on and off
Use apps to operate:
- Setting Infotainment operation via the applications of the
external device (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Deactivate
- Deactivate Infotainment operation via an external device
Confirm
- Infotainment operation with required confirmation
Allow
- Infotainment operation without required confirmation
Voice control settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Voice control
.
Example commands (Infotainment system)
- Turn on/off display of the menu con-
taining voice commands in the Infotainment screen when voice control is ac-
tivated
Example commands (instrument cluster)
- Turn on/off display of the menu contain-
ing basic voice commands when voice control is activated
Voice control session start tone
- Switch on/off the audible signal when turning on
the voice control
Voice control session end tone
- Switch on/off the audible signal when voice con-
trol ends
Input tone in voice dialogue
- Switch on/off the audible signal for the voice input
End tone in voice dialogue
- Switch on/off the audible after the voice input
Safe removal of the external device
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Remove safely:
and
select the external device to be removed.
Reset to factory settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu, all or only chosen settings can be restored.
138
Infotainment
Bluetooth
®
Settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch on/off Bluetooth
®
function
Visibility:
Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for other Bluetooth
®
de-
vices on/off
Name:
- Changing the name of the Bluetooth
®
device
Paired devices
- Display the list of coupled Bluetooth
®
Devices
Find devices
- Searches for available Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Turn on/off the ability to connect a Bluetooth
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
Wireless settings
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
WLAN
.
WLAN
- List of available hotspots of external devices
WLAN
- Turn on / off Infotainment wireless
WPS Quick Connect (WPS button)
- Establishing a secure connection to the hot-
spot of the external device using WPS (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Manual settings
- Setting the parameters for search and connection to the
hotspot of the external device
Network name
- Enter the Hotspot name
Network key
- Setting the access password
Security level:
Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Connect
- Connection establishment
Find
- Search / Restore the list of available hotspots
Mobile hotspot
- Setting Infotainment hotspot (in the functional surface the
symbol is
displayed with the number of connected external devices)
Mobile hotspot
- Turn on / off Infotainment hotspot
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
- Establishing a secure connection to the In-
fotainment hotspot via WPS (applies to Amundsen)
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
- Setting the parameters for the connection to Info-
tainment hotspot
Security level:
Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Network key
- Input of the access password
SSID: ...
- Name of the infotainment Hotspots
Do not send network name (SSID)
-Turn Infotainment hotspot visibility on/off
Store
- Storage of Infotainment hotspot parameters
Network settings
Applies to the infotainment Columbus with seated in the external module SIM
card as well as for the Infotainment Amundsen with the connected Carstick-
Device.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Network
.
Network settings
- Sets the data connection from the associated telephone
service provider (APN settings)
Access point name: ...
- Setting of the access point name
User name: ...
- Setting of the user name
Password: ...
- Password setting
Authentication:
Sets the check type
Normal
- Without verification
Secure
- Verification required
Reset Access Point (APN)
- Delete the parameters for the network setting
Store
- Storage of the parameters for the network setting
Network provider: ...
- Selection of the network provider (the menu item is visi-
ble when the SIM card is inserted in the external module or CarStick device)
Data roaming
- Enable / disable the use of data roaming connection
Current connection details
- Display of information on data downloaded (by tap-
ping the function surface
Reset
the data information is deleted)
Data connection:
Usage settings for the data connection (Internet connection)
of the SIM card inserted in the external module or CarStick device
Off
- Use of the data connection is not possible
Ask
- Use of the data connection is only possible after it has been confirmed
On
- Use of the data connection is possible at any time
ŠKODA Connect Online Services settings
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
ŠKODA Connect
(Online Services)
.
Services Management
- Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off
registration
- Enter the registration PIN code for online services (in the user
profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal receive)
System information
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
System information
.
139
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, the Bluetooth
®
software version, the navigation
database version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
To Update the navigation database and the POI categories created in the
user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, tap on the function sur-
face
Online update
.
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA Part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
Tap on the Radio main menu function
.
Sound
- sound settings
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Arrow buttons:
- Setting the function of the function surfaces
Preset list
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Station list
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcast-
ing range
Traffic programme (TP)
- Switches TP traffic programme on/off
Delete presets
- Deletes station buttons
Station logos
- manual management of station logos
Radio text
- Switching the text display radio (FM and DAB) on and off
Advanced settings
- further settings that are different depending on the selec-
ted broadcasting range(FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
Region for station logo:
- Setting the region for station logo
Automatic frequency control (AF)
- Activates/deactivates the search for alterna-
tive frequencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
RDS Regional:
Switch on/off automatic tracking of related regional stations
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
DAB traffic announcements
- Switch on/off DAB traffic announcements
Other DAB announcements
- Switch on/off other announcements (e.g., warnings,
regional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB - DAB station tracking
- Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
on another frequency or in other station groups
Automatic DAB - FM switching
- Switch on/off auto-switching from DAB to the
FM broadcasting range if the DAB signal is lost
Switch to a similar station
- Activate/deactivate automatic switching to another
station with similar content in the event of signal loss (applies to Infotain-
ment Columbus)
L-band
- Enable / disable the availability of L-band
Automatic change from DAB to FM
If DAB reception is poor, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by () while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is can be received again, the
system automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
L-band
For the DAB radio reception in different countries, different broadcasting
ranges are used. In some countries the DAB radio reception is only possible in
the so called L-band.
140
Infotainment
If no L-band DAB radio reception is possible in the country then we recom-
mend turning off the L-band. The channel scan is therefore faster.
Media menu settings
Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu .
Sound
- sound settings
Manage Jukebox
- Administration (record / delete) supported files (audio / vid-
eo) in Infotainment internal memory (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Mix/repeat including subfolders
- Switching the title display including subfolders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
WLAN
- Wi-Fi settings (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Video (DVD) settings
- Setting the parameters of the DVD video (applies to Info-
tainment Columbus)
Remove safely:
- Safe removal of the external device
Traffic programme (TP)
- Switches traffic programme on/off
Image menu settings
In the images main menu, tap on the function surface
.
Image view:
- Image view settings
Full
- Display the maximum image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Automatic
- Full screen display
Display time:
- Set the display time for the slideshow
Repeat slideshow
- Switching on/off the slideshow repeat
Video DVD menu settings
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
In the Video DVD main menu, tap on the function surface .
Depending on the DVD some of the following menu items are displayed.
Format:
- Set the screen width/height ratio
Audio channel:
- Select the audio channel
Subtitles:
- Subtitle selection
Enter/change PIN for parental settings
- Management of the PIN code for parental
control
Parental control:
- Parental control settings
Settings
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface .
Hands-free
- Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 139
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Mailbox number:
- Enter the mailbox phone number
Network selection
- Select the telephone service provider of the SIM card in-
serted in the external module (valid for Infotainment Columbus with the
SIM card slot in the external module)
Priority assignment:
- Select the phone service priority of the SIM card inser-
ted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM
card slot in the external module)
Automatic
- Depending on the telephone service provider
Telephone call
- telephone calls are preferred
Data transfer
- A data connection is preferred
Sort by:
- Arrangement of telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
1st name
- Sort by contact's first name
Profile name:
Rename the profile of the SIM card inserted in the external
module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
ternal module)
Import contacts:
- Import telephone contacts
Select device contacts
- Open the coupled Telephones menu (applies to Info-
tainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module - if the
SIM card is inserted in the external module)
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected phone)
Reminder: Remember your mobile
- Turn on/off the warning mode before forget-
ting the phone in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to the device)
Show pictures for contacts
- Switch on/off the display of the image assigned to
the contact
Conference call
- Activates/deactivates conference calls
141
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Call settings:
- Setting the phone functions of the SIM card inserted in the ex-
ternal module during a call (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM
card slot in the external module)
Hold call:
- Switch the display of the option for answering an incoming call
during a call on/off; determine the current divert setting
On
- Turn on the display
Off
- Turn off the display
Request status
- Checking the settings of the SIM card function
Send own number:
- Sets the telephone number display for the call receiver
On
- Turn on the display
Off
- Turn off the display
Network dependent
- Telephone service provider dependent display
Request status
- Checking the settings of the SIM card function
Delete calls
- Delete the selected call type performed via the SIM card inserted
into the external module or via a telephone connected to Infotainment by the
Bluetooth
®
profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card
slot in the external module)
All areas
- Delete all calls
Missed calls
- Delete list of missed calls
Dialled numbers.
- Delete outgoing calls
Received calls
- Delete list of received calls
Text message settings
- Text message settings for the sim card inserted in the
external module or in the telephone connected to Infotainment by the Blue-
tooth
®
profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot
in the external module)
Standard account
- Setting for the use of text messages (only visible when the
SIM card is only used for data services while a telephone is connected to
the Infotainment that supports the Bluetooth
®
profile MAP)
No standard account
- Without priority (selection of the SIM card or the con-
nected telephone required)
SIM
- A list of text messages on the SIM card
MAP
- A list of text messages of the connected telephone
Service centre number:
- Setting the number of SMS services of the telephone
service provider
Store sent text messages
- Enable / disable the storage of the text message on
the SIM card
Period of validity:
- Adjustment of the period in which the telephone service
provider will try to deliver a text message (for example, if the recipient is
not available or Infotainment is switched off.)
Delete text messages
- Delete the data stored on the SIM card text messages
All
- Delete all text messages
Inbox
- Delete the text messages received
Outbox
- Delete draft text messages
Sent
- Delete sent text messages
Telephone Interface “Business”
- Turn on / off the Telephone function of the exter-
nal module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the
external module)
Use SIM card only for data connection
- turn on - Activating only data services / To
turn off - Activation of data and telephone services of the SIM card inserted
in the external module (valid for Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card
slot in the external module)
Network
- Setting of the telephone service provider for the sim card inserted
in the external module or in the telephone connected to Infotainment by the
Bluetooth
®
profile rSAP (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card
slot in the external module)/the SIM card inserted in the CarStick device (ap-
plies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 139
PIN settings:
- Setting the PIN code of the SIM card inserted in the external
module (applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the ex-
ternal module)
Automatic PIN entry
- Enable / disable the storage of the PIN code of the SIM
card
Change PIN
- Change the PIN code of the SIM card
2. Add PIN 2
- Enter the second PIN code of the SIM card (when the function
Automatic PIN entry
is on or when the SIM card supports another telephone
service provider)
Forward calls
- Setting diversion of incoming calls (valid for Infotainment Co-
lumbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)
All calls
- Forward all incoming calls
If engaged
- Forwarding incoming calls during a telephone conversation
Unavailable
- Forwarding the incoming calls when the vehicle is outside the
range of the telephone service provider signal
If no answer
- Redirecting incoming calls when the incoming call is not an-
swered
SmartLink+ menu settings
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
142
Infotainment
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
ŠKODA applications
MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink
®
Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown
- Activate/deactivate the display of
Mirror link
®
application messages on the Infotainment screen
Navigation menu settings
Route options
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Route options
.
Suggest 3 alternative routes
- Switch on/off the menu for alternative routes (eco-
nomical, fast, short)
Route:
- Setting the preferred route
Freq. Routes
- Show/hide the menu of the most frequent routes in the split
screen
Dynamic route
- Switch on/off dynamic route recalculation due to TMC traffic
reports or online traffic reports
Avoid motorways
- Switch on/off the non-use of motorways in the route cal-
culation
Avoid ferries and motorail trains
- Switch on/off the non-use of ferries and mo-
torail trains in the route calculation
Avoid toll roads
- Switch on/off use of toll roads for the route calculation
Avoid tunnels
- Switch on/off use of tunnels for route calculation
Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
- Switch use of routes requiring toll stickers
on/off for route calculation
Show available toll stickers
- Selection of countries for which a valid toll sticker
is required (routes requiring toll stickers are used for route calculation)
Include trailer
- Turn on / off the setting to take a trailer into account for
route calculation » page 195
Map
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Map
.
Show road signs
- Switch on/off the display of traffic signs
Lane guidance
- Display of lane guidance on/off
Show favourites
- Switch on/off the display of favourites
Show POIs
- Switch on/off the display of POIs
Select categories for POIs
- Selection of the displayed category for POIs
Show brand logos for POIs
- Switch on/off the company logos available for the
POIs shown
Map view in the instrument cluster
- Settings of the map display in the digital in-
strument cluster (applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus and the
digital instrument cluster)
2D North
- two-dimensional map, oriented towards the north - the map does
not rotate
2D heading up
- two-dimensional map display, aligned with direction of travel
- the map rotates
3D heading up
- three-dimensional map display
Traffic flow settings
- Setting the display of a traffic obstruction received from
online traffic
Display free-moving traffic
- Enable / disable the display of routes with free-
moving transport
Display congestion
- Enable / disable the display of routes with heavy traffic
Display traffic events (Symbols on map)
- Activate/deactivate the display of
routes with a traffic incident
Manage memory
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
.
Sort contacts:
- Setting the configuration of the phone book
By surname
- Sorting by the contact surname
By first name
- Sorting by the contact first name
Define home address
- Enter the home address
Delete My POIs
- Deleting own POI categories (Personal POI)
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
- Import / update your own POI categories (Personal
POI)
Retrieve "My POIs" (online)
- Online import / update of the user profile on the
website ŠKODA Connect Portal started own POI categories
Import destinations (SD/USB)
- Import destinations in vCard format
Delete user data
- Delete user data (by pressing the function surface
Delete
and
confirm the deletion)
Last destinations
- Delete the last destinations
Dest. memory
- Delete the stored destinations
Online destinations
- Delete the stored online dests
Routes
- Delete saved routes
My points of interest (Personal POI)
- Delete the custom POIs
143
Infotainment settings - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Entered cities
- Delete the history of places already entered via the address
Home address
- Delete the stored home address
Flagged destination
- Delete the flagged destination
Waypoints
- Delete item in the Waypoint mode menu (applies to Infotain-
ment Columbus)
Freq. Routes
- Delete the most travelled routes
Nav. announcements
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Navigation announce-
ments
.
Volume
- Volume control of the nav. announcements
Entertainment fading (Navigation)
- Adjust the fading of the audio volume (e.g. ra-
dio volume) when navigation announcements are being made
Navigation announcements:
- Setting the playback method for navigation an-
nouncements (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Comprehensive
- All nav. announcements
Brief
- Short nav. announcements
Congestion only
- Only nav. announcements when a route is changed
No navigation sound during call
- Enable / disable non-playback of nav. announce-
ments during a telephone call
Note:“My POIs”
- Activate/deactivate an audible indication when approaching a
custom POI (if supported by the imported custom POI)
Top speeds
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Speed limits
.
The speed limits in the current country are displayed.
When the function is switched on
Note:National border crossed
» page 144, Ad-
vanced settings, display the country-specific speed limits when crossing inter-
national borders.
Tank options
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Fuel options
.
Select preferred fuel station
- Select your preferred fuel station brand (the selec-
ted station brand will be displayed in the first three positions of the list)
Fuel warning
-Turn on- / Off the display of a warning message with the option
to visit the nearest petrol station when the fuel level reaches the reserve
area
Version information
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
A list of countries shown, for whom navigation data exists, together with the
date of the last update.
An update of the navigation data can be carried out by tapping the function
surface
Update (SD/USB)
or
Update (online)
(applies to Infotainment Columbus).
The information on updating the navigation data is to be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Advanced settings
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Time display:
- Select the time display in the status line
- Estimated arrival time at destination
Estimated travelling time to the destination
Status line:
- Selection of the destination type, for which the status line, the
route and travel time are displayed (this also determines which destination
type is displayed on the map after selecting
is displayed on the map)
- Route destination
- Next waypoint
Note:National border crossed
- Switching the display of information on country-
specific speed limits when crossing a national border on/off
Demo mode
- Switch on/off guidance in demo mode
Define demo mode starting point
- Specifying the start point of the route guid-
ance in the demo mode by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
tion
144
Infotainment
Infotainment settings - Swing
Infotainment system settings
Sound settings
Press the

or

button, then tap the function surface
Sound
.
Volume
- Volume settings
Maximum switch-on volume
- Setting the maximum volume when switching on
Infotainment
Announcements
- Adjustment of traffic announcements volume (TP)
Speed-dependent volume adjustment
- volume increases as speed increases
Entertainment fading (parking)
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume)
with activated parking aid
Entertainment fading (Navigation)
- Reduction of audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) for navigation announcements originating from the SmartLink appli-
cation
Bluetooth audio:
- Volume setting of the device connected via Bluetooth
®
au-
dio profile
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Setting the equalizer
Touchscreen tone
- Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
Screen settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Screen
.
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Display clock when screen is off
- Time and date display when the screen is
switched off
Brightness:
- Adjusts the brightness of the screen
Touchscreen tone
- Switch on/off audible tone when touching the screen
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Time and date settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Time and date
.
Time:
- Time settings
Time format:
- Set the time format
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
Automatic summer time
- Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Set the date format
Setting the Infotainment language
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
Additional keypad language settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Additional keypad languages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow the entering of
characters other than those in the currently selected language.
Unit settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Units
.
Distance:
- Distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Fuel consumption:
- Fuel consumption units
Pressure:
- Pressure units for tyre pressure
Setting data transfer
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment and an
external device.
Press the

button and then tap on the function surface
Activate data trans-
fer for ŠKODA apps
.
Safe removal of the data source
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Remove safely
and select
the external device to be removed.
145
Infotainment settings - Swing
Restore factory settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu individual settings or all settings can be restored at the same time.
Bluetooth
®
settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch on/off Bluetooth
®
function
Visibility:
Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for other Bluetooth
®
de-
vices on/off
1st name
- Changing the name of the Bluetooth
®
unit
Paired devices
- Display the list of coupled Bluetooth
®
Devices
Find devices
- Searches for available Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Turn on/off the ability to connect a Bluetooth
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
Settings of online services ŠKODA Connect
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online serv-
ices)
.
Services Management
- Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off
registration
- Enter the registration PIN code for online services (in the user
profile on the website ŠKODA Connect Portal receive)
System information
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
System information
.
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA Part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
Tap on the Radio main menu function .
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Sound
- sound settings
Arrow buttons:
- Setting the function of the function surfaces
Presets
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Stations
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcasting
range
Traffic programme (TP)
- Switches traffic programme on/off
Radio text
- Switching the text display radio (FM and DAB) on and off
Sort channel list:
- Sort types of radio stations in the station list (FM)
Group
- Sort by transmitted program type
Alphabetically
- Alphabetical sorting according to station name
Station logos
- manual management of station logos
Delete presets
- Delete the stations stored under station buttons
Advanced settings
- further settings that are different depending on the selec-
ted broadcasting range(FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
RDS Regional:
Switch on/off automatic tracking of related regional stations
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Automatic frequency control (AF)
- Activates/deactivates the search for alterna-
tive frequencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
Sort channel list:
- Sort types of radio stations in the station list (FM)
Group
- Sort by transmitted program type
Alphabetically
- Alphabetical sorting according to station name
146
Infotainment
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
DAB traffic announcements
- Turn the DAB channels on / off
Other DAB announcements
- Switch on/off other announcements (e.g., warnings,
regional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB - DAB station tracking
- Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
on another frequency or in other station groups
Automatic DAB - FM switching
- Enable/disable auto-switching from DAB to the
FM frequency band if the DAB signal is lost
DAB program tracking
When a DAB transmitter is a part of several broadcast stations and if the cur-
rent station group is not available on any other frequency, then when the signal
is poor, the same station will be searched in another station group.
Automatic change from DAB to FM
If DAB reception is poor, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by (

) while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is can be received again, the
system automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
Media menu settings
Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu .
Sound
- sound settings
Mix/repeat including subfolders
- Switching the title display including subfolders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
Traffic programme (TP)
- Switches traffic programme on/off
Remove safely:
- Safe removal of the external device
Import contactsTelephone menu settings
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface .
Hands-free
- Switch a call to the telephone/back to Infotainment (the menu
item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Find
- search for available Telephones
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 146
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Sort by:
- Arrangement of telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
1st name
- Sort by contact's first name
Import contacts
- Import phone contacts
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected phone)
Reminder: Remember your mobile
- Turn on/off the warning mode before forget-
ting the phone in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to the device)
Simultaneous calls
- Enable/disable the option to hold two concurrent calls
SmartLink+ menu settings
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface
.
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
ŠKODA applications
MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink
®
Connect automatically via Bluetooth
- Activate/deactivate the option of pairing
and connecting the external device via Bluetooth
®
Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown
- Activate/deactivate the display of
Mirror link
®
application messages on the Infotainment screen
147
Infotainment settings - Swing
Radio
service
Introduction to the subject
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the Infotainment type, analogue ra-
dio reception of the FM and AM frequency ranges as well as DAB digital radio
reception is possible.
CAUTION
For vehicles with window antennas do not stick foil or metal coated stickers
to the window - Radio signal reception could be affected.
Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio
signal even causing it to fail completely.
main menu
Fig. 189
Radio: Main menu (DAB)
To display the main menu, press the sensor field/the

button.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 189
The selected radio station (description or frequency)
Radio Text (FM) / Description of the group (DAB)
Preset station buttons for favourite channels
Choice of radio range (FM / AM / DAB)
Choice of storage group for the preferred station
Changing the station
List of available stations
Manual / semi-automatic station search
A
B
C
D
E
Radio text display (DAB) / picture presentation (DAB)
Settings of menu Radio » page 140 or » page 146
Information symbol in the status line
Symbol Meaning
 Traffic signal is available
  Traffic signal is not available
Signal is not available (DAB)
If the displayed station name continuously changes (dynamic text), then it is
possible to fix the current text by holding your finger on the device screen in
the station name area. By holding your finger in the area of the station name
again, the station name is displayed in its entirety again.
Search stations and select frequency
Find stations
Tap on the Radio main menu function
or
.
Depending on the setting
Arrow buttons:
will set an available station from
the Stations list or a station of the current broadcast range on the Station
buttons.
Select frequency
To display the value of the currently chosen frequency, tap the functional
surface in the Radio main menu
.
To Set the desired frequency value in Infotainment Swing, use the slider or
the function surfaces
in the bottom area of the screen, if necessary, turn
the controller (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
Scan through the stations one after the other (scan)
The function scans through all the available stations in the current frequency
range in succession, for a few seconds each.
To start automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Radio
menu and tap on the function surface Tap on→
Scan
.
To end autoplay, tap the function .
148
Infotainment
List of available stations
Fig. 190 Example, the list of available FM/DAB stations
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To Sort (FM) the stations in alphabetical order, by group or genre, tap on the
function surface
A
» Fig. 190 » .
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
area, tap the function surface in the Radio main menu
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To filter the stations based on the program type (e.g. Music, Sport etc.) in the
FM station list (with activated RDS function) and the DAB station list (with
alphabetical sorting of the channel list selected), tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 190.
Information symbols
Symbol Meaning
Radio station, which is stored on a preset button
Currently played stations
 Traffic information station
(e.g.)  Type of program being broadcast (FM)
(e.g.)  Type the regional broadcast (FM)
Station reception is not available (DAB)
Symbol Meaning
The station reception is not secure (DAB) (applies to Infotain-
ment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing)
Station with image broadcasting (DAB) (does not apply to Info-
tainment Swing)
Refresh list
Depending on Infotainment, updating the station list takes place as follows:
Frequen-
cy
Columbus Amundsen, Bolero Swing
FM automatically automatically automatically
AM automatically manually manually
DAB automatically manually manually
To manually update, the tap on functional surface
» Fig. 190 .
CAUTION
To sort the stations according to genre, the RDS and AF functions must be
switched on. These functions can be set in theradio main menu in the FM band
by pressing the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Preset buttons for your favourite channels
In every broadcasting range, there are station buttons available to store pre-
ferred stations
C
That are split into groups
E
» Fig. 189 on page 148 or .
To save the station currectly being listen to on the main menu Radio, hold
down the desired function surface
C
until an acoustic signal sounds.
To
save a station in the list of available stations, keep the function surface
of the desired station held down, select the memory group, and then tap the
desired station button.
Station logos - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Station logos are stored in the Infotainment memory which are assigned auto-
matically when storing the stations under preset buttons.
Assign station logo automatically
to Disable / Enable in the radio main menu, tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
Autostore station logos
.
149
Radio
Assign station logo manually
Tap on the Radio main menu function
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Remove station logo manually
Tap on the Radio main menu function
Station logos
.
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, gif, png, bmp.
We recommend a resolution of up to 500x500 pixels.
Station logos - Swing
The station key of a preferred station can contain the name and the station
logo.
Assign a station logo
Tap on the Radio main menu function
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Remove station logo
Tap on the Radio main menu function
Station logos
.
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
or: Tap the function surface
All areas
to delete the logos of all station but-
tons at the same time.
Confirm / cancel the removal.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, png.
We recommend a resolution of up to 400x240 pixels.
Traffic program (TP)
To switch on/off the traffic monitoring in the main menu Radio, tap on the
function surface
Traffic programme (TP)
.
During a traffic announcement, it is possible to cancel the current announce-
ment if necessary by deactivating the traffic monitoring.
Note
Should this station not transmit traffic reports or the signal is not available,
then Infotainment automatically searches in the background for another TP
station.
During playback in menu Media or a station in the AM radio range, traffic
news is received from the previously selected FM radio range.
150
Infotainment
Media
service
Main menu
Fig. 191
Media: Main menu dis-
play example
To display the main menu, press the sensor field/the

button.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 191
Information on current track
Playback timeline with a slider
Select the audio source
Selected audio source / album image / album overview
Depending on the audio source type:
Folder/track list
Multimedia Database
Settings of menu Media » page 141 or » page 147
Note
Information concerning the track being played appears on the screen, if it is
stored as a so-called ID3 Tag on the audio source. If no ID3 tag is available, only
the title name is displayed.
The remaining playback time indicated does not correspond to the actual re-
maining playback time for titles with variable bitrates.
When an audio source is connected or plugged in, the Infotainment Colum-
bus searches the local Gracenote
®
database for information on the track being
played (e.g. album name, artist name, genre, album image etc.). If the informa-
tion is not available and the “Infotainment Online” » page 18 service is active,
Infotainment will search for this information in the Gracenote
®
online database.
A
B
C
D
Playback control - Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Operation Action
Play / pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Finger movement to the right in
screen area
A
» Fig. 191 on page 151
after 3 seconds from the start of the
track playback
Fast-reverse within the title Press and hold
Fast-forward within the title Press and hold
Play the previous title
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
Finger movement to the right of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 191 on page 151
within 3 s after the start of the track
playback
Play back the next title
Tap
Moving your finger to the left of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 191 on page 151
Switch on/off the random playback
from the current album or folder
Tap
Switch on/off the repeat playback
from the current album or folder
Tap
Switch on/off repeat playback of spe-
cific track
Tap
Search (applies to sources with a dis-
playable multimedia database) (applies
to Infotainment Columbus)
Tap
Turn on / off playback of similar tracks
according to information from the so-
called. ID3Tag (applies to Infotainment
Columbus)
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 191 on page 151.
151
Media
Playback control - Swing
Operation Action
Play / pause Tap 
Play the previous title
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Fast-reverse within the title Press and hold
Fast-forward within the title Press and hold
Play back the next title Tap
Switch on/off the random playback
from the current album or folder
Tap
Switch on/off the repeat playback
from the current album or folder
Tap
Switch on/off repeat playback of spe-
cific track
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 191 on page 151.
Folder / track list
Fig. 192
Folder/track list
To display the folder / track list on the Media main menu, tap on the function
surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected source).
To playback select a title.
Folder/track list » Fig. 192
Selected audio source / audio source folder (movement within the folder
is carried out by pressing the function surface for the folder)
Options folder/track playback
Display of multimedia database (only available in the source directory) (not
applicable to the Infotainment Swing)
Select the audio source
Folder
Playlist
Currently playing title / track playback stopped
The title cannot be played (tapping on the function surface shows the
cause).
Note
In the list, the first 1000 entries (titles, directories etc.) are displayed with the
oldest creation date.
The scanning speed of the folder / track list depends on the connection
speed and volume of data.
Multimedia database
Fig. 193
Multimedia database
To display the multimedia database, in the Media main menu, tap on the
function surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected
source).
The audio files are sorted by their properties into individual categories
B
.
To playback, select the category and then the title.
A
B
C
152
Infotainment
Multimedia Database » Fig. 193
Selected audio source / selected category / folder of the audio source
Sorting categories
Displays Folder / Track List (only available in the bibliography)
Select the audio source
Audio sources
Introduction to the subject
CAUTION
Do not save any important data or that which has not been backed up on the
connected audio sources. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or dam-
aged files or connected audio sources.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
When connecting an external audio source, the external source information
messages can be displayed. These messages must be observed and confirmed
if necessary (e.g. enabling data transfer etc).
Note
The national copyright laws that apply in your country must be observed.
CD / DVD
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Fig. 194
CD / DVD slot
A
B
C
The CD/DVD» Fig. 194 slot is located in an external module in the glove box on
the front passenger side.
Toinsert a CD/DVD, with the labelled side facing up, into the CD slot until it is
automatically drawn in.
To eject, press the button The CD/DVD is moved to the starting position.
If the ejected CD/DVD is not removed within 10 seconds, it is retracted again
for safety reasons. However, the unit will not change to the CD/DVD source.
WARNING
The CD/DVD player is a laser product.
On the manufacturing date, this unit was classified as a class 1 laser prod-
uct in accordance with the national/international standards
DIN EN 60825-1: 2008-05 and DHHS Rules 21 CFR, Subchapter J. The la-
ser used in this class 1 laser product is so weak that there is no risk of dan-
ger when operated correctly.
This product is designed such that the laser is restricted to the inside of
Infotainment. However, the installed laser could be classified in a higher
class were the housing to be removed. For this reason, never remove Info-
tainment housing.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove the CD/DVD before you try to insert a new CD/DVD. Oth-
erwise you can damage the drive inside Infotainment.
Only insert in the CD/DVD drive original audio CDs/video DVDs or standard
CD-R/RWs or DVD±R/RWs.
Do not affix anything to the CD/DVDs!
If the ambient temperature is too high or too low, the CD / DVD playback
may not work.
Damp (condensation) may affect Infotainment in cold weather or high hu-
midity. This can cause the CD to jump or impair the play function. Once the
moisture has dissipated, playback is fully functional again.
Note
After pressing the button it takes a few seconds for the CD / DVD to be
ejected.
On uneven or unpaved roads, playback jumps may occur.
153
Media
If the CD/DVD is physically damaged, is not readable or is inserted incorrect-
ly the following message is displayed
Error: CD/DVD
.
It is possible that CD/DVDs protected by copyright cannot be played back at
all or only in certain circumstances.
SD card
Fig. 195
Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
Insert the SD card
Fig. 196
Swing: Insert the SD card
Pushing in
Insert the SD card in the slot in the direction of arrow (with the cut end fac-
ing right), until it “locks” » Fig. 195 or » Fig. 196.
Removing
Before removing the SD card, go to the main Media menu and tap function
surface
Remove safely
.
Press on the inserted SD memory card. The SD card “jumps” into the eject
position.
CAUTION
Do not use an SD card with a broken write protection “slide” - there is a risk
of damage to the SD card reader!
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vibrations might cause the
card to fall out of the adapter.
USB input
Installation location of the USB input and information regarding its use
» page 98.
The USB input audio source can be connected directly or via a connecting ca-
ble.
To connect, insert the USB audio source into the appropriate input.
To disconnect the USB in the Media main menu, tap on the function surface
Remove safely
.
Disconnect the audio source from the corresponding USB input.
USB audio source
With the ignition, the charging process starts automatically after the USB au-
dio source is connected (applies to audio sources where charging via the USB
connector is possible).
The charging efficiency can differ compared to the charging from the usual
mains power supply.
Depending on the type of the connected external device and the frequency of
use, the charging current may not be sufficient to charge the battery of the
connected device.
Some connected audio sources may not be recognised and cannot be charged.
CAUTION
USB extension cords, or reducers may impair the function of the connected
audio source.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cords from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
154
Infotainment
Bluetooth
®
player
Infotainment allows audio files of a connected Bluetooth
®
player to play using
the A2DP and AVRCP audio profile.
With Infotainment, multiple devices can be paired using Bluetooth
®
, but only
one of them can be used as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Connect /disconnect
To connect the Bluetooth
®
player with Infotainment- follow the same in-
structions as for pairing Infotainment with a telephone» page 164.
To disconnect the Bluetooth
®
player, end the connection in the list of paired
external devices » page 166.
Replace Bluetooth
®
player (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero)
If you would like to replace a Bluetooth
®
Player which is connected to Infotain-
ment as a Telephone at the same time, then a relevant information message
appears in the Infotainment screen.
End the connection to the currently connected Bluetooth
®
player and repeat
the pairing procedure » page 166, Managing paired external devices.
CAUTION
If an external device is connected to Infotainment using Apple CarPlay
orAndroid Auto, then it cannot be connected using Bluetooth
®
.
Jukebox
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
In the Jukebox (in the Infotainment internal memory), supported audio files
and » tab. Supported audio file formats on page 156video files » tab. Suppor-
ted video file formats on page 160can be imported from connected external
devices.
Import files
Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu
Manage jukebox
Import
.
Select the desired source.
Select the desired folders or files.
Tap the function surface .
Delete files
Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu
Manage jukebox
Delete
.
Select the desired folder or files in the selected category.
Tap the function surface
Delete
.
Show level of infotainment memory
Tap on the function surface in the Media main menu
Manage jukebox
.
It displays information about occupied and free space of the Infotainment
memory and the number of files that can still be imported.
Note
Files that have already been copied are recognised and cannot be copied
again (shown in grey).
It is not possible to copy files while simultaneously playing back audio/video
files in the CD/DVD drive.
WLAN
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Infotainment allows you to play audio files from one of the external devices
connected to the Infotainment WLAN.
Connect an external device that supports the DLNA (Digital Living Network
Alliance), with Infotainment WLAN» page 175.
If necessary use the UPnP application (Universal Plug and Play) in the con-
nected device, which allows playback to start.
Select the audio source
WLAN
.
155
Media
Supported audio sources and file formats - Columbus, Amundsen,
Bolero
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices that sup-
port MSC operation
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
CD/DVD
Only valid
for Info-
tainment
Columbus.
CD/DVD
Drive
Audio CD
(Up to 80
min);
CD-R / RW
(Up to 700
MB);
DVD±R/RW;
DVD-Audio.
DVD Video
ISO9660;
Joliet (Level 1,2,3);
UDF 1.x;
UDF 2.x
-
Blue-
tooth
®
-
Player
- -
Bluetooth logs A2DP
and AVRCP (1.0-1.5)
-
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix
Max bit
rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Multi
channels
a)
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio
9 and 10
wma
384 kbit /
s
96 kHz
no
m3u
pls
wpl
m3u8
asx
WAV wav
Defined by
the format
(approx.
1.5 Mbit/s)
MPEG-1; 2 and
2.5
layer 3
mp3
320 kbit /
s
48 kHz
MPEG-2 and 4
aac; mp4;
m4a
yes
FLAC;
Vorbis
flac; ogg
Defined by
the format
(approx.
5.5 Mbit/s)
a)
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the CANTON sound system.
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources
are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
156
Infotainment
Supported audio sources and file formats - Swing
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices that sup-
port MSC operation
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Blue-
tooth
®
-
Player
- -
Bluetooth logs A2DP
and AVRCP (1.0-1.5)
-
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 10
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
asx
MPEG-1; 2 and 2.5
(Layer-3)
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured audio sources
are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Images
Image viewer
main menu
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 197
Images: Main menu
To display the main menu, tap the

sensor field and then tap the function
surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 197
Select the image source
Folder / Image List
Display the previous image
Switching on the slideshow
Switching off the slideshow
Display of the next image
Menu settings for Images » page 141
Rotate the image 90° anticlockwise
Rotate the image 90° clockwise
Display the initial image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Guidance to GPS coordinates (Amundsen; the display only occurs if the
image contains GPS coordinates) (applies to Infotainment Columbus,
Amundsen) » page 190
A
157
Images
Control viewed images
Operation Action
Display of the next image
Finger motion across the screen to the left
(with initial representation)
Tap
Display the previous image
Finger motion across the screen to the right
(with starting representation)
Tap
Increase the image size
Touch screen using two fingers and pull apart
Turning the knob to the right (not applica-
ble to Infotainment Columbus)
Reduce the image size
Touch screen using two fingers and close to-
gether
Turning the knob to the left (not applica-
ble to Infotainment Columbus)
Moving the image with an en-
larged display
Drag your finger over the screen in the re-
quired direction
Rotate by 90 °
Touch screen using two fingers and move
clockwise or counter clockwise (only availa-
ble with start representation)
Tap or
Maximum magnification of
representation
Double finger tap on the screen
Display the initial image size
while retaining the aspect ratio
Double tap on the screen again
Pressing the knob (not applicable to Info-
tainment Columbus)
CAUTION
Viewing images in the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Ap-
ple devices.
Supported image file formats and sources
Supported image sources
Source Type Specification File system
SD card Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB devices
USB stick;
HDD (without
special software)
USB 1.x; 2.x and
3.x or higher with
support of USB
2.x
CD / DVD (Applies
to Infotainment Co-
lumbus)
CD-R / RW (Up
to 700 MB);
DVD±R/RW
ISO9660;
Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
;
UDF 1.x;
UDF 2.x
-
Supported file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix
Max. resolution
(Megapixels)
BMP bmp 4
JP (E) G jpg; jpeg 4; 64
GIF gif 4
PNG png 4
Note
The max. supported image size is 20 MB.
The GPT standards (GUID partition table) method structured image sources
are not supported by Infotainment.
158
Infotainment
DVD
video player
Main menu
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Fig. 198
Video DVD: Main menu
To display the main menu, insert a CD / DVD in the corresponding slot in the
external module.
or: In the main menu Media, select the video source, display the folder/track
list and start the video file.
Main menu » Fig. 198
Select a video source
Playback timeline
Information for the selected video file (e.g., video title, chapter)
Display the video DVD menu
Video DVD menu settings » page 141
Note
For safety reasons, the image display is switched off at speeds over 5 km/h.
Only the sound continues. The respective message appears on the screen.
Control playback
Operation Action
Play / pause Tap /
Play the previous video
Tap within 3 s from the start of the
track playback
A
B
C
Operation Action
Play the current video from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
playback
Fast rewind Press and hold
a)
Play the next video Tap
Fast forward Press and hold
a)
Forward / rewind the video at the de-
sired time
Tapping the playback time axis
B
» Fig. 198 on page 159
a)
The longer the function surface is held, the faster the fast forward/reverse.
DVD menu
Fig. 199
DVD menu
to display the DVD menu in the Video DVD main menu, tap on the function
surface
» Fig. 198 on page 159 .
Description of the DVD menu » Fig. 199
Operating surface
Example of the displayed menu
Function surfaces on the operating surface
Symbol Operation
/ Move the operating surface left / right
/ Show / hide full screen display of the control sur-
face
Close the control surface
Movement in the EPG/teletext
A
B
159
DVD
Symbol Operation
 Confirmation
Main menu
Return to Video DVD main menu
Supported video sources and file formats
Supported video sources
Source Interface Type Specification
File sys-
tem
SD card SD reader Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without
any special soft-
ware);
USB devices that
support MSC op-
eration
CD/DVD
CD/DVD
Drive
CD-R / RW (Up to
700 MB);
DVD±R/RW;
default DVD;
DVD-Video;
ISO9660;
Joliet (Level 1,2,3)
;
UDF 1.x;
UDF 2.x
-
Supported video file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix
Max. frames per
second
Max. resolution
MPEG-1
.mpeg
30 352 x 288
MPEG-2
25 720 x 576
MPEG-4 .mp4
QuickTime .mov
Matroska .mkv
DivX; XviD
.avi
MJPEG
Media Command
Operation
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Fig. 200
ŠKODA Media Command appli-
cation
The Media Command function allows playback of audio files or videos in up to
two TabletsThat are connected to Infotainment via WLAN, to control Info-
tainment.
The Media Command function enables operation of tablets with the operating
system Android or iOS.
The prerequisite for the Media Command function is enabled data transfer, the
application installed in the tablet “ŠKODA Media Command” as well as Info-
tainment control approved using the application » page 133.
“ŠKODA Media Command” application
The ŠKODA app is available in the App Store and Google Play online shops.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
“ŠKODA Media Command” application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 200 .
Connect tablet to Infotainment
Switch on the infotainment hotspot (the sensor field)

and then the func-
tion area
WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
).
Turn on WLAN in the tablet.
160
Infotainment
Establish a WLAN connection in the tablet » page 174, Connecting via
WLAN.
In the tablet, start the “ŠKODA Media Command” application.
CAUTION
If several devices are connected to the Infotainment system by means of
WLAN, there is the danger of WLAN overloading and thus also the inability of
Media Command to function properly.
High-definition video playback (e.g. HD) may cause playback problems or
problems connecting the tablets to the Infotainment system.
Main menu
Fig. 201
One tablet / two tablets
To display the main Media Command menu, tap the

sensor field and
then tap the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 201
Information on playing track
Playback timeline with a slider
Playback control
Image from the video being played back
Name of the tablet used/Switch to main menu of two tablets (when icon
displayed
)
Increase/decrease the tablet volume
Display of main menu and operation of first tablet (symbol )
Display of main menu and operation of second tablet (symbol )
Selection of the playback source
Wi-fi settings » page 139
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Select source and control playback
To select the playback source, in the main menu, tap on the functional sur-
face and select the source tablet.
To playback, select the category and then the title.
If two tablets are connected, the title playback starts in the two tablets at the
same time.
Playback can be controlled via Infotainment or on each tablet, and are inde-
pendent from each other. This means there is an option to playback different
titles on the tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Operation Action
Play / pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap
after 3 s from the start of the track
playback
Play the previous title
Tap
within 3 seconds from the start of the
track playback
Play back the next title Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 201 on page 161.
Note
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or videos by an inserted SD
card in the tablet. Playback of these tracks may be limited.
Supported file formats
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Video
MPEG-4 Part 2
MPEG-4 Part 10
(H264)
XVID
161
Media Command
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Audio
MPEG-1; 2 and
2,5
Layer 3 (mp3)
AAC (4.1)
M4A (4.1)
OGG
FLAC
WAV (4.1)
Telephone
Introductory information
Introductory information
WARNING
The general binding country-specific regulations for operating mobile tele-
phones in the vehicle must be observed.
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 202
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu is displayed if a telephone is connected to Infotain-
ment or a SIM card with activated telephone services is inserted in the external
module.
To display, tap the sensor field

.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 202
Name of the connected phone (by tapping the list of paired phones dis-
played)
Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the symbol
appears before the name )
A
B
C
D
162
Infotainment
Main telephone icon
- a telephone connected via Bluetooth
®
- a SIM card with activated telephone services, inserted in the exter-
nal module
List of connected telephones, which are available as the source of tele-
phone contacts
- no telephone is connected for telephone contacts
- a telephone is connected for telephone contacts
Change the main phone to the extension telephone
Enter the telephone number
List of contacts
Menu with text messages (SMS)
Call list
Menu settings for Telephone » page 141
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone network, data connection type if re-
quired
A telephone connected via Bluetooth
®
(applies to Infotainment Colum-
bus)
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Incoming SMS
ID of the telephone's wireless charging function » page 97 (applies to In-
fotainment Columbus)
PIN code of the SIM card was not entered
E
F
G

Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Swing.
Fig. 203
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to Infotain-
ment.
To display, press the

button.
If another, menu id displayed which was open last, to display the Telephone
main menu, press the button again

.
Main menu » Fig. 203
Name of the main telephone (tap to display the list of paired telephones)
Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the sym-
bol appears before the name
)
Enter the telephone number
List of contacts » page 168
Call list (missed calls, in addition to the function surface, the number of
calls when missed is displayed)
Starting voice control of the connected phone (e.g. Apple Siri, Google
Voice)
Menu settings for Telephone » page 147
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
A
B
C
D
163
Telephone
Pairing and connecting
Introduction to the subject
To connect a telephone with Infotainment, the two devices must be paired via
Bluetooth
®
.
Depending on the Infotainment type, up to 20 external devices can be paired
with the device. After reaching the maximum number, the pairing of the next
external device will replace that of the device that has not been used for the
longest period of time.
Connection to an already paired telephone is established automatically after
the ignition is switched on. Or, it is sufficient to search for the phone in the list
of paired devices.
The range of the connection to Infotainment is limited to the passenger com-
partment.
Compatibility and update
By reading the QR code » Fig. 172 on page 126 or after typing the following
address into the web browser, information about the compatibility of phones
and updates are available for Infotainment Bluetooth
®
can be displayed.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Conditions for pairing
The ignition is switched on.
The Bluetooth
®
function of Infotainment and the telephone is switched on.
The visibility of Infotainment and the telephone is switched on.
The telephone is within range of the Bluetooth
®
signal of Infotainment.
The telephone is compatible with Infotainment.
There is no external device connected to Infotainment using Apple
CarPlay.
Pairing and connection process
Pair the telephone with Infotainment
Search available Bluetooth
®
devices in your telephone.
Select the name of the Infotainment system.
The name of the Infotainment system can be checked in the Telephone main
menu if you tap on the function surface
Bluetooth
in the
Name:
menu item.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
The phone is either connected to Infotainment or just linked, depending on the
number of already connected external devices and on the use of the SIM card
inserted in the external module (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
» page 165.
Pair Infotainment with the telephone
If no telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, press the but-
ton/sensor field

and then tap the
Find telephone
function surface or press
the

sensor field, and then tap the function surface
Find mobile phone
.
If one telephone is connected to the infotainment system, then, in the Tele-
phone main menu, tap on the
Find mobile phone
function surface.
If a SIM card with activated telephone services is inserted in the external
module of infotainment Columbus, then, in the Telephone main menu, tap on
the
Find mobile phone
.
Select the desired telephone from the list of visited external Bluetooth
®
devi-
ces.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
WARNING
Do not pair and connect a telephone to the Infotainment system while driv-
ing the vehicle - there is risk of an accident!
Connect phone using the rSAP profile
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule.
A phone that has been connected via the Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile (remote
transfer of SIM data) can be used for phone and data services.
Pair the phone with Infotainment
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
In the Telephone main menu, switch on the
Business phone “interface”
.
Switch on Bluetooth
®
visibility in the phone and allow the connection via the
Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile.
Search for a phone and connect to the device » page 164, Pair Infotainment
with the telephone.
164
Infotainment
If the Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile is supported by the telephone to be connected,
then the infotainment system tries to connect to the phone using this profile
with priority.
Functional impairment
In the following cases, the phone cannot be connected to Infotainment via the
Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile.
The SIM card is plugged into the external module.
An external device is connected to Infotainment using Apple CarPlay or
Android Auto.
Note
Vehicle antennas are used to receive the mobile radio signal of the connected
phone.
Possible connection types
Depending on the number of connected Bluetooth
®
devices, connection type, as well as the use of the SIM card in the external module, the following functions
are available.
Only applies to Infotainment Columbus
connec-
tion
version
The first device (main telephone) The second device (additional telephone)
Third device Fourth device
Telephone
SIM card
(In the external mod-
ule)
Telephone
SIM card
(In the external mod-
ule)
1.
rSAP
incoming / outgoing
Calls, text messages,
telephone contacts,
Data connection:
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
HFP (incoming calls),
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
- Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
2.
HFP (Incoming / out-
going
Calls), text messages,
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
HFP (incoming calls),
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
Data connection Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
165
Telephone
connec-
tion
version
The first device (main telephone) The second device (additional telephone)
Third device Fourth device
Telephone
SIM card
(In the external mod-
ule)
Telephone
SIM card
(In the external mod-
ule)
3.
HFP (Incoming / out-
going
Calls), text messages,
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
- -
Incoming calls,
text messages
Data connection
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
4. -
incoming / outgoing
Calls, text messages,
Phone contacts
b)
,
Data connection
HFP (incoming calls),
text messages
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
-
Phone contacts
b)
,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
In every connection variant, there is only the option of connecting one external device to Infotainment as a Bluetooth
®
player.
b)
If telephone contacts from the third device are imported into Infotainment, it's not possible to use the telephone contacts of the SIM card inserted in the external module.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
The first device (main telephone)
The second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls), SMS,
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
HFP (incoming calls),
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
The first device (main telephone)
The second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (Incoming / outgoing calls),
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only an external device can be connected to Infotainment as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Managing paired external devices
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
Bluetooth
Paired devices
.
In the list of paired external devices, the following symbols may appear for the
individual external devices.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Operation
grey External device can be connected as telephone
Green External device is connected as telephone
grey
External device can be connected as Bluetooth
®
play-
er
White External device is connected as Bluetooth
®
player
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card inserted in the exter-
nal module
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Operation
grey
An external device can be connected for using tele-
phone contacts and the text message function from
this external device
blue
An external device is connected and using of tele-
phone contacts and the text message function can be
carried out from this external device
166
Infotainment
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Operation
White External device can be connected as telephone
Green External device is connected as telephone
White
External device can be connected as Bluetooth
®
play-
er
Green External device is connected as Bluetooth
®
player
Connection set-up
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles - .
If external Bluetooth
®
devices are already connected to the device, then during
the connection process messages and options for the possible connection
type (e.g. replacement of the connected external Bluetooth
®
device) are dis-
played.
Disconnection
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles - .
Delete the paired external device
To delete, tap on one of the following function surfaces.
- Delete all external devices
- Delete the desired external device
Confirm the deletion by tapping on the function surface
Delete
.
Delete all
or
All areas
Use the SIM card in the external module
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule.
Fig. 204
Insert SIM card in the external module
A SIM card size “mini” (standard size 25x15 mm) must be used.
The SIM card can be used for phone and data services.
The SIM card slot is located in an external module in the storage compartment
on the front passenger side » Fig. 204.
Switching SIM card use on / off in the external module
In the Telephone main menu, switch on the
Business phone “interface”
.
Insert the SIM card
Insert the SIM card into the appropriate slot » Fig. 204 With the bevelled
corner on the left and the contacts facing downwards until it “locks”.
Using the SIM card for the first time
When using the SIM card in the external module, select the use type.
Calls too
- enabling data and telephone services.
Only data connections
- enabling of data services only.
Set the network parameters for Internet connection if required » page 174.
By using the SIM card for phone services, the connection to the connected
phones is terminated.
Enter the PIN code and save
If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
167
Telephone
Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  confirm.
or: Tap the functional surface to save and confirm the PIN code.
Change the PIN code
The PIN code can be changed in the Telephone main menu, in the
PIN
setup
Change PIN
menu item
Changing SIM card usage
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
Use SIM card only
for data connection
function surface.
Remove the SIM card
Press the inserted SIM card and remove it.
CAUTION
When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card, there is a risk of damage to the
external module.
Avoid using an adapter for the SIM card as the SIM card may fall out while
driving due to vehicle vibrations - There is the risk of damage to the external
module.
Telephone functions
Enter telephone number and select
Enter a telephone number and dial
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface .
Function surfaces of the numerical keyboard
Enter the last dialled number / dial the telephone number entered
Emergency call (only applies to some countries)
Breakdown call in case of breakdown
Information call (for information regarding the products and services of
the ŠKODA brand )
Choosing the mailbox number (For Infotainment Swing, the function is
not supported)
Delete the last number entered
Display of function surfaces for the movement of the cursor in the
input line
Search for a contact using the numeric keypad
The numeric keypad can also be used for a contact search.
For example, if you enter 32, the unit will display contacts with the letter se-
quence DA, FA, EB, etc. next to the numerical keypad.
Voicemail box (does not apply to the infotainment Swing)
To select the voice mailbox number, tap the functional surface .
If the voicemail number or was not imported or entered, then this can be en-
tered or changed as follows.
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
User profile
Mailbox number:
.
Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
List of telephone contacts
Fig. 205
List of telephone contacts / contact details
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
and a list of tele-
phone contacts will be displayed » Fig. 205.
If the main telephone is connected to Infotainment, the telephone contacts
from the telephone are used.
If a SIM card with activated telephone services is located in the external mod-
ule of Infotainment Columbus, the SIM card telephone contacts are available.
Another external device to import telephone contacts can be selected by tap-
ping the function surface
F
» Fig. 202 on page 162.
Functional surfaces
Contact search
Dial a number in the telephone contact list (if a telephone contact contains
several telephone numbers, a menu containing the telephone numbers as-
signed to this contact is displayed after the contact is selected)
Display the contact details
A
B
168
Infotainment
Select the telephone number in the contact details
Processing the telephone number of the contact before dialling
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
The contact name can be read out by a Infotainment's generated voice
Opens the menu for sending a text message (SMS)
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen:
Start the route guidance to the contact address
Import list
After the primary telephone and/or the SIM card (applies to Infotainment Co-
lumbus) connects to the infotainment system for the first time, the import of
the telephone contacts to the infotainment memory starts. The import can
take several minutes.
In the infotainment phonebook, there are 4000 (applies to Infotainment Co-
lumbus) and 2000 (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing) free
storage locations for imported telephone contacts. Each contact can contain
up to 5 telephone numbers.
The number of imported contacts can be determined in the menu item
User profile
Import contacts:
or
Import contacts
.
If an error occurs during the import, an appropriate message appears on the
screen.
Refresh list
When the telephone reconnects with Infotainment, the list is automatically up-
dated.
The update can be performed manually as follows.
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
User profile
Import contacts:
or
Import contacts
.
C
Management of preferred contacts (favourites)
Fig. 206
Favourite contacts
Assigning favourites
In the main menu Telephone, tap on the desired function surface
A
» Fig. 206.
Select the desired contact (if necessary one of the contact numbers).
Connecting to a favourite
The functional surfaces of preferred contacts allow for an immediate dial of
the contact telephone number.
The favourites are available in two storage groups.
To the change Storage Group tap on the functional surface
B
» Fig. 206.
To choose tap on the assigned function area
A
» Fig. 206.
Change allocated favourites
In the main Telephone menu, press and hold the desired function surface
A
» Fig. 206.
Select the desired contact (if necessary one of the contact numbers).
Delete a favourite
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface
User profile
Manage favourites
.
Press the desired function surface of the preferred contact and confirm the
deletion.
You can delete all contacts by tapping on the function surface
Delete all
/
All
areas
and confirming the delete process.
169
Telephone
Function surface for emergency call
If the vehicle is not equipped with the buttons for the Care Connect service
» page 17, the position of the last function surface in the first group of favour-
ites will show the function surface for an emergency call is displayed in the
status bar. In some countries, this function may not be available.
The function surface can be assigned a different number for the preferred
contact.
To restore the emergency number, it is necessary to remove the telephone
from the list of paired external devices » page 166 and then to pair and con-
nect again.
Call list
Fig. 207
Call history / Contact details
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface and a call list will
be displayed » Fig. 207.
The call list can also be displayed during a telephone call.
Functional surfaces
Setting the display depending on the type of call
All areas
- List of all calls
Missed calls
/
Missed calls
- List of missed calls
Dialled numbers
- List of dialled numbers
Received calls
/
Received calls
- list of received calls
Dial the contact number/telephone number
Symbols of the call type
- Answered call
- Outgoing call
- Missed call
A
B
Edit the telephone number before dialling (not applicable to Infotainment
Swing)
Display the contact details » Fig. 207
C
- Dial the contact number
Phone call
Depending on the conversation context, the following functions can be execu-
ted.
End dialling / reject incoming call / end call
Accept incoming call / return to held call
Switch on/off ringer
Hold a call
Switch off/on microphone
Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero:
Set up a conference call
Show caller details (if the contact is stored in the list)
Switch on/off hands-free (call to the telephone / switch to Infotainment)
To switch off the hands-free system, in the Telephone main menu, tap on the
function surface
→Tap on
Hands-free
during a call.
To switch off the hands-free system, tap on the function surface
during a
call.
Conference
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
The conference call is a shared call with between three and six participants.
Start a conference call/invite additional participants
During a call/conference, make the next call.
or: Take the new incoming call by tapping the function surface .
To initiate conference call or. return to the conference call, tap on the
function surface .
Ongoing conference call
During an ongoing conference call, the call duration is displayed on the screen.
Depending on the context, the following functions can be selected.
170
Infotainment
Hold a conference call - Leave the conference temporarily (the confer-
ence continues in your absence)
Return to the held conference call
Switch off/on microphone
End conference call
Conference call details
Conference details
During the ongoing conference call, tap on the function surface .
A list of other conference participants is displayed. The following functions
can be selected depending on the type of telephone.
View details of participant
Talk to a participant separately from the conference call
End the call to a conference participant
Text messages (SMS)
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 208
Main menu text messages
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surface The main menu
for text messages appears » Fig. 208.
If required, select whether the SIM card inserted in the external module or
the telephone (applies to Infotainment Columbus) is to be used as the source
of the text messages.
Depending on your type of connected telephone, you can perform the follow-
ing functions.
Opening a list of templates for quick answers
New text message
- Creating and sending the message
Inbox
- Open a list of received messages
Sent
- Open a list of sent messages
Outbox
- Open a list of messages not sent
Drafts
- Open a list of drafts (messages in progress)
Deleted
- Open a list of deleted messages
Send contact details
- Send contact details (business card) (applies to Info-
tainment Columbus)
Select source of text messages (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Display for the selection of the source of text messages (this applies to the
Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external module)
If a SIM card used only for data services is located in the external module and if
a phone that supports the Bluetooth
®
profile MAP is connected to Infotain-
ment, then it is possible to adjust the source from which a text message menu
will be displayed after tapping on the function surface
in the main Telephone
menu.
In the Telephone main menu, tap on the function surfaces
Text message
settings
Standard account
.
Select the desired menu item.
New text message
Creating and sending the message
In the main menu of the text messages, tap on the function surface
inter-
face» Fig. 208 on page 171.
Write a text message and confirm. A view of the text message is displayed.
Tap the function surface .
Select the recipient of the message from the displayed contact list or tap on
the and enter the telephone number.
To add additional recipients, tap on the function surface .
To send the text message, tap the function surface .
Viewing the text message
After opening the view message function, the following functions can be exe-
cuted.
The text can be read out by Infotainment's generated voice
The text can be stored as a draft
A
171
Telephone
Open a list of templates with the open to replace the recorded text with
the selected template
Open the contact list
The message can be edited, as long as the text range is within the entered
view.
Contact list
After the list has been opened the following functions can be executed.
Insert a contact in the recipient list
Enter the telephone number
Return to view the message
Tap on the
Find
function surface to open a list of available telephone contacts.
After selecting the contact number or entering the telephone number, the re-
cipient list will be displayed in the screen.
Recipient list
The following functions can be executed by tapping on one of the functional
surfaces.
Display contact list with the option of adding/removing additional re-
cipients (tap on the function surface to return to the recipient list
.
Removal of the contact from the recipient list
Sending the message
Return to view the message
Received text message
When you receive a new message, the number of new messages received is
displayed within the function surface and at the same time the icon in the
status bar is displayed in the status bar.
To open a list of received messages, go to the Telephone main menu and
tap on function surface .
Select a message.
The message content and the following menu is displayed.
The text can be read out by Infotainment's generated voice
Display a menu with additional options
Reply with template
- Reply using a template
Delete current text message
- Distance of displayed text message (applies to
Infotainment Columbus, when the SIM card is inserted in the external
module or the telephone is connected via the Bluetooth
®
-profile rSAP)
Display numbers
- Recognition of telephone numbers in the message in-
cluding the contact number (recognised numbers can be dialled directly
or edited before dialling, or may be sent to this message)
Forwarding a message with the option to edit the message before sending
Reply to the sender via a message
172
Infotainment
Data connection
Internet connection
Infotainment Columbus
Fig. 209
WLAN (wi-fi) / Bluetooth® / SIM card
Possible connection types » Fig. 209
Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
the external device » page 175, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of
the external device.
By connecting to a mobile phone (it is connected to the Internet) using the
Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile » page 174, Establishing a connection using the
Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile.
Using a SIM Card with a data tariff » page 174, Establishing a connection
using a SIM card in the external module.
A
B
C
Connecting Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 210
WLAN (Wi-Fi) / CarStick
Possible connection types » Fig. 210
Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
the external device » page 175, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of
the external device.
Using the CarStick USB device » page 173.
Connecting via the CarStick device
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The CarStick USB device can be purchased from the original accessories.
Insert a SIM card with activated data services into the CarStick device.
The required dimensions of the SIM card, as well as the correct procedure dur-
ing insertion can be found in the instructions enclosed with the CarStick ŠKO-
DA original accessory.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Insert the CarStick into the USB input at the front » Fig. 113 on page 98,
Wait approximately one minute until the red light on Carstick stays continu-
ously lit (if the red lights up, then disconnect and re-insert the Carstick).
If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  confirm.
or: Tap the functional surface to save and confirm the PIN code.
A
B
173
Data connection
If necessary, set the required network of the data service provider.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one
of the displayed providers can be used.
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the
menu item

Network
Network settings
.
CAUTION
If you insert a SIM card of the wrong size or in the wrong direction, there is a
risk of damage to the CarStick device.
Establishing a connection using a SIM card in the external module
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule.
A SIM card size “mini” (standard size 25x15 mm) with enabled data services
must be used.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
In the Telephone main menu, switch on the
Business phone “interface”
.
Insert a SIM card into the corresponding slot into the external module in the
storage compartment on the passenger's side » Fig. 204 on page 167.
Insert the SIM card with the bevelled corner on the left and the contacts
facing downwards until it “locks”.
Select the SIM card usage type:
Calls too
- enabling data and telephone services.
Only data connections
- enabling of data services only.
If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  confirm.
or: Tap the functional surface to save and confirm the PIN code.
Set the data service provider’s required network and confirm the Internet
connection.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one
of the displayed providers can be used.
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the
menu item

Network
Network settings
.
The data connection setting using the SIM card can be configured in the

Network
Data connection:
.
CAUTION
When inserting an incorrectly sized SIM card or in the wrong direction, there is
a risk of damage to the external module.
Establishing a connection using the Bluetooth
®
rSAP profile
Applies to Infotainment Columbus with the SIM card slot in the external mod-
ule.
The prerequisite for establishing an Internet connection is using a telephone
with a SIM card with active data services.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Switch on the “Business” function in Infotainment, the sensor field

and
then the function surface
Phone interface “Business”
.
Switch on Bluetooth
®
, the sensor field

and then the function surface
Bluetooth
Bluetooth
.
Turn on Infotainment visibility (tap the

sensor field and then tap the
function surface
Bluetooth
Visibility:
Visible
.
Switch on Bluetooth
®
and its visibility in the phone.
Connect and pair the phone with Infotainment » page 164.
Connecting via WLAN
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
WLAN can be used to connect to the Internet, to playback audio files in the
menu media or for operating the Infotainment system using an application in
the external device (e.g. “ŠKODA Media Command”).
It is possible to connect up to 8 external devices to the Infotainment hotspot
and at the same time to connect Infotainment to another hotspot.
Switching the Infotainment hotspot on/off
Switch on the ignition.
Switch the hotspot on/off in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
174
Infotainment
Setting the Infotainment hotspot
The Infotainment hotspot is factory set.
The setting can be changed in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Security level:
- Type of access protection (always set to WPA2)
Network key
- Access password
SSID: ...
- Hotspot name
Do not send network name (SSID)
- Switch the visibility of the hotspot on/off
To save the configured parameters, tap the
Store
function surface.
Connecting an external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on WLAN in the external device and search for the infotainment hot-
spot.
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the required password.
Confirm the connection.
Note
The name of the Infotainment hotspot (SSID) and the access password can be
found in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the external device
Fig. 211
Main menu of the Infotainment
WLAN
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a hotspot with WPA2
access protection.
Switch on the ignition.
If the Infotainment WLAN is not activated, activate it in the menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
In area
A
» Fig. 211, a list of available or previously connected hotspots is dis-
played.
The hotspot list can be updated by tapping the function surface
B
.
Select the hotspot and enter the password.
If the hotspot is not visible, you can establish the connection to it manually.
Tap the function surface
Manual settings
.
Set the required hotspot parameters.
Tap the function surface
Connect
.
Icons and function surfaces in the list of available hotspots
A
» Fig. 211
Connected hotspot
Signal strength of the connected hotspot
Delete the hotspot
Hotspot connection recommendations
Only leave the hotspot to be connected switched on, switch off the other
hotspot.
On some hotspots, the connection setup takes longer, wait for the end of
the connection setup.
If the connection is interrupted, search for available hotspots again and re-
peat connection setup.
Delete unused hotspots. This shortens the time required for connection set-
up.
Note
It is not possible to connect Infotainment Columbus to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device as long as a SIM card with enabled data services is in the external
module of Infotainment or a phone connected to Infotainment via the Blue-
tooth
®
rSAP profile.
An Infotainment Amundsen connection with external device hotspot is not
possible, as long as there is an active connection using the Carstickdevice.
Connect via WPS
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
It is not necessary to enter the access password when connecting via WPS.
175
Data connection
Connecting the Infotainment system to the hotspot of the external device
Switch on the ignition.
In the external device, switch on the hotspot, its visibility, and the WPS con-
nection option.
In the Infotainment system, switch on WLAN in menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
Tap the function surface
WPS fast connection (WPS button)
.
Connecting the external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment hotspot in menu item

WLAN
Mobile
hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
Tap the function surface
WPS fast connection (WPS button)
.
In the external device, switch on the WPS connection option.
SmartLink
Introductory information
Introduction to the subject
Fig. 212
Information on SmartLink on the
ŠKODA websites
SmartLink offers the ability to display certified applications on an external de-
vice equipped with a USB device on the Infotainment screen and to operate
them.
SmartLink supports the following communication systems.
“Android Auto”
“Apple CarPlay”
“MirrorLink
®
Using the applications in the connected external device it is possible to use the
navigation to make a call, to listen to music.
For reasons of safety, the operation of some applications while driving is not
possible or only limited.
Read in the QR code» Fig. 212orenter the following address in the web brows-
er to open the website with information on the SmartLink communication sys-
tem.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartlink
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be operated via the Infotainment system, using your voice or using the
buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.
To activate voice control for the connected external device, hold down

or

or hold down the button on the multifunction steering wheel.
176
Infotainment
CAUTION
To establish the connection, it is necessary for the date and time in Infotain-
ment to be set correctly. If the date and time setting is based on the GPS sig-
nal, then problems may arise with establishing a connection with a poor GPS
signal reception.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cords from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
With some connected external devices, it is necessary for the connected ex-
ternal device to be “unlocked” for trouble-free functioning of the SmartLink
function.
Main menu
Fig. 213
Supported communication systems / Example of available
communication systems of the connected external device
to display the SmartLink main menu, tap on the sensor field

or press the

button.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
If no external device is connected, then a menu with supported communica-
tion systems SmartLink is displayed
A
» Fig. 213,
Main menu » Fig. 213
Supported communication systems
Available communication systems of the connected external device
Display of information about SmartLink
Disconnection of the active connection
Settings of the SmartLink » page 142 menu or » page 147
A
B
Android Auto
Connection set-up / disconnection
Prerequisites for establishing a connection
The external device to be connected must support the “Android Auto”
communication system.
In the external device to be connected, the “Android Auto” application
must be installed.
Some applications require the data connection in the connected external
device to be switched on.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the “Android
Auto” connection supports can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
Connection set-up
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment system.
Switch on the external device.
Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 98.
Select the connection using “Android Auto”
B
» Fig. 213 on page 177.
Disconnection of the active connection
In the “Android Auto” main menu, tap the function surface
.
Tap the “ŠKODA” function surface to go back to the main menu SmartLink.
Tap the function surface
.
or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
nal device is automatically connected.
Function restriction of Infotainment
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
By connecting the external device with “Android Auto”, all currently connected
Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected and the external device will automati-
cally be connected as the main telephone.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system. The SIM card inserted in the external module can on-
ly be used for data connection.
177
SmartLink
If route guidance is taking place at this moment in Infotainment, then there
is the option to start the route guidance in the “Android Auto” application. And
vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the “Android Auto”
application, then there is the possibility that this will be terminated by the
start of route guidance by the Infotainment system.
main menu
Fig. 214
Android Auto: Main menu
Main menu » Fig. 214
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview regarding current applications, telephone calls, accepted text
messages, tasks in the working directory, weather or similar.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as the option of returning to
the SmartLink main menu
Switching on voice control (Google Voice)
The symbol appears next to the function surface in the area
A
, Then, by
tapping on this function surface again, a list of new applications is displayed.
Apple CarPlay
Connection set-up / disconnection
Prerequisites for establishing a connection
The external device to be connected must support the “Apple CarPlay”
communication system.
The data connection of the external device to be connected must be ac-
tive.
The voice control (Siri) of the external device to be connected must be ac-
tive.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the “Apple
CarPlay” connection supports can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
Connection set-up
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment system.
Switch on the external device.
Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 98.
Select the connection using “Apple CarPlay”
B
» Fig. 213 on page 177.
Disconnection of the active connection
In the main menu “Apple CarPlay”, tap the function surface of the “ŠKODA”
application, the main menu SmartLink is displayed.
Tap the function surface
.
or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
nal device is automatically connected.
Function restriction of Infotainment
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
By connecting the external device with “Apple CarPlay”, all currently connec-
ted Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system. The SIM card inserted in the external module can on-
ly be used for data services.
178
Infotainment
If route guidance is taking place at this moment using Infotainment, then this
is terminated by starting the route guidance in the “Apple CarPlay” application.
And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the “Apple
CarPlay” application, then this will be terminated by the start of route guid-
ance by the Infotainment system.
Note
Some phone features of the connected external device can be operated in the
display of the instrument cluster » page 56.
main menu
Fig. 215
Apple CarPlay: Main menu
Main menu » Fig. 215
List of available applications
More pages with applications
Depending on how long the function surface is pressed:
Tap - Return to “Apple Carplay” main menu
Hold - Switch on voice control (Siri)
MirrorLink
®
Connection set-up / disconnection
Prerequisites for establishing a connection
The external device to be connected must support the communication
system “MirrorLink
®
”.
The external device to be connected must have at least one
“MirrorLink
®
”application installed.
Some applications require the data connection in the connected external
device to be switched on.
A
B
Connection set-up
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment system.
Switch on the external device.
Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 98.
Select the connection using “MirrorLink
®
B
» Fig. 213 on page 177.
Disconnection of the active connection
In the main menu of “MirrorLink
®
”, tap the function surface The SmartLink
main menu is displayed.
Tap the functional surface .
or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input. When reconnected, the exter-
nal device is automatically connected.
Function restriction of Infotainment
applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero: If you wish to use the
device to be connected in the Telephone menu, the external device must be
paired with and connected to the Infotainment system before establishing the
connection» page 164.
Applies to Infotainment Swing. By connecting the external device to all cur-
rently connected Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected and the external de-
vice will automatically be connected as the main telephone. Depending on the
device to be connected, a connection confirmation may be required.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
main menu
Fig. 216
MirrorLink®: Main menu
179
SmartLink
Main menu » Fig. 216
Return to SmartLink main menu » page 177
List of running applications
Display of the last running application in the connected external device
Settings of the SmartLink » page 142 menu or » page 147
List of applications
More pages with applications
Applications cannot be operated while driving
Display of the function surfaces during the running application
Return to “MirrorLink
®
” main menu
Show function surfaces at the top/bottom (applies to Infotainment
Amundsen, Bolero)
Move the functional surfaces in the desired corner of the screen
(applies to the infotainment Swing)
To show/hide the function surfaces, press the controller
(applies to Infotain-
ment Amundsen, Bolero).
function problems
If problems occur with the “MirrorLink
®
”connection, then one of the following
messages may occur on the screen.
Fault: transfer
- Disconnect and reconnect the external device
MirrorLink® audio is unavailable.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external device
MirrorLink® availability on this mobile device is restricted.
- it is not possible to use the
connected device during the journey or the device only has limited availabili-
ty (applies to Infotainment swing)
The mobile device is locked. Please unlock the mobile device to use MirrorLink®
- “unlock”
the connected external device
Unable to start app or app not working.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external
device
A
B
Application“ŠKODA OneApp”
Introductory information
Fig. 217
Information on the ŠKODA
OneApp application on the ŠKO-
DA websites
A mobile telephone connected to the Infotainment system allows you to edit
and evaluate journey data in the “ŠKODA One App” application.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information on the ŠKODA mobile applications.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
The “ŠKODA OneApp” application is available in the App Store and Google
Play online shops.
“ŠKODA OneApp” application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 217 .
For the full functionality of the “ŠKODA One App” application, data transfer
from external devices must be activated.
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen, Bolero
To activate data transfer from external devices , tap the

sensor field
and then tap the function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data
transfer for ŠKODA Apps
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To activate data from external devices, press the

button, then tap on
function surface →
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
.
Note
Some functions of the application are not available in all countries or there is a
function restriction during the journey » page 126, Mobile devices and applica-
tions.
180
Infotainment
Connecting to Infotainment
The mobile telephone can be connected to the Infotainment system using the
SmartLink function or via WLAN.
Connection by SmartLink
Switch on the ignition.
Establish the connection via SmartLink (eg “MirrorLink
®
”)» page 176.
In the list of available applications, select the “ŠKODA One App” application.
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be started using voice activation, via the Infotainment screen, using the
operating elements on Infotainment, or using the buttons on the multi-func-
tion steering wheel.
Once connected, the contents of the application in the infotainment screen
may be displayed.
A possible connection between the mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system via WLAN will be terminated after a connection is established using
SmartLink.
Connection via WLAN (applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Switch on the ignition.
Establish the WLAN connection » page 174.
In the mobile telephone, start the “ŠKODA OneApp” application.
Disconnect the connection
The connection can be switched off in one of the following ways.
Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
End the connection in the “ŠKODA OneApp” application.
Disconnect the mobile telephone from the USB port or terminate the WLAN
connection.
Navigation
Introductory information
Navigation - function sequence
Applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen.
Route guidance is started as follows.
Search for/ enter a new destination or Select one of the stored destinations.
Confirm the route calculation in the destination details or if necessary, adjust
the route options.
Select the preferred route type, if this is requested by Infotainment.
A route calculation occurs and route guidance starts.
The route guidance is provided by graphical nav. announcements.
There is an option to add additional destinations during route guidance, or to
adapt the route.
If a traffic radio station is available, information concerning traffic delays is
evaluated by Infotainment and, if necessary, an alternative route is offered.
If you deviate from the route, then a new route calculation is carried out.
GPS satellite signal
Infotainment uses the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite signal for
route guidance.
Outside the range of the GPS satellite signal (e.g. in dense vegetation, in tun-
nels, parking garages, etc.), Infotainment navigates only with restrictions using
vehicle sensors.
The unit offers the possibility to show in the split screen display the following
Position
» Fig. 220 on page 184 information about the current geographical po-
sition of the vehicle and the satellite signal.
Geographical latitude
Geographical longitude
Elevation
Number of received/available satellites
If no GPS satellite signal is available, no values are displayed.
181
Navigation
Navigation data
Columbus navigation data source
The navigation data is stored in the internal Infotainment memory.
Amundsen navigation data source
The navigation data is stored on an Original SD card.
In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the Original SD card, with the
navigation data, must be inserted in the respective slot in the external module
» page 128.
If the original SD card should be damaged or lost, a new original SD card can
be purchased from the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
With a non-original SD Card, the navigation does not work.
Finding out the version of the navigation data
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
Update navigation data
We recommend that you update the navigation data on a regular basis.
The Infotainment can give incorrect driving recommendations if the road con-
dition or the traffic situation does not match the navigation data. This can lead
to route guidance being carried out using a different route or proposing a
change of direction in a one-way street. Therefore, observe the respective
traffic signs while driving, which always have priority over the driving recom-
mendations.
The information on updating the navigation data is to be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
When activated online services “Infotainment online” » page 14 can the naviga-
tion data for the Infotainment Columbus Updating online » page 182, Naviga-
tion data and POI categories Import / Update online,
Navigation data and POI categories Import / Update online
Manual update
When “Infotainment Online” » page 14 online services are activated, there is
the option of downloading/updating navigation data (applies to Infotainment
Columbus) or of downloading POI categories created in the user profile on the
“ŠKODA Connect Portal” website.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Update (online)
Retrieve
.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis-
played.
Tap the functional surface and select one of the following menu items.
All
- Import all the available navigation data
Favourites
- Import of navigation data preferably countries / regions (applies to
the infotainment Columbus)
POIs
- Import of the POI category created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” website » page 190
Maps
- Import of the navigation data available for the respective countries/re-
gions (applies to Infotainment Columbus)
Select the desired list entries.
Tap on function surface
Retrieve
and confirm the deletion.
Automatic update
Applies to vehicles with the Infotainment Columbus: if the online services
“Infotainment Online” » page 14 are activated and an update of the navigation
data for the current vehicle position or the route destination is available, the
infotainment will issue this automatic note and offer an update option.
During the upgrade process, infotainment is usable without limitation.
To complete the update of the navigation data, the ignition and Infotainment
must be switched off for at least 30 min.
Main menu
Fig. 218
Navigation: Main menu
182
Infotainment
To display, tap the sensor field

.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
Description of the function interfaces
A
» Fig. 218
Context-dependent:
Route guidance is disabled - Search / enter a new destination
Route guidance is enabled - The following menu is displayed:
Route details
- Displays the route details » page 197
Change route in map
- Displays a menu for the route change in the map
(valid for Infotainment Columbus) » page 198
Congestion ahead
- Manual adjusts traffic conditions » page 202
Enter destination
- Search / enter a new destination / stopover » page 184
Stop route guidance
- Stops route guidance » page 196
The following menu is displayed:
Curr. current position
- Store the current vehicle position as the flagged
destination » page 188
Routes
- Displays the list of saved routes » page 198
Destinations
- Display the list of stored destinations » page 187
Last destinations
- Display the list of recent destinations to which route
guidance was carried out » page 187
Home address
- Route guidance to your home address » page 188
Search for POIs in categories
,
and
Map display options » page 191
Playback control Media/Radio (does not apply to vehicles with Infotain-
ment Amundsen and the digital instrument cluster)
Display for the volume setting of the navigation announcements/repeti-
tion of the navigation announcement » page 196
Navigation settings » page 143
Change the map display between the digital instrument cluster and the In-
fotainment screen (applies to vehicles with Infotainment Amundsen and
the digital instrument cluster)
B
Map
Fig. 219
Card description
The following information and function surfaces can be displayed in the
map. » Fig. 219
Vehicle position
Route
Function interfaces for card use » page 191
Functional surface of the POI
Functional surface for the POI list
Function surface for displaying a traffic incident » page 202
Information on the maximum permitted speed
Destination position
Intermediate destination position
Destination position
Home address
Favourite position
Information in the status line
Street name / street number of the current vehicle position
Distance to destination
Route to the stopover
Estimated travelling time to the destination
Estimated travel time to the stopover
Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
183
Navigation
additional window
Fig. 220
Split screen
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Amundsen and the digital instrument
cluster: when the map display is displayed in the digital instrument cluster, the
split screen is always shown and cannot be dimmed.
To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface
Split screen
.
To select content of the additional window
A
» Fig. 220 tap the function
surface
Tap and select one of the following menus, depending on the con-
text.
Audio
- Operation of
Radio
/
Media
playback
Compass
- Displays the current vehicle location in relation to the compass di-
rections
Freq. Routes
- Displays the three most frequently travelled routes (if route
guidance is disabled) » page 196
Manoeuvre
- Display graphical driving recommendations (if route guidance is
enabled) » page 196
Position
- Displays the geographical coordinates of the current vehicle loca-
tion
Map
- Preview card display (applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus,
without the digital instrument cluster) » page 193
Search for destination and enter
Selecting the type of destination search/destination entry
Fig. 221
Selecting the type of destina-
tion search/destination entry
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main menu navigation, tap on the
function surface
Enter destination
.
Function surfaces » Fig. 221
Search for a destination or POI (point of interest) by name » page 184
Destination entry by address » page 185
Online POI search » page 184
Search for a point along the route (only works with active route guidance)
» page 184
Destination input via the map point or using the GPS coordinates
» page 186
Search POI destination /
Fig. 222
Menu for the destination search
A
B
C
D
E
184
Infotainment
Fig. 223 List of destinations visited: in the navigation data / online
The feature allows a full text search of locations or points of interest (POI) by
entering keywords.
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main menu navigation, tap on the
function surface
→ Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface of one of the menu items for the destination
search
A
,
C
or
D
» Fig. 221 on page 184.
Function surfaces » Fig. 222 and » Fig. 223
Input line
Depending on the search mode, the following symbols are displayed
- Display the map as well as the list of the destinations listed in the navi-
gation database
- Display the map as well as the list of online destinations
- Select the destination search/destination entry » page 184
List of last destinations (if no character is entered) / List of visited destina-
tions
Keypad
Status of online services
Find destination
Enter the POI name or the POI category (POI) and, if required, the place and
street name or house number/postal code.
A list of the destinations found is displayed in area
D
» Fig. 222.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
or: Tap the
B
» Fig. 222 function surface.
A map with the following symbols and a list of the destinations found is dis-
played.
Destinations found in the navigation data » Fig. 223 - .
Destinations found online » Fig. 223 - .
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
Enter destination using the address
Fig. 224
Enter destination using the address: Main menu / List of visited
destinations
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main menu navigation, tap on the
function surface
→ Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface
B
» page 184
Enter destination
Enter the destination address and then confirm » Fig. 224 - .
Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
Relevant names (e.g. Place/street names) are offered in the entry line during
entry, depending on the context. The location of the proposed destination can
be displayed by tapping the function surface
Map
.
Depending on the number of places visited, a map with a list of visited places
can be displayed automatically » Fig. 224 - .
185
Navigation
The map with the list of visited locations can be accessed manually by tapping
the function surface .
Entering a destination via the map point and using GPS coordinates
Fig. 225
Enter destination: via the map point / using the GPS coordi-
nates
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main menu navigation, tap on the
function surface
→ Tap
Enter destination
Then tap the function surface
E
» Fig. 221 on page 184.
Enter destination via map point
By sliding the screen move the desired destination into the cross-hair
» Fig. 225 -
.
Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
Enter destination through GPS coordinates
Tap in the values of the GPS coordinates one at a time and adjust » Fig. 225 -
,
Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
If information is available about the point entered in the navigation data, then
these will be displayed instead of the GPS coordinates (e.g. address
A
» Fig. 225).
Entering a destination via the map point
Fig. 226
Menu after tapping the map
point
Tap on the map to display the symbol and a menu with the following menu
items (depending on the context) » Fig. 226.
Display the destination details » page 194
Display the POI details/display the POI list (function surface)
)
Start route guidance to the selected point
Paste the selected point as the next destination in the current route
guidance
Start route guidance to the favourite
Start route guidance to the home address
Destination search in the vicinity of the selected point » page 184
Define the starting point for demo mode (if it is turned on) » page 195
Find petrol station, restaurant or car park
Fig. 227
List of petrol stations visited: in the navigation data / online
A
B
C
186
Infotainment
Fig. 228 List of car parks visited: in the navigation data / online
The Infotainment allows you to find petrol stations, restaurants or car parks
quickly in the navigation data as well as online.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
.
The function surface of the desired category button.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
or
.
Search destination in the navigation data
Depending on the context below a list be examined POIs in the selected cate-
gory is displayed.
There is no route guidance - The nearest destinations in a radius of 200 km
from the current vehicle position are displayed.
There is a route guidance - Destinations on the route or near the route are
displayed.
Find Target online
When “Infotainment Online” » page 14 services are activated, a list of POIs
from the selected category in a radius around the current vehicle position is
displayed, regardless of whether or not route guidance is taking place.
After performing destination search, it is possible to switch between the list of
visited in the navigation data or online goals by one of the following functional
areas on the position
A
» Fig. 227 or. » Fig. 228 is tapped.
Displays the list of destinations visited in the navigation data.
Displays list of last destinations
Note
With activated function
Fuel options
Select preferred fuel station
function ac-
tivated, the preferred fuel stations are displayed in the first three positions
during the fuel station search.
Saved destinations
Last destinations
List of last destinations
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Last destinations
.
Details of the last destination (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
In the main Navigation menu, tap the

sensor field.
If route guide is disabled, then the details of the last destination are displayed
to where the route guidance was carried out. If route guidance is enabled,
Then the details of the final destinations are displayed.
Last destinations menu for destination / POI search
In the menu for finding destinations in
D
» page 184, a short list of the most
recent destinations is displayed.
Function surfaces in the list of last destinations
- Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed with
more than 5 entries available)
- Display the details of the selected destination » page 194
target memory
Fig. 229 Select list of stored destinations / categories of saved destina-
tions
Search
187
Navigation
List of stored destinations
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 229 and select one of the following catego-
ries of saved destinations
B
» Fig. 229.
All saved destinations
- Flagged destination (vehicle position at the time of storage)
- Stored destination (manually saved destination/destination impor-
ted in vCard format)
- Favourite (destination with additional favourite property)
Favourites (the favourite location is shown in the map by the symbol ).
Telephone contact addresses of the connected telephone or the inserted
SIM card.
Online destinations created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal” website or in the “ŠKODA Connect” application » page 190
Function surfaces in the list of stored destinations
- Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed if there
are several entries on the next page of the list)
- Display the destination details » page 194
Store target
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Last destinations
.
Tap the functional surface
Tap on the desired destination, the destination
details are displayed.
Tap on the function surface
Store
.
Rename the destination if necessary and confirm storage.
“Flagged destination” Save (current vehicle position)
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Store
Store cur-
rent position
.
By then pressing the function surface
Rename
the flagged destination can be
renamed and stored as a destination in the dest. memory.
By storing the next flagged destination, the last flagged destination will be
overwritten. To maintain the existing flag destination, this destination must be
stored in the Infotainment memory.
Save as a favourite / cancel
It is not possible to store a contact, a vCard or target image as a favourite.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the functional surface and select the desired list of destinations.
Search
Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface at the de-
sired destination.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Tap on the function surface
Favourite
.
Delete destination
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the functional surface and select the desired list of destinations.
Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface at the de-
sired destination.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
Home address
Define home address
When your home address is not entered, then proceed as follows.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Home address
.
Defining the home address using the current vehicle position or by entering
the address.
Change the home address
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Define home address
.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Edit the home address or set one up using the current vehicle position or by
entering the address.
Delete home address
In the
Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Home address
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
188
Infotainment
Import your own goals
Introduction to the subject
Fig. 230
MyDestination application on
the ŠKODA website
Fig. 231
Websites ŠKODA Connect
Your own destinations can be created using the ŠKODAapplication
“MyDestination”, in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” or
in the application “ŠKODA Connect”
By reading the QR code » Fig. 230 or after typing the following address in the
web browser, more information on the “MyDestination”application is dis-
played.
http://go.skoda.eu/my-destination
For the “ŠKODA Connect Portal” refer to the website of “ŠKODA Connect”.
This is carried out by reading the QR code » Fig. 231 or after entering the fol-
lowing address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
Goals in vCard format
In the Infotainment memory, a custom destination can be imported in the
vCard format (*.vcf) from an SD card or a USB source.
Import
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the own destination file.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Import destinations (SD/USB)
.
Select the source and confirm the import.
Route guidance
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Search for and select the desired imported destination.
Delete own destination
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the functional surface
Tap on the desired own destination.
In the destination details, tap the function surface
Edit
Delete
and confirm
the deletion.
In the application “MyDestination” created POI categories
Import / update
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the POI categories.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
Tap.
If there is already the same POI category name in the Infotainment memory,
then it will be overwritten during import.
Show POIs in the map
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Guidance to the POI
Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
There are details of the selected target appears » page 194.
189
Navigation
Clear all own POI categories
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” created POI categories
Your own POI categories created in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” can be imported into the Infotainment memory.
The requirement for importing a POI category is that “Infotainment Online”
» page 14 services are activated.
Import POI categories
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Update (online)
.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
.
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis-
played.
Tap the functional surface
POIs (online services)
Retrieve
.
Are new POI categories available, their number and the file size is displayed on
the Infotainment.
Tap the function surface
Start
to start route guidance.
To complete the import, tap the function surface
Next
and confirm the im-
port.
Show POIs in the map
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Route guidance to a destination of imported POI category
Tip on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
There are details of the selected target appears » page 194,
Clear all own POI categories
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
In user profile “ŠKODA Connect Portal” objectives created
The destinations you have created in the user profile on the website “ŠKODA
Connect Portal” or in the application “ŠKODA Connect” can be imported to the
Infotainment memory.
The requirement for importing the destinations is that “Infotainment Online”
» page 14 services are activated.
import goals
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
Tap on the function surface
Update
.
Are new targets available, then confirm the import.
If the user profile on the website “ŠKODA Connect Portal” or in the application
“ŠKODA Connect” creates an object and sent to the Infotainment, after
switching on the ignition in the Infotainment screen displays a message re-
garding a new destination with the option to import this displayed.
Guidance to an online destination
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
In the list of online dests to visit and select the desired destination.
Delete online destinations
to delete all Online destinations in the main menu navigation the function
surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Online destinations
.
To delete one online destination, go to the navigation main menu and tap on
function surface
Destinations
Edit
Delete
.
Image with GPS coordinates
Fig. 232
Image with GPS coordinates
190
Infotainment
Infotainment enables guidance to the GPScoordinate data stored in the image.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Images
.
Select the connected source and open the image with GPS coordinates.
Tap the function surface » Fig. 232 Surface in the image, a menu opens
with the option to start route guidance.
The image can be obtained from an external device in which GPS coordinates
are stored during the imaging process. This can be created and imported in
the“MyDestination” application » Fig. 230 on page 189.
Map
Map display options
Fig. 233
Map options
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
.
The following function surfaces are displayed » Fig. 233.
2D - Two-dimensional map display
3D - Three-dimensional map display
Display of the route from the current vehicle location to the destination
Presentation of the destination position or the next interim destination in
the map (depending on the menu item setting )
Advanced settings
Sta-
tus line:
)
Automatic map display in day or night mode (depending on the currently
active vehicle lighting)
Daytime map display
Night-time map display
A
B
C
Turns the auxiliary window on / off » page 184 (does not apply to vehicles
with Infotainment Amundsen when the map is displayed in the digital in-
strument cluster)
Switching on/ off of the selected POI categories display » page 186, Enter-
ing a destination via the map point
If the map scale of the 2D Map or 3D Map is greater than 10 km, then the map
is automatically displayed as 2D and aligned in the direction of north. If the
scale is increased beyond this value, then the map is switched back to the orig-
inal representation.
Map scale
Fig. 234
Function surfaces for
changing the map scale:
Infotainment Columbus
Fig. 235 Function surfaces for changing the map scale: Infotainment
Amundsen
It is possible to change the map scale manually or to turn on the automatic
change of scale.
Tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 234 or» Fig. 235.
D
E
191
Navigation
In area
B
» Fig. 234 or » Fig. 235, function surfaces for changing the map
scale are displayed.
Types of manual scale change
Touching the screen with two fingers and pulling them apart or closing them
together.
Turn the control knob (not applicable to Infotainment Columbus)
Tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 234 and use the slider or tap the function
surface / in area
B
» Fig. 234 (applies to Columbus Infotainment).
Turn on/off the automatic change of scale
If the automatic scale is active, the map scale will change automatically de-
pending on the type of roads travelled (motorway - smaller map scale / town
larger map scale) and from the manoeuvre to be carried out.
To switch on the automatic scale change, go to the Navigation main menu
and tap on function surface
.
Tap the functional surface
is highlighted in green.
The automatic scale is only active as long as the map is centred on the vehicle
position (the function surface
is hidden).
To switch off the automatic scale change, go to the Navigation main menu
and tap on function surface
.
Tap the functional surface
is highlighted in white.
The turning off occurs likewise when the map is moved or the map scale is
changed manually.
Map view in reduced scale
In the Navigation main menu, tap on function surface
A
.
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then restored.
Change map orientation
Fig. 236
Change the map orientation
Changing map orientation is possible under the following conditions.
The map is in the 2D display.
The map is centred (the functional surface
is hidden).
The map scale is max. 10 km away.
to Change the map orientation From the main menu navigation the func-
tional surface
A
» Fig. 236.
The map is oriented to the north
The symbol
the vehicle position rotates, the map and the Polar Star Symbol
do not rotate.
With a larger map scale than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented towards
north.
Map oriented to the direction of travel
The map and the Polar Star Symbol
rotate, the vehicle position symbol
does not rotate.
Map alignment
Fig. 237
Map alignment
192
Infotainment
The moved map can be centred/aligned to the vehicle, destination or route po-
sition.
To centre the map, tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 237.
Options for map display in the split screen
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus, without the digital instrument
cluster.
Fig. 238
Map in split screen
In the split screen, tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 238.
Depending on the context, some of the following function surfaces will be dis-
played in area
B
.
Map display with the route from the current vehicle location to the desti-
nation
Change the map orientation
2D - Two-dimensional map display
3D - Three-dimensional map display
Turn on/off the automatic change of scale
Map display options in the digital instrument cluster
Applies to vehicles with Infotainment Columbus, with the digital instrument
cluster.
The ignition must be switched on for map display in the digital instrument
cluster.
Only applies to Infotainment Columbus
The map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster and in Infotainment
at the same time.
The map type shown in the digital instrument cluster can be selected in
thenavigation menu item
Map
Map view in instrum. cluster:
.
The map scale can be adjusted with the dial
A
on the multifunction steering
wheel » page 40,
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen
The map can be displayed in the digital instrument cluster or infotainment
screen.
To change the display in the navigation main menu, tap function surface
B
» Fig. 218 on page 182.
The map type shown in the digital instrument cluster can be changed in
thenavigation main menu in the menu item
.
Changing the map scale can be carried out in one of the following ways.
With the function surfaces in Infotainment » page 191.
Turning the knob
.
With the dial
A
on the multifunctional steering wheel » page 40.
POIs display
The Infotainment system offers the possibility of displaying POI symbols on
the map on the Infotainment screen.
To activate/deactivate the display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
POIs
.
To select the POIs to be displayed, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
Map
Select categories for POIs
and select the de-
sired categories (max. 10).
Road sign display
Infotainment offers the option of displaying the traffic signs stored in the navi-
gation data or detected by the front camera during guidance on the Infotain-
ment screen
G
» Fig. 219 on page 183.
To switch on/off the road sign display in the main menu Navigation, tap the
function surface
Map
Show road signs
.
193
Navigation
For some vehicles it is possible to set an alert when exceeding the permitted
speed limit set by a road sign.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Driver assistance
Speed warning:
.
For trailer towing, we recommend that you activate detection of road signs
relevant to trailers.
Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface
Driver assistance
Show road signs relevant to trailers
.
Route guidance
Introduction to the subject
A routeis created by starting route guidance to a destination. Additional inter-
mediate destinations can be added to the route.
The route guidance takes place as follows
Through graphical driving instructions in the Infotainment display screen and
in the display of the instrument cluster.
With navigation announcements.
Infotainment tries to allow for continued guidance even if the navigation data
is incomplete or there is no data at all for the given area.
The route is recalculated each time if you ignore driving recommendations or
change the route.
CAUTION
The nav. announcements provided may vary from the actual situations, e.g. due
to out-of-date navigation data.
Destination details
Fig. 239 Details of the: in the navigation data / destination searched for
online
The following menu items and information are displayed in the destination de-
tails » Fig. 239.
Area with functional surfaces
Detailed destination information
Destination position in the map
Detailed target information (if available)
Status of online services
Display the destination details
The destination details can be displayed in one of the following ways.
While entering a destination.
By tapping the function surface
in the destination list.
By tapping the

sensor field in the Navigation main menu (not applicable
to Infotainment Columbus), the details of the last destination are displayed.
Functional surfaces
Using functional surfaces in the field
A
the following functions can be per-
formed, depending on the context.
Start / Stop route guidance.
Searching for a nearby destination » page 184.
Setting route options.
Store destination.
A
B
C
D
E
194
Infotainment
Edit destination (the object can be deleted, renamed or saved).
Dial the POI telephone number (if Infotainment is connected to a tele-
phone» page 164, Pairing and connecting).
Route calculation and start route guidance
Fig. 240
Alternative routes
Route calculation is done on the basis of the set route options. The route op-
tions can be set:
Route options
.
Alternative routes
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the following menu is displayed
after the calculation of a new route » Fig. 240.
Calculate the most economical route with shortest travelling time and
distance travelled – the route is highlighted green
Calculate the fastest route to the destination, even if a detour is neces-
sary - the route is highlighted in red
Calculate the shortest route to the destination, even if a longer travel-
ling time is required - the route is highlighted in orange
In the functional surfaces of the alternative routes, information on the route
length estimated travel time and the following symbols are displayed (applies
to the Infotainment Columbus).
Use of a toll motorway
Use of a train / ferry
Using a tunnel
Use of a toll road
Using a vignette duty road
It is possible to select an already calculated alternative route before the calcu-
lation of the remaining routes is completed.
A
B
C
Selecting the type of route will start the route guidance.
If no route selection is made within 30 s after the calculation of all routes, the
route guidance is automatically started according to the preferred route type.
Route calculation for the trailer
When driving with a trailer or any other accessory connected to the trailer
socket, we recommend that you switch on the trailer recognition, if necessary
to set the maximum speed for towing a trailer.
For calculating the route for towing a trailer, tap the functional surface in the
main navigation menu
Route options
.
To set the maximum speed for towing a trailer, tap the

sensor field and
then the function surface
Driver assistance
Trailer recognition
Maximum
speed for trailer
.
Demo mode
The Demo mode provides a travel simulation to the entered destination. The
function offers the chance to travel through the calculated route “virtually”.
When the Demo mode is turned on, a menu for route guidance in the Demo
mode or in normal operation is displayed before the start of route guidance.
To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
Demo mode
.
When the demoMode is switched on, the route starting point can be defined.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Tap→
Advanced set-
tings
Define demo mode starting point
.
Define the starting point by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
tion.
The demo mode starting point can also be set provided demo mode is turned
on by tapping on the desired map location and selecting the menu item
Start
Demo Mode
» page 186, Entering a destination via the map point.
195
Navigation
Graphical driving recommendations
Fig. 241 Driving recommendations / travel recommendation detail
The display of the graphical driving recommendations is carried out in the split
screen
Manoeuvre
as well as the display of the instrument cluster.
In the split screen
Manoeuvre
the following driving recommendations are shown
» Fig. 241.
Street name / street number of the current vehicle position
Driving recommendations with street names / road numbers, with the
route and the travel time to the manoeuvre place
Details of driving recommendation (is displayed near the manoeuvre)
Lane guidance
In the split screen
Manoeuvre
, Infotainment also announces TMC traffic obstruc-
tions and on motorways, car parks, petrol stations or restaurants.
Speed limits
With activated function
Advanced settings
Note:
National border crossed ,
display the country-specific speed limits when crossing international borders.
These speed limits can be displayed by tapping the function surface
Top
speed
in the main menu navigation.
Nav. announcements
Infotainment issues nav. announcements during route guidance.
The navigation announcements are generated by Infotainment. The flawless
clarity of the message (e.g., road or city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
A
B
C
D
The last navigation announcement can be repeated in the main Navigation
menu by tapping on the function surface .
The timing of the navigation message is dependent on the type of road and on
the driving speed.
The type of nav. announcements can be set:
Navigation announcements
.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Most common routes
The most frequently travelled routes are automatically saved by Infotainment.
Of these, up to 3 routes can be offered, which best match the current time,
day of the week as well as the vehicle position.
A route guidance to one of the most travelled routes can be started as long as
no route guidance takes place.
To display the menu with the most frequently travelled routes, tap on func-
tion surface
Freq. in the split screen routes
Show on map
.
Select the desired route.
Then a selected route is calculated and the route guidance starts.
The menu display in the split can be turned on/off in the main menu navigation
by tapping the function surface
Route options
Freq. Routes
.
The stored most frequent routes can be deleted in the main menu navigation
by tapping the functional surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Freq.
Routes
.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Finish route guidance
The route guidance can be finished in one of the following ways.
The final destination is reached.
In the main menu Navigation by tapping the functional surface
Stop route
guidance
.
196
Infotainment
By turning off the ignition for longer than 120 minutes.
Abort route guidance
If the ignition is switched off and on again, then the route guidance is contin-
ued depending on the stop time in one of the following ways.
Within 15 min. - route guidance is continued taking into account the calcula-
ted route.
From 15 min to 120 min - after confirming the message on the infotainment
screen, the route guidance continues, taking into account the calculated
route.
After 120 min - the route guidance is cancelled.
Route
Route schedule
Fig. 242 Route details: a route destination / several route destinations
During route guidance, the Route details (Information about the current route)
can be displayed.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Route details
.
A route destination
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the destina-
tion» Fig. 242 - .
Area with functional surfaces
Destination information
Estimated time of arrival at destination / remaining driving time to desti-
nation
A
B
Remaining distance to the destination
Chosen route type (economic, fastest, shortest)
Current vehicle position (address / GPS coordinates)
The display of the arrival time or the remaining driving time can be adjusted as
follows.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
Time display:
.
Several route destinations
In the route plan, the following information is displayed at the respective desti-
nations» Fig. 242 - .
Area with functional surfaces
Stopover (with sequential number)
Final destination
Estimated time of arrival at destination / stopover
Driving distance to destination / stopover
Substitution of destinations among themselves
Delete the destination
Continuation of the route guidance from the selected target (previous
waypoints are skipped)
Display the destination details » page 194
Insert destination into the route
In the area
A
, tap on the function surface
Enter destination
and enter a new
destination.
or: Tap on the area
A
the function surface
destinations
and select an object in
the list of stored destinations.
Each additional destination is added to the list as the first subsequent destina-
tion route.
Change positions of destinations with each other
The relevant function surface and move the destination to the desired po-
sition.
With destinations on the route already reached, the note
Destination reached
is
displayed below the destination name. It is not possible to change the position
of these destinations with each other.
C
D
A
197
Navigation
Store route
In the area
A
, tap the functional surface
Save
.
Save the edited route as a new route or replace the existing saved route.
The route is saved in the route list » page 198.
Stop route guidance
In the area
A
, tap the functional surface
Stop
.
Route change in the map
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
Fig. 243
Route change in the map / route transit point
A route in which there are no intermediate targets can be changed during
route guidance by inserting a transit point.
Add a transit point
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Change route in map
.
Touch the screen in the route field and move the cross-point to the desired
location on the map, e.g.
A
, move » Fig. 243).
The transit point
B
is added to the route » Fig. 243.
Tap the function surface  .
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts.
Customise transit point
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Change route in map
.
Touch the transit point
B
and move to a different location on the map.
Tap the function surface  .
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts.
Remove transit point
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Change route in map
.
Tap on function surface
Delete waypoint
.
Tap the function surface  .
Then a new route is calculated and route guidance starts.
route list
In the route list, it is possible to create routes, save, delete, or start navigation.
New route
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Routes
New route
.
Insert a route destination in one of the following ways.
Tap on the function surface
Enter destination
and enter a new destination.
or: Tap on the function surface
Destinations
and select a destination from the
list of stored destinations.
To save the created route, tap the functional surface
Store
.
Tap the functional surface
Start
to start route guidance.
route import
A prerequisite for importing the route is that “Infotainment Online” » page 14
services are activated.
A route that has been created in the user profile on the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal” website and sent to the Infotainment system can be imported into the
Infotainment memory even before switching on the ignition .
If the route was created when the ignition was switched on and sent to Info-
tainment, Infotainment is not imported until after switching off (for at least 15
minutes) and after switching the ignition back on again.
Switch on the ignition. When a new route is available, a message regarding
the option to import this route appears in the Infotainment screen automati-
cally .
If the user opts not to import the route immediately, the route can be impor-
ted later manually as follows.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Routes
Tap to
check if a new route is available.
or: Tap the

sensor field and then the function surface .
The function surface
import routes
Tap.
198
Infotainment
If a new route available, then a message is displayed on the Infotainment.
Tap the function surface
Retrieve
to start route guidance.
After being successfully imported, the route is displayed in the list of saved
routes.
Managing saved routes
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
routes
.
Choose the desired route, and then select one of the following functions.
Clear saved route
- Edit the route » page 197, Route schedule
- Calculate route and start route guidance » page 195, Route calculation
and start route guidance
Waypoint mode
Introduction to the subject
Only valid for Infotainment Columbus.
This mode is suitable for off-road navigation or for areas where maps are not
available.
Infotainment allows the recording of waypoint tours driven using automatic of
manually entered waypoints.
Then there is the option to start route guidance to the stored waypoint tour or
to save the waypoint tour on the SD card.
Main menu
Fig. 244
Waypoint mode: Main
menu
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Waypoint mode
.
Delete
Edit
Start
The main menu is displayed» Fig. 244.
Any ongoing route guidance is terminated after the selection of this way-
point mode menu.
Description of the function interfaces
A
» Fig. 244
Context-dependent:
No route guidance is taking place - Start recording a waypoint
tour/display saved waypoint tour management/exit menu
A waypoint tour is being recorded - Stop recording a waypoint
tour/manually adjust waypoint/exit menu
Route guidance is taking place - Stop route guidance/skip the next
waypoint/exit menu
Setting the map display / show / hide the split screen / switch on / off the
display of POIs on the map
Operation of
Radio
/
Media
playback
Setting Navigation is not available in theWaypoint mode menu
Record waypoints
Fig. 245
Recording a waypoint
tour
Start recording a waypoint tour
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Record
waypoint tour
.
Select one of the following recording types.
Select on map
- Enter destination on the map and start recording waypoints
Start recording
- Start recording waypoints without entering a destination
Recording a waypoint tour
After starting the recording of a waypoint tour, the following contextual infor-
mation may be displayed » Fig. 245.

199
Navigation
Automatically set waypoints
Manually set waypoints
Split screen
Waypoints
with the number of already set waypoints / maxi-
mum number of waypoints
Add waypoint manually
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Add way-
point manually
.
Stop recording
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Stop re-
cording
.
The recording also stops when the waypoint mode menu is exited.
The recorded waypoints are merged to a waypoint tour and stored in the way-
point memory after completion of the recording.
The recording cannot be continued once it has been stopped. A new recording
must be started.
Guide along a saved waypoint tour
Fig. 246 Display a waypoint / guide along a waypoint tour
Start guidance
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Waypoint
memory
.
Select the desired route from the displayed list.
Tap the function surface .
Select one of the following menus
A
» Fig. 246.
A
B
C
Reverse tour
- Reverse the order of waypoints (suitable for guiding along a
waypoint tour in the reverse direction)
Next. Waypoint.
- Skip to the next waypoint
Start
- starts route guidance
Route guidance
During the guidance along a waypoint tour, no nav. announcements are made
by Infotainment.
When driving along the waypoint tour shown, follow as closely as possible the
information shown on the Infotainment screen.
While driving along a waypoint tour, the split screen shows the
Waypoints
and
the direction to drive as well as the distance to the next waypoint, the se-
quence number of the next waypoint and the total number of waypoints
B
» Fig. 246.
The waypoint tour from the vehicle position to the next waypoint “reduces”
continuously while driving “ ”
C
» Fig. 246 .
If you drive past but very close to the next waypoint, the route guidance will
continue with the subsequent waypoint.
If you drive past a waypoint and this does “not disappear” from the waypoint
tour (e.g. because the distance to this waypoint is too large), then there is the
option to “skip” over this waypoint and continue the guidance to the next way-
point.
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Skip way-
point
.
Stop route guidance
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Stop route
guidance
.
The guidance also stops when waypoint mode is exited.
Manage waypoint tour memory
to display a list of saved and imported waypoint tours, from main menu
Waypoint mode, tap the function surface
Waypoint memory
.
The name of the waypoint tour, the date and time of storage and the number
of waypoints appears in the function surface for the waypoint tour.
200
Infotainment
Choose the desired waypoint tour, and then select one of the following menu
items.
Store the waypoint tour on the SD card
Delete the waypoint tour
Rename the waypoint tour
Display the waypoint tour » Fig. 246 on page 200
Import waypoint tour from the SD card
In the Waypoint mode main menu, tap on the function surface
Waypoint
memory
Import
.
Select the source of the waypoint tour recording and confirm the import.
Traffic reports
List of traffic reports
Fig. 247
List of traffic reports
The Infotainment system enables the reception of traffic reports, which in-
clude information regarding traffic congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message
Channel) or online (when “Infotainment Online”» page 14 services are activa-
ted).
ŠKODA AUTO does not accept responsibility for the availability, content, up-
to-dateness or evaluation of TMC traffic reports or other data provided by
third parties. ŠKODA AUTO is not entitled to examine or adapt this data in any
way. The data can only be edited by Infotainment in areas where it is available.
To display the list of traffic reports, tap on the

sensor field and then tap
the function surface .
In the list of traffic messages and the map, a max. of 6 messages are displayed,
that are provided with a letter and a traffic obstruction symbol (e.g. , , )
A
» Fig. 247.
At present on the route traffic information is taken by using a nav. announce-
ment.
Source of Traffic Information
On the position
C
» Fig. 247 can the following symbols are displayed.
TMC Traffic Information (with strikethrough icon, the Infotainment is out
of range of any traffic information provider)
Online traffic report
Display options
Route guidance is disabled - All traffic messages are displayed.
Route guidance is taking place - After tapping function surface
B
» Fig. 247
in the displayed menu, you can select all traffic messages by tapping the
function surface
All areas
, or you can select only the traffic messages present
on the route by tapping the function surface
Route
.
A traffic report may contain some of the following information.
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Number of roads affected
Name of the location in question
Description of the traffic obstruction
The importance of a traffic obstruction is distinguished in colour by a TMC
message
The symbol for traffic obstruction (e.g.
,
,
) precedes the obstruction and
the length of the obstruction is shown in the map on the right along the route.
Depending on the context, the symbol for the obstruction is displayed in one
of the following ways.
No route guidance is carried out
Red - All traffic obstructions
Route guidance takes place
Gray - The traffic obstruction is not on the route
Red - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will not be recalcula-
ted the route and the route passes through the traffic obstruction
Orange - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route is recalculated and
an alternative route is available

201
Navigation
Distinguish the importance of a TMC message traffic obstruction using
colour
The colour differentiation of traffic conditions on the provider of the online
traffic reports depends.
To change the map orientation, go to the Navigation main menu and tap on
function surface
Map
Traffic flow settings
.
Update
The list of traffic reports will be automatically updated by Infotainment on a
continuous basis.
Detail of the traffic report
Fig. 248
Detail of the traffic report
The details of the traffic message depends on the source of the traffic mes-
sage.
To display this, select the desired traffic report from the list of traffic re-
ports.
or: Tap on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
Depending on the context, the following information and functional surfaces
are displayed » Fig. 248.
Map of the affected location
Description of the traffic obstruction
Reception timing and information relating to the traffic report provider
(if “ŠKODA Connect” is the provider, it is an online traffic report)
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Length of the traffic obstruction
A
B
C
D
E
Dynamic route
Infotainment enables an evaluation of the traffic reports received during the
route guidance. In fulfilling the following conditions a bypass route is calcula-
ted, and the appropriate announcement is issued.
The dynamic route function is turned on.
The traffic congestion included in the traffic information is on the route.
The traffic obstruction will be evaluated by Infotainment as of great im-
portance.
To switch on/offin the main menu Navigation, tap on the function surface
Route options
Dynamic route
.
Entering/removing a traffic obstruction on the route manually
If a traffic obstruction is detected during route guidance (e.g. traffic jam), this
traffic obstruction be manually entered into the route.
After entering, Infotainment calculates and provides an alternative route.
Enter traffic obstruction
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Congestion ahead
.
Adjust the length of the traffic obstruction.
The traffic obstruction will be displayed in red in the map to the right along the
route.
Remove traffic obstruction
The traffic obstruction is removed from the route after completion of the
route guidance or can manually be removed as follows.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Delete "congestion
ahead"
.
202
Infotainment
vehicle systems
CAR - Vehicle settings
Introduction to the subject
In the menu CAR travel data and information displayed on the vehicle and
some vehicle systems can be set.
Reset to factory settings
You can reset to factory settings in the Infotainment system in menu

/
Factory settings
menu.
Note
Settings relating to the vehicle systems can only be made when the ignition is
switched on.
Main menu
Fig. 249
Function surfaces in the main
menu
Tap on the button/sensor field

/

to display the main menu with
the following function surfaces » Fig. 249.
Selecting the following menu points
Dig. Instrument panel
Sport
(applies to Infotainment Columbus, Amundsen)
Offroad
Convenience consumers
Driving data
DriveGreen
Vehicle status
Playback control - Radio / Media

Depending on the vehicle equipment with manual air conditioning: Set-
ting the auxiliary heating and ventilation / operating the heated wind-
screen
Operation of the steering wheel heating
Vehicle system settings
203
vehicle systems
Driving
Starting-off and Driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Introduction
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
The ignition must always be switched during the journey when the engine
is idling. Otherwise, the steering may lock - danger of an accident!
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 210, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock -
danger of an accident!
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
risk of theft, accident etc.!
Never run the engine in an enclosed space (e.g. in garages) - there is the
danger of poisoning and death!
CAUTION
Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
Do not push-start the engine – there is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter! The battery from another vehicle can be used as a push-
start aid.
On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is loca-
ted. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally
left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key!
Note
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. The engine will reach its oper-
ating temperature faster.
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Read and observe and on page 204 first.
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes it
more difficult for someone to attempt to steal or use your vehicle without au-
thorisation.
Immobilizer
The immobilizer allows the engine to be started only with the original car key.
Malfunction of the immobilizer
If the immobiliser in the key fails, it is not possible to start the engine. A mes-
sage appears in the display of the instrument cluster to explain that the immo-
biliser is active.
To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
Steering lock - lock
On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driv-
er's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off after-
wards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
locked.
Steering lock - unlock
On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
ignition. If this is not possible, move the steering wheel slightly back and
forth and thereby unlock the steering lock.
On vehicles with starter button, get into the car and close the driver's door.
Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only when
the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
WARNING
Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - there is a risk of acci-
dent!
204
Driving
Switching the ignition on/off
Fig. 250 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button
Read and observe and on page 204 first.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock» Fig. 250 -
Ignition switched off, engine switched off
Ignition switched on
Starting engine
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button
Press the » Fig. 250 -
button, the ignition is turned on / off.
On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de-
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting engine / Stopping
Read and observe and on page 204 first.
Before starting the engine
Switch on the parking brake.
For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
1
2
3
Starting engine
On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position
3
and the engine
starts» Fig. 250 on page 205 . Release the key, the engine will start auto-
matically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position
1
. Re-
peat the starting process after 30 seconds.
On vehicles with starter button, press the button briefly » Fig. 250 on
page 205 - , the motor will start automatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning lights up after the
ignition is switched on. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes
out.
Stopping the engine
Stop the vehicle.
On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position
1
» Fig. 250 on
page 205
.
On vehicles with starter button, press the button » Fig. 250 on page 205 -
, The engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P (this only applies to a few countries).
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey after the
engine has been running for a prolonged period at high loads. Leave it to run at
an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation of
heat when the engine is switched off.
Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
Keep the knob pressed » Fig. 250 on page 205 - or press it twice within 1
second.
After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
locked.
CAUTION
When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
ing must always be in P mode.
205
Starting-off and Driving
Note
The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start-
ing the cold engine.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may intermittently continue
to run for approx. 10 minutes (also continuously).
Problems with the engine start - vehicles with starter button
Fig. 251
Engine start - hold key on but-
ton
Read and observe and on page 204 first.
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a sys-
tem fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
Push the starter button and then hold the key with the back of it on the but-
ton » Fig. 251.
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required.
CAUTION
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running
out of charge or the signal fails.
START STOPsystem
Introduction
The START-STOPsystem (hereinafter referred to as the system) reduces
CO
2
emissions and harmful emissions, and saves fuel.
If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
or is at a standstill (e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it
again when moving off.
The system function depends on many factors. Some of them are down to the
driver, while others are systemic and can neither be influenced nor identified.
For this reason, the system may react differently in situations which seem
identical from the driver's perspective.
The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
(even when it has previously been manually deactivated with the button).
Note
If the engine has stopped due to the system, the ignition remains switched on.
functionality
Fig. 252
Display
Vehicles with manual transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
halt, the shift lever is moved into neutral and the clutch pedal is released.
The engine is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The engine is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
halt and the brake pedal is operated.
The engine is automatically started as soon as the accelerator pedal is de-
pressed or the brake pedal is released (with deactivated Auto Hold function).
206
Driving
Conditions for the system function
The following conditions must be met for the system to function correctly.
The driver's door is closed.
The driver has fastened the seat belt.
The driving speed was higher than 4 km/h after the last stop.
System status
The system status is shown in the display when the vehicle comes to a halt
» Fig. 252.
The engine is switched off automatically; when moving off, the ignition
process will be initiated automatically.
The engine is not switched off automatically.
When stopping, the engine will not switch off for the following reasons,
among others.
The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
The current consumption is too high.
High air conditioning or heating output (high blower speed, big difference
between the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine is shut down automatically and the system detects that the en-
gine is required, such as when the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly, then the
system automatically starts the engine.
More information about the current system status can be displayed in the In-
fotainment screen in menu

/
display Vehicle status
.
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will
have to be restarted manually.
No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shut-down
takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
angle.
Manually disable / enable system
Fig. 253
Button for the START-STOP sys-
tem
To deactivate/activate, press the
button » Fig. 253.
When the system is deactivated, the symbol
illuminates in the button.
If the system is deactivated, it will be reactivated automatically after the igni-
tion has been switched off and on.
Note
If the system is deactivated when the engine is turned off automatically, then
the automatic start process takes place.
207
Starting-off and Driving
Brakes and Parking
Introduction
The wear of the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions and driv-
ing style. Under difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving style) the condi-
tion of the brakes should also be checked by a specialist garage between the
service intervals.
The performance of the brakes can be delayed if the brakes are damp, iced up
in winter or if covered in a layer of salt. The brakes are cleaned and dried by
applying the brakes several times » .
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads occur if the vehicle
has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the
braking system. The brakes are cleaned by applying the brakes several times
» .
Before travelling a long distance with a steep gradient, reduce speed and
shift into the next lowest gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will
be used, reducing the load on the brakes. If you do have to brake, this should
be carried out at intervals.
Emergency braking display - when an emergency braking is performed, the
automatic flashing of the brake lights are used to alert the traffic behind.
New brake pads must first be “worn in” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
A too low brake fluid level can cause faults in the braking system, the warn-
ing light illuminates in the instrument cluster» page 42, Braking system. If
the warning light does not illuminate and an extended stopping distance is re-
quired, then driving should be adapted according to the unknown cause of
fault and restricted braking effect - seek the assistance of a specialist garage
immediately.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident!
During the braking procedure on a vehicle with manual transmission,
when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs, press the clutch pedal. Other-
wise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of acci-
dent!
Do not press the brake pedal if braking is now required. This causes the
brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking distance and ex-
cessive wear - risk of accident!
Braking for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs should be
carried out only if the traffic conditions permit. Do not place any other road
users in jeopardy.
Recommendations for new brake pads have to be observed.
When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be on, oth-
erwise the vehicle could move off - there is the risk of an accident!
If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
Otherwise, the functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of
accident!
Electric parking brake
Fig. 254
Parking brake button
208
Driving
Fig. 255 Parking brake operation
Read and observe on page 208 first.
The electric parking brake (hereinafter referred as a parking brake) replaces
the handbrake. This secures the vehicle when stopping and parking against un-
wanted movement.
The parking brake can be used when the ignition is on or off.
Switching on
Pull the button in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 255 and hold until the
symbol in the button and warning light
illuminating the instrument cluster.
Automatic shut-off
The parking brake switches off automatically when starting, as long as the
driver's door is closed and the driver has fastened the seat belt.
Should the vehicle start to roll away backwards when starting on an uphill
slope, step on the accelerator or switch on the parking brake.
Turning off the parking brake can be prevented if, before starting, the but-
ton is pulled and held in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 255. The parking brake
turns off after releasing the button.
Manual shut-down
With the ignition switched on, press the brake pedal and at the same time
push the button in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 255.
With the engine running, press either the brake or accelerator pedal and
press the button in the direction of arrow
2
.
The symbol in the button and the warning light in the instrument cluster
go out.
Emergency braking function
If, while driving, a fault occurs in the brake system, the parking brake can be
used as an emergency brake » .
Pull the button in the direction of arrow
1
and » Fig. 255 hold (you hear
an audible signal), the vehicle starts to brake strongly.
The braking process is interrupted when the key is released or the accelerator
pedal is actuated.
WARNING
The emergency brake is to be used only in an emergency when the vehi-
cle cannot be stopped with the brake pedal.
Do not place any objects in the recessed grip for the finger in front of the
parking brake key - the parking brake button could be blocked!
Note
If the vehicle battery is discharged, it is not possible to release the parking
brake. First connect the vehicle first to a power source, such as the battery of
another vehicle » page 296, Jump-starting and then turn off the parking brake.
Noise when switching on and off the parking brake is normal and therefore
harmless.
Auto Hold function
Fig. 256
The Auto-Hold function button
Read and observe on page 208 first.
The Auto Hold function (hereinafter referred to only as system) prevents the
vehicle from rolling unintentionally when stopped. It is, for example, not neces-
sary to secure the vehicle with the brake pedal or parking brake at traffic
lights.
209
Starting-off and Driving
For the activation, deactivation and correct functioning of the system, the
following basic conditions are required.
The driver's door is closed.
The engine is running (or has been switched off automatically by the
START-STOP system).
On vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever is not in mode
N (in this mode, the system is not available).
Stopping and starting
When stopping the system prevents the vehicle from rolling away. The warn-
ing light illuminates in the instrument cluster. The brake pedal can be re-
leased.
The vehicle's brakes are released at the moment of stating off. The warning
light
in the instrument cluster goes out.
Should the vehicle start to roll away backwards when starting on an uphill
slope, step on the accelerator or switch on the parking brake.
If the vehicle is secured by the system and the driver's door is opened or the
ignition is turned off, the vehicle is secured by the parking brake to prevent un-
wanted movement.
In this case, the indicator light turns off
in the instrument cluster and the
warning light
illuminates.
Activation/deactivation
The system is activated/deactivated by means of the
» Fig. 256 button.
When the system is activated, the symbol
illuminates in the button.
After switching off and switching on the ignition, the system remains either
activated or deactivated depending on the last setting.
WARNING
The increased stopping and starting comfort brought by the system must
not tempt you to take any safety risks.
The system is not able to stop the vehicle under all circumstances, such
as on icy or otherwise slippery ground, or on gradients.
When stopping and parking always make sure that the vehicle is correctly
secured » page 210, Parking.
CAUTION
In some washing systems it is necessary that the vehicle can roll freely. There-
fore, the system must be deactivated before driving through a car wash.
Note
The system is able to secure the vehicle for about 10 minutes, after which the
vehicle will be automatically secured by the parking brake.
Parking
Read and observe on page 208 first.
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order.
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
Switch on the parking brake.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission, engage 1st gear or reverse gear R.
Release the brake pedal.
If the parking brake is turned on while on a steep slope, the following message
may be displayed in the instrument cluster. Search for a car park with less of
an inclination.
WARNING
The exhaust system components can become very hot. Therefore, never
stop the vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come in-
to contact with flammable materials such as dry grass, undergrowth,
leaves, spilled fuel or such like. - Risk of fire and serious injury can occur!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who could, for example, lock
the vehicle or release the brake, unattended in the vehicle - risk of accident
and injury!
210
Driving
Manual gear changing and pedals
Introduction
CAUTION
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Manual gear changing
Fig. 257
The shift pattern
Read and observe on page 211 first.
The gearshift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown on the gear lev-
er » Fig. 257.
The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 51.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch.
Engage reverse gear
Stop the vehicle.
The clutch pedal is fully depressed.
Switch the gear lever to N.
Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into
R» Fig. 257.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gear shift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gear shift mech-
anism to wear excessively.
Pedals
Read and observe on page 211 first.
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
In the driver's footwell, only a footmat (supplied by the factory or from the
ŠKODA Original Accessories) which is secured on the respective attachment
points should be used.
WARNING
No objects should be located in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal
operation could be disabled - risk of accident!
Automatic transmission
Introduction
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective
of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
WARNING
Do not use the throttle if the forwards mode has been set using the se-
lector lever prior to starting up - risk of accident!
Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – risk of acci-
dent!
211
Starting-off and Driving
WARNING (Continued)
If the vehicle stalls, with engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic mode,
then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away using the brake ped-
al, or using the Auto Hold function. Even when the engine is idling, the pow-
er transmission is never interrupted - the vehicle creeps.
When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P .
Otherwise, the vehicle could start to move - risk of accident.
CAUTION
If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S
whilst driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Select selector lever position
Fig. 258
Selector lever settings / display
Read and observe and on page 211 first.
Move the selector lever to change to the following positions » Fig. 258. In
some positions you have to push the locking button » page 212, Selector lever
lock.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 258.
Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
Reverse gear - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a stand-
still and the engine is at idling speed.
Neutral (idle position) - the power transmission to the drive wheels is in-
terrupted.
P
R
N
Forward mode / sports programme - the gear change takes place in the
position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
(Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S
If the Sport driving mode is selected with the engine running » page 251, Se-
lect the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection) , the transmission is automati-
cally set in the S mode.
E – Economical driving mode
If the driving mode Eco or Individual (engine - Eco) » page 251 is selected and
the selection lever is in the setting D/S, the transmission is automatically set to
mode E. This mode cannot be selected with the selector lever.
The forwards mode is switched up or down automatically in mode E at lower
engine speeds than in mode D.
Selector lever lock
Fig. 259
Shift lock button
Read and observe and on page 211 first.
The selector lever is locked in mode P and N to prevent that the forward driv-
ing is selected accidentally, thereby setting the vehicle in motion.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light.
Release the gear selector lever from P mode or N
Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, push the lock button in the di-
rection of arrow
1
» Fig. 259.
To move the selector lever from mode N to D / S only the brake pedal is press-
ed.
D/S
212
Driving
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed.
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man-
ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 302.
Note
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver-
sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents that you accidentally select
mode R or N.
Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic)
Fig. 260
Selector lever/multi function steering wheel
Read and observe and on page 211 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears with the selector lev-
er or multifunction steering wheel.
Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right-
hand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained.
Switching to manual shifting by using the rocker switches under the
multifunction steering wheel
To change gear, pull one of the rocker switches
-
/
+
briefly towards the
steering wheel » Fig. 260.
To cancel manual shift, pull the rocker switch
+
towards the steering wheel
for more than 1 s.
If you do not pull one of the rocker switches
-
/
+
for a certain time, manual
shifting of the gears is deactivated automatically.
Changing gear
To shift up, tap the selector lever forwards
+
or pull the rocker switch
+
briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 260.
To shift down, tap the selector lever backwards
-
or pull the rocker switch
-
briefly towards the steering wheel » Fig. 260.
The currently selected gear is marked with the letter M in the instrument clus-
ter display.
The gear shift indicator should be observed when changing gear » page 51.
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
over revving.
Note
It may be beneficial, for example, when travelling downhill, to use manual shift-
ing of gears. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence
the wear of the brakes.
Start and run
Read and observe and on page 211 first.
Starting and temporarily pausing
Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
Start the engine.
Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position
» page 212.
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected if stopping for a
short time, such as at cross roads. However, you must apply the brake pedal in
order to prevent the vehicle from rolling away.
Accelerate to maximum speed during the journey (kickdown function)
The kickdown function is applied when the accelerator pedal is pressed down
in the forward mode.
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to reach the maximum acceleration.
213
Starting-off and Driving
When approaching maximum speed (launch control function)
The launch control function is available in mode S or Tiptronic.
Disable the TCS » page 217, Braking and stabilisation systems.
START STOP deactivate » page 207, Manually disable / enable system.
Fully depress and hold the brake pedal with your left foot.
Fully depress the accelerator pedal with your right foot.
Release the brake pedal - the vehicle is running at maximum acceleration.
Driving in neutral (“coasting”)
When releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle moves without the braking
effect of the engine.
Operating conditions
The selector lever is in the D/S position.
The driving mode Eco. Comfort. Normal or Personalised (Drive - Eco or
Normal) is selected » page 251, Select the driving mode (Driving Mode
Selection).
The vehicle speed is 20-130 km/h.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
In driving mode Comfort, Normal or Personalised (Drive - Normal), slowly re-
lease the accelerator pedal.
The gear is selected again automatically, when you depress the accelerator or
brake pedal or pull one of the rocker switches
-
/
+
towards the steering
wheel » page 213, Manual shifting of gears (Tiptronic).
WARNING
Rapid acceleration, particularly on slippery roads, can lead to loss of control
of the vehicle – risk of accident!
Running in the engine and economical driving
Running in the engine
During the first 1,500 km, the driving manner determines the quality of the
running in process on a new engine.
During the first 1,000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer.
In the area of 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres, the engine load can be increased up
to the maximum permitted engine speed.
Tips for economical driving
The fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road condition, weather
conditions and the like.
For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Observe the recommended gear » page 51.
Avoid full throttle and high speeds.
Reduce idling.
Avoid short distances.
Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained» page 285.
Avoid unnecessary ballast.
Remove the roof rack when it is not needed.
Only switch on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as they are
needed. In the Infotainment system, in menu

/
Fuel consumption:
,
it is possible to display up to three consumers that are currently making up
the largest share of fuel consumption.
Before switching on, ventilate the cooling system briefly and do not use the
cooling system with open windows.
Do not leave windows open at high speed.
DriveGreen function
Fig. 261
Display in Infotainment screen
The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as DriveGreen) evaluates the
driving efficiency based on the information respecting the driving style.
DriveGreen can be displayed in the Infotainment screen in menu

/
DriveGreen
.
214
Driving
A
driving liquid display
With the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking.
B
“Green leaf”
The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi-
cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com-
pletely hidden.
C
bar graph
The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar
shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left.
D
scoring (0 - 100)
The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When
you tap the function surface
D
, a detailed assessment showing the driving ef-
ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green).
E
the average fuel consumption from the start
When you tap the
E
function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the
bars are shown in dark green).
F
symbols
The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on
the current driving style.
Economical driving style
The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
Travelling is not fluid, this is to avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
Recommended gear
Tips for economical driving
Tap on the
B
leave to display tips for economical driving.
Note
Resetting the single-trip memory “Since start” also resets the average con-
sumption
E
and the driving assessment
D
as well as diagram
C
.

Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Driving Tips
Only drive on such roads and in such terrain that match the vehicle parameters
» page 313, Technical data as well as your driving skills.
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can handle
travelling in the given terrain.
When travelling off paved roads, we recommend activating Offroad mode
» page 219.
WARNING
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
CAUTION
Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. on parts of
the fuel system or the brake system).
Driving through water
Fig. 262
Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
The following must be observed to avoid damage to the vehicle when driving
through bodies of water (e.g. flooded roads).
215
Starting-off and Driving
Therefore determine the depth of the water before driving through bodies of
water. The water level must not reach above the lower edge of the lower
brace » Fig. 262.
Drive at a maximum speed of walking pace, otherwise a shaft may form in
front of the vehicle which could enable water to enter the vehicle system
(e.g. in the air induction system of the engine).
Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
CAUTION
Water entering the vehicle systems (e.g. the air induction system of the en-
gine) can cause serious damage to the vehicle!
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.
Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. An vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
ter.
Assist systems
General information
Introduction
WARNING
The assistance systems only serve to support the driver and do not re-
lieve the driver of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec-
tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks -
risk of accident!
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For
this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system
responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and
ready to intervene!
Only enable, disable or set the assistance systems when you have the car
fully under control, in every traffic situation - risk of accident!
Radar sensor
Fig. 263
Installation location of the radar
sensor
Read and observe on page 216 first.
The radar sensor (hereinafter referred to only sensor) uses electromagnetic
waves to capture the traffic situation ahead of the vehicle. The radar is located
under a cover » Fig. 263.
The sensor is part of the ACC » page 244 and Front Assist » page 249systems.
216
Driving
The sensor function may be impaired in the event of one of the following sit-
uations arising.
The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow and the like).
The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights and the like(.
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
In exceptional cases, the sensor may be covered in the area beneath the cov-
er, e.g. due to snow.
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message to that effect
from the ACC system » page 248, Malfunctions or Front Assist » page 251, Mal-
functions system appears in the instrument cluster display.
WARNING
If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system
and Front Assist system» page 246, » page 251. Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect
the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can
lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accident!
CAUTION
Remove snow with a brush and ice with a solvent-free de-icer from the sensor
cover.
Braking and stabilisation systems
Introduction
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
The error display is in Chapter » page 41, Warning lights.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Stability Control (ESC)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle
starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the direction.
During an ECS intervention, the warning light flashes in the instrument clus-
ter.
ESC Sport
Fig. 264
ESC Sport / ASR system button
Read and observe on page 217 first.
ESC Sport allows for a sportier driving style. With ESC Sport switched on, in
the event of light oversteer or understeer of the vehicle, no ESC interventions
take place and the ASR is so limited that the drive wheels can spin.
Activation
Press and hold down the » Fig. 264 button.
or:
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
ESC system:
ESC Sport
.
With activation the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and an
appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Deactivation
Press the » Fig. 264 button.
or: In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
ESC system:
Activated
.
With deactivation the warning light extinguishes in the instrument cluster
and an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
217
Assist systems
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thus helping the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
An ABS intervention can be noticed through pulsating movements of the
brake pedal and distinct noises.
When the ABS system is active, do not brake periodically or reduce the pres-
sure on the brake pedal.
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
The MSR prevents the blocking tendency of the drive wheels when shifting
down or with an abrupt deceleration (e.g. on icy or otherwise slippery road
surfaces).
If the drive wheels lock, the engine speed is automatically increased. This re-
duces the braking effect of the engine, and the wheels can rotate freely again.
Traction control (ASR)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
The ASR prevents spinning of the drive wheels. TCS reduces the drive power
transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thus, for example,
driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier.
During a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument clus-
ter.
Deactivation
Press the » Fig. 264 on page 217 button.
or: In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
ESC system:
ASR off
.
With deactivation the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and
an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activation
Press the » Fig. 264 on page 217 button.
or: In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
ESC system:
Activated
.
With activation the warning light extinguishes in the instrument cluster and
an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
When driving with snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
When it is necessary to “rock” a car free when it has become stuck.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDS)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes the spinning wheel, if necessary, and transmits the driving force to the
other driving wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the
brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down, there is
an automatic re-activation of EDL.
XDS+ is an extension to the electronic differential lock (EDL). The XDS+ re-
sponds to the release of pressure on the wheels during fast cornering by
means of a braking intervention on the wheel on the inside of the corner on
the driven axle. By decelerating the individual wheels, this prevents the vehicle
from over-steering or understeering. This has a positive effect on the driving
stability and steerability of the vehicle.
Active steering assist (DSR)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
In critical situations, the DSR provides the driver with a steering recommenda-
tion in order to stabilise the vehicle. DSR is activated, for example, on the right
and left vehicle side when braking sharply on different road surfaces.
218
Driving
Brake Assist (HBA)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
The HBA increases the braking effect and helps to reduce the braking dis-
tance.
The HBA is activated by very quick operation of the brake pedal. In order to
achieve the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be ap-
plied firmly until the vehicle has come to a standstill.
The HBA function is automatically deactivated when the brake pedal is re-
leased.
Hill Start Assist
Read and observe
on page 217 first.
When driving on slopes, Hill Start Assist (hereinafter referred to simply as the
system) allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill on its own.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the
brake pedal.
The system is active as of a 5% slope, if the driver door is closed. The system is
only ever active on slopes when starting off in forward or reverse.
Multicollision brake (MCB)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking
interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent
crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi-
tions are met.
There was a front, side and rear-end collision of a certain severity.
The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h.
The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function-
al after impact.
The accelerator pedal is not actuated.
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA)
Read and observe on page 217 first.
The TSA helps the combination stable in situations where the trailer sways and
then the whole trailer combination.
TSA brakes the individual wheels of the towing vehicle in order to damp the
rocking motion of the entire vehicle combination.
The following conditions are required for the correct TSA function.
The trailer was shipped from the factory or purchased from the ŠKODA
genuine accessories.
The trailer is electrically connected to the towing vehicle via the trailer
socket.
The parking aid is activated.
The speed is greater than 60 km/h.
Further information » page 262, Towing device and trailer.
Offroadmode
Introduction
Offroad mode includes functions that help to overcome routes that are diffi-
cult to navigate when travelling on non-paved roads.
But even with offroad mode activated, your vehicle is never a true SUV.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
CAUTION
Offroad mode is not designed for use on common roads.
All four wheels must be fitted with the same tyres approved by
ŠKODA AUTO to ensure Offroad mode operates correctly.
219
Assist systems
Function
Fig. 265 Offroad button / Infotainment screen: Display with automatic
activation
Read and observe
and on page 219 first.
Offroad mode intervenes at a speed up to 30 km/h.
We recommend that you activate the Offroad mode for every trip on non-
paved roads.
To activate/deactivate press the button » Fig. 265 - .
During activation the warning light for Offroad mode
in the instrument
cluster and for the Hill Descent Assistant
illuminate, In the Infotainment
screen display, the Offroad mode indication is displayed » Fig. 265 -
.
The following functions are integrated into Offroad mode.
Hill descent assistant » page 220
ESC Offroad » page 221
ASR Offroad » page 221
EDS Offroad » page 221
ABS Offroad » page 221
Note
If the engine is “stalled” while travelling in Offroad mode, you should check af-
ter engine re-start to see if Offroad mode is still enabled. It may need to be
activated again.
Hill Descent Assist
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
The hill descent assistant (hereinafter referred to as assist system), with its au-
tomatic braking action on all wheels, ensures a constant speed is maintained
on a steep slope when driving forwards and reversing.
During an intervention, the white warning light in the instrument cluster
lights up.
The assist system is automatically engaged under the following conditions.
The engine is running.
Offroad mode is activated.
The slope is at least 10 %.
Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is pressed.
Assistant off / on in Infotainment
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
tap on function surface
.
The state of the assist system is indicated by the colour of the functional sur-
face
in the infotainment screen.
Function
surface
Colour Meaning
grey
Assist system is not active (Offroad mode is not
enabled)
White Assist system off (with Offroad mode enabled)
Orange
Assist system is ready to intervene (with Offroad
mode enabled)
Driving speed
Initiate the downhill descent at a reasonable speed of approx. 2 - 30 km/h, the
assist system constantly maintains this speed as you travel downhill.
If a forwards or reverse gear is engaged on vehicles with a manual transmis-
sion, the speed must be high enough to avoid “stalling the engine”.
The driving speed can be changed by pressing the brake or accelerator pedal.
Engagement of the assist system is resumed after the pedal is released.
220
Driving
WARNING
For the correct operation of the assistant the road surface must be suffi-
ciently adherent. The assistant cannot properly fulfil its function on slushy
soil due to physical reasons (e.g. ice or mud). - there is a risk of an accident!
ESC Offroad
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
ESC Offroad makes driving on dirt roads easier, as no ESC interventions occur
when the vehicle is slightly over or under steered.
ASR Offroad
Read and observe
and on page 219 first.
TCS Offroad makes starting and driving on an unpaved surface easier as it par-
tially allows wheel-spin.
Note
When disabled, TCS » page 218 Offroad mode works without the support of
TCS Offroad.
EDS Offroad
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
EDS Offroad supports the driver when driving on a surface with different grip
under the drive wheels or when driving over bumps.
A spinning wheel or wheels are braked earlier and with more force than with
the intervention of the standard EDS system.
ABS Offroad
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
ABS Offroad supports the driver when braking on an unpaved surface (e.g.
gravel, snow etc.).
The system generated by a controlled locking of the wheels braked wheel be-
fore a “wedge” of piled material, which shortens the braking distance.
Maximum system efficiency is achieved when the front wheels are in the
straight ahead position.
Offroad in Infotainment
Fig. 266
Offroad Infotainment display
Read and observe and on page 219 first.
The display of Offroad mode in Infotainment is used to evaluate the current
driving situation.
To display in the Infotainment menu

/
Tap on the function surface →
Offroad
.
A swipe of the finger vertically across the screen allows three of the following
displays
A
to be shown » Fig. 266.
Compass (applies to the Amundsen and Columbus Infotainment)
Altimeter (applies to the Amundsen and Columbus Infotainment)
Steering angle display
Coolant temperature display
Oil temperature display
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
Introduction
The parking aid (hereinafter referred to as system) uses acoustic signals or the
Infotainment screen when manoeuvring around obstacles in the vicinity of the
vehicle.
221
Assist systems
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Moving persons or objects may not be recognized by the system sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be detected by the system sen-
sors.
Before reversing, make sure that there are is not any small obstacle, such
as a rock, thin post etc., in front of or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles
may not be recognised by the system sensors.
CAUTION
Keep the system sensors » Fig. 267 on page 222 clean, snow-and ice-free
and do not cover with any objects of any kind, otherwise the system function-
ing may be impaired.
Under adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “incorrect recogni-
tion of obstacle”.
Accessories fitted to the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers, can impair the
system function.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
Park-
ing and manoeuvring
.
ParkPilot - Settings for the parking aid
Activate automatically
- Activate/deactivate the compact parking aid display
(when driving forward)
Front volume
- Adjust the volume of the beeps for obstacle detection in front
Front tone setting
- Setting the pitch of the beeps for obstacle detection in
front
Rear volume
- Set the volume level of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Rear tone setting
- Setting the pitch of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Entertainment fading while parking
– Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) with activated parking aid
Manoeuvre braking
- Activation / deactivation of the automatic emergency
braking
Operation
Fig. 267 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehi-
cle: front / rear
Fig. 268
Sampled areas and range of the
sensors
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 267.
222
Driving
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions are possible
» Fig. 268.
Variant 1: warns of obstacles in areas
C
,
D
.
Variant 2: warns of obstacles in areas
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
.
Variant 3: warns of obstacles in the areas
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
,
E
.
Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
Area » Fig. 268
Variant 1
(4 sensors)
Variant 2
(8 sensors)
Variant 3
(12 sensors)
A
- 120 120
B
- 60 90
C
160 160 160
D
60 60 90
E
- - 90
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound -
Danger area.
The acoustic signals can be set in Infotainment» page 222.
Towing a trailer
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only the areas
A
and
B
» Fig. 268 are active in the system.
Note
If with Version 3 vehicles not all fields around the vehicle silhouette are ac-
tive after activation the vehicle should be moved forwards or backwards.
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
The setting of the acoustic signals is stored (depending on the Infotainment
type) in the active user account personalisation » page 59.
Display in Infotainment screen
Fig. 269
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 269
A
Road display.
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
play.
Switching audible parking signals on/off.
Disable / enable the automatic emergency braking.
Change to rear-view camera display .
There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle
is less than 30 cm). Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great-
er than 30 cm).
An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta-
cle is greater than 30 cm).
System failure (there is no indication of obstacles).
Road display
The road display
A
» Fig. 269 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
road display is at the front.
223
Assist systems
Activation / deactivation
Fig. 270
System key (option 2, 3)
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
Activation
The system is activated by engaging the reverse gear, and also by pressing the
button with vehicles with the versions 2 and 3 or
» Fig. 270.
An alarm sounds during activation and the symbol
or
lights up in the but-
ton.
Deactivation
On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of
reverse gear.
In the case of vehicles with the versions 2 and 3, the system is deactivated by
pressing the button
or
automatically at a speed above 15 km/h (the sym-
bol
or
goes out in the button).
Fault display
Vehicles with Variant 1
After system activation an acoustic signal sounds for approx. 3 seconds
(there is no obstacle near the vehicle).
Vehicles with the Variants 2 and 3
After system activation, the symbol and
flashes in the button.
In the display of the instrument cluster a message about an error of the Park-
Pilot system appears (at the same time there is an audible signal).
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
The system can be activated with the key or only at a speed below 15
km/h.
Automatic system activation when moving forward
Fig. 271
Infotainment screen: Display
with automatic activation
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be-
low 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of Infotainment display
» Fig. 271.
Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
50 cm.
The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in Infotainment
» page 222.
Note
The setting (activate / deactivate) of the automatic display is stored (depend-
ing on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation
» page 59.
Automatic emergency braking
Read and observe and on page 222 first.
If the system detects a collision risk when travelling forwards or reversing at a
speed up to 10 km/h, there is an automatic emergency braking to reduce the
impact consequences.
Disable / Enable
The brake function can be enabled / disabled in the Infotainment in the menu
Parking and manoeuvring
» page 222.
224
Driving
After switching the ignition on and off, the systems remains activated / deacti-
vated depending on the setting prior to switching off the ignition.
The brake function can also be deactivated once with the function surface
» Fig. 269 on page 223.
CAUTION
Automatic emergency braking will only work if the system is engaged by en-
gaging reverse gear or pressing the button for instance has been activa-
ted.
Rear traffic alert and wizard for “Blind spot”Monitoring
Introduction
Fig. 272
Installation location of the radar
sensors
The Rear Traffic Alert and Wizard for “blind spot” monitoring works based on
the information from the radar sensors in the rear bumper » Fig. 272. The radar
sensors are not visible from the outside.
Rear Traffic Alert
The Rear Traffic Alert (hereinafter referred to as system) warns when leaving a
parking space from a transverse parking space about any approaching vehi-
cles.
If necessary, the system tries to avoid a collision with automatic braking, or at
least to mitigate the consequences.
Wizard for “blind spot”monitoring
The wizard for“blind spot monitoring” (hereafter referred to as system) draws
attention to vehicles travelling in the same direction in the next lane in the so-
called blind spots.
The “blind spot” is an area that is not easily visible in a rear-view mirror or even
directly from the vehicle.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
WARNING
In the case of a collision or damage to the rear of the vehicle, the function
of the systems may be affected - risk of accident! Have the vehicle
checked by a specialist garage.
Do not cover the sensor area - the function of the systems could be limi-
ted.
Remove snow, ice and such obstacles from the sensor environment im-
mediately.
WARNING
The wizard for “blind spot”monitoring is limited by physical and system-re-
lated limits. Therefore, in the following situations the system can be de-
layed in drawing attention (or not at all) to a vehicle in the next land.
When a vehicle is approaching at a very high speed.
When passing through a very sharp curve or a roundabout.
CAUTION
If a trailer or other accessory is to be connected to the trailer socket, then
the two systems are not available.
In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
temperatures, etc.), the system function may be limited - “failure to recognise
a vehicle”.
Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
can impair the system function.
225
Assist systems
Rear Traffic Alert- Operation
Fig. 273 Infotainment screen: warning indicator / driving situation
Read and observe and on page 225 first.
With the ignition switched on, the area next to and behind the vehicle is moni-
tored by the radar sensors of the system. If an approaching vehicle is detected
from the rear of the vehicle » Fig. 273, the system warns of this fact.
Warning - vehicles with parking aid
You will hear a continuous tone and one of the following warning levels ap-
pears on the Infotainment screen » Fig. 273.
An oncoming vehicle is detected. Do not continue driving backwards and
check around the vehicle.
A vehicle in the collision region is detected. Do not continue driving back-
wards .
Warning - vehicles without parking sensors
An acoustic signal is sounded and information for the driver to observe the
traffic behind is shown in the instrument cluster.
Automatic emergency braking
If the driver does not react to the warning and the system detects an impend-
ing collision, then this can trigger an automatic braking at a speed up to 10
km/h. A corresponding message is shown in the information cluster display.
A
B
Wizard for “Blind Spot”Monitoring - Operation
Read and observe and on page 225 first.
At a speed over 15 km/h, the area alongside and behind the vehicle is moni-
tored by the system. At the same time, the distance and the difference in
speed between your vehicle and the other vehicles in the monitored area can
be measured.
When driving, the sensors monitor an area to the left and right to the extent of
a normal lane width.
If a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot” area, the system indicates this vehi-
cle by the indicator light
in the exterior mirror.
System limitation
The system is unable to recognise the specific lane width by means of sensors.
Therefore this can e.g. in the following cases respond to a vehicle in a further
lane.
When driving on a road with narrow lanes or on the lane edge.
Driving around a bend.
The system may also respond to objects on the roadside such as crash barri-
ers, noise barriers or similar objects.
Wizard for “Blind Spot”Monitoring - driving situations and warnings
Fig. 274
Driving situation / indicator light in the left outside mirror indi-
cates the driving situation
226
Driving
Fig. 275 Driving situation / indicator light in the right outside mirror in-
dicates the driving situation
Read and observe and on page 225 first.
In the following situations, the indicator light in the outside mirror indicates a
vehicle in the “blind spot”.
Your vehicle
B
is being overtaken by vehicle
A
» Fig. 274.
Your vehicle
C
is overtaking vehicle
D
at a speed of max. 10 km high-
er» Fig. 275. If the speed during the overtaking is even higher, then there is
no warning by the warning light.
The warning display is always in the exterior mirror on the side of the vehicle
where a vehicle is detected in the “blind spot”.
The greater the speed difference between the two vehicles, the earlier the
warning (by means of the warning light) regarding the vehicle that is overtak-
ing you takes place.
Two warning levels
light up - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot”.
flash - a vehicle has been detected in the “blind spot” and the turn signal is
switched on.
An advanced warning for vehicles with Lane Assist
flash also if the steering wheel is turned in the direction of the vehicle in
the “blind spot” . Therefore the Lane Assist » page 254 must be enabled and
the boundary line between the vehicles detected.
If in this case your vehicle indicates crossing the boundary line, with a short vi-
bration of the steering wheel.
Note
The brightness of the indicator light is dependent on the setting of the vehi-
cle lighting. With the low or high beam on the brightness of the light will be
lower.
Activation / deactivation
Read and observe and on page 225 first.
The activation or deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of the
following ways.
In the instrument cluster display » page 57,
Assist systems
menu item.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
Driver assistance
(applies to
the wizard for “blind spot” monitoring).
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
Parking and manoeuvring
(Ap-
plies to Rear Traffic Alerts).
After switching off and switching on the ignition, depending on the setting pri-
or to switching off the ignition, the systems remains activated / deactivated.
Note
When activating the wizard for “blind spot” monitoring, the warning lights
illuminate briefly in the two exterior mirrors.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 225 first.
If the systems are not available, an appropriate message appears in the display
of the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
view appears. Clean or remove the obstructing object from the sensor envi-
ronment » Fig. 272 on page 225.
Systems unavailable
If the systems are unavailable, a message regarding unavailability appears. Stop
the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the systems are still
not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
227
Assist systems
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe-
cialist garage.
Rear View Camera
Introduction
The rear view camera (following as system) helps the driver when parking and
manoeuvring by displaying the area behind the vehicle in the Infotainment
screen (hereinafter only referred to as screen).
There are four modes available for different situations during the park and ma-
noeuvring action. The mode change is carried out using the function surfaces
on the screen » page 229.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The system displays auxiliary boxes and lines regardless of the current ve-
hicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking that there is no
obstacle in the selected parking space and that the vehicle can safely park
in this space.
The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func-
tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For informa-
tion on cleaning » page 270.
CAUTION
The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the
screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehi-
cles.
Some items, such as thin posts, chain link fences, grilles or uneven road sur-
faces may not be properly displayed in terms of screen resolution.
In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
rage.
Note
The camera is equipped with a cleaning system. The spraying is carried out au-
tomatically when the rear window is sprayed.
Function
Fig. 276 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the
vehicle
Read and observe
and on page 228 first.
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the grip of the boot
lid » Fig. 276.
Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 276
Detection range of the camera
Area outside the detection range of the camera
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol-
lowing basic conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
The system is activated.
The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
A
B
228
Driving
Activation/deactivation
Fig. 277
Button for activation / deactiva-
tion
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
Activation
The system is activated by selecting reverse gear or pressing the symbol
button» Fig. 277.
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol
illuminates in the button.
The mode for traverse parking is displayed on the screen.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated when you press button
, switch off the ignition,
put the selector lever in position P, or when you drive forwards at a speed of
more than 15 km/h (the
symbol in the button goes out).
Functional surfaces
Fig. 278
Functional surfaces
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
It is possible to adjust the parking and manoeuvring mode by means of the
function surfaces.
Function surfaces » Fig. 278
Turns off the display of the area behind the vehicle
Mode - traverse parking
Mode - parallel parking
Mode - driving up to a trailer / distance monitoring
Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle (wide view)
Screen settings - brightness, contrast, colour
Parking aid (thumbnail display)
Switch thumbnail display on/off
Switch to full screen display
Orientation lines and lane
Fig. 279
Orientation and lane lines
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
In the modes for transverse and parallel parking guidance, orientation lines for
the assessment of distance and lane lines are displayed on the screen.
Screen display » Fig. 279
The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
The distance is about 100 cm.
The distance is about 200 cm.
The lane lines terminate approximately 300 cm behind the vehicle.
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
road inclination.
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
width including mirrors.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
A
B
C
D
229
Assist systems
Lane
The lane lines
D
» Fig. 279 change depending on the steering angle and indi-
cate the roadway on which the vehicle would take with the current steering
wheel position.
CAUTION
The objects shown on the screen can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Mode - traverse parking
Fig. 280 Screen display
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is
transverse to the road.
Parking manoeuvre
Select a suitable parking space.
Press the » Fig. 277 on page 229 button.
At the selected parking space
1
» Fig. 280 slowly drive past and stop the ve-
hicle.
Engage reverse gear.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the lane lines lead into the parking space
2
.
Carefully move backward and steer so that the yellow lines are still leading
into the parking space.
At the latest when the red line of the back of the parking space (for example,
curb)
3
is touched, stop the vehicle.
Mode - parallel parking
Fig. 281
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
This mode supports the driver when reverse parking in a parking space that is
parallel to the road.
Parking manoeuvre
When driving past a parking space push the button
» Fig. 277 on
page 229.
Tap the function surface
C
» Fig. 278 on page 229.
The screen shows auxiliary boxes for both road sides.
Switch on the indicator for the side on which you want to park.
The auxiliary boxes for the opposite side will be hidden.
Stop the vehicle stop so that there are no obstructions in the gap between
the auxiliary boxes
1
» Fig. 281 and the rear box does not extend over the
side of the parking space
2
(e.g. kerb).
Turn the steering wheel in the direction recommended
3
until the colour of
the trapezoidal frame
4
is green. Hold the steering wheel in this position.
Once the arrow
5
appears on the screen, reverse (when reversing in the
parking space the arrow will get shorter).
The screen shows the yellow lane lines
6
and the green line
7
.
If the steering angle is corrected while reversing then the red line
8
appears
(required roadway alignment).
230
Driving
In this case, adjust the steering wheel so that the yellow lines
6
the red line
8
fade into each other.
Carefully reverse until appears on the screen or the green line
7
is con-
gruent with the lateral boundary of the parking space (e.g. kerb)
2
.
Stop the vehicle and steer opposite until the yellow lines
6
the red line
8
fade into each other (required roadway alignment). Hold the steering wheel
in this position.
Orientation lines are displayed » Fig. 279 on page 229 on the screen.
Carefully move backwards.
Stop the vehicle when appears on the screen, or at a safe distance from
the obstacle situated behind the vehicle.
Note
The guidance in the parking space is cancelled due to the system when the
steering wheel is set for a period of time against the required road direction.
The parking is to be started again.
Mode - driving up to a trailer / distance monitoring
Fig. 282
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown at the top of the screen.
Vehicles with towing hitch
If your vehicle is factory fitted with a tow-bar, this mode supports the driver
when the vehicle approaches a trailer draw bar.
Screen display » Fig. 282
Ball head of the towing device
Lines for the distance estimation (at a distance of about 10 cm)
A
B
Line for approaching a trailer draw bar
Trailer draw bar
The line
C
moves depending on the steering angle and indicate the roadway
on which the vehicle would take with the current steering wheel position.
Vehicles without towing hitch
If your vehicle is not factory equipped with a towing hitch, a red line for moni-
toring the distance to obstacles is displayed on the screen at a distance of 40
cm behind the vehicle.
Mode - monitor the area behind the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 228 first.
In this mode, the area behind the vehicle is shown on the screen.
The mode is suited for the entire view of the situation behind the vehicle.
Area View (AreaView)
Introduction
The area view (below only system) helps the driver when parking and manoeu-
vring by displaying the area around the vehicle on Infotainment screen (below
only screen).
The area around the vehicle is detected by four cameras » Fig. 283 on
page 232.
The system operates in cooperation with the parking aid system. Both systems
are displayed simultaneously on the screen.
For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is also to be read carefully
and the safety notes are to be observed.
C
D
231
Assist systems
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, General information.
The system displays auxiliary boxes and lines regardless of the current ve-
hicle environment. The driver is responsible for checking that there is no
obstacle in the selected parking space and that the vehicle can safely park
in this space.
The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func-
tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of an accident. For infor-
mation on cleaning » page 270.
CAUTION
The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the
screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to following vehi-
cles.
Objects that are located directly beside the corners of the vehicle may be
outside the field of view of the cameras and may therefore not be displayed on
the screen.
Some items, such as thin posts, chain link fences, grilles or uneven road sur-
faces may not be properly displayed in terms of screen resolution.
In a vehicle damaged in the area of one of the cameras, the respective cam-
era can possibly deviate from the correct position. If this is the case, have the
sensor checked by a specialist garage.
CAUTION
The objects shown on the screen can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Operating principle
Fig. 283
Installation locations of cameras for area detection
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
The cameras for detecting the area around the vehicle are below the front
ŠKODA logos, in both exterior mirrors and in the handle of the boot lid
» Fig. 283.
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the
following basic conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
The system is activated.
The driver's door and the luggage compartment lid are fully closed.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
The areas covered by the cameras are clearly visible on the screen.
The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
232
Driving
Activation / deactivation
Fig. 284
Button for activation / deactiva-
tion
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
Activation
The system is activated by pressing the button
» Fig. 284 or by engaging the
reverse gear.
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol
illuminates in the button.
When activated by pressing the button, the overall view » Fig. 285 on
page 233 -
- is displayed on the screen.
When activated by engaging the reverse gear, the view of the rear camera to-
gether with the thumbnail display of the overall view » Fig. 285 on page 233 -
- is displayed.
Deactivation
The system is deactivated by pressing
The button, by switching off the igni-
tion, by setting the selector lever to P mode, or by moving forward at a speed
of over 15 km/h (the symbol
goes out in the button).
Views and function surfaces
Fig. 285 Overall view / view of the rear camera with thumbnail display
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
The system displays the single view of a camera image or the overall view of all
the camera images at once.
The selection of the respective camera image is performed by touching the
screen in the area next to, in front of or behind the vehicle silhouette
» Fig. 285. The selected area is highlighted on the screen by a yellow framing
» Fig. 285 -
.
Function surfaces » Fig. 285
3D views
Top view
View obliquely from above
View from the side
Change to overall view
Swiping in the arrow directions on the screen, the viewing angle can be
changed to the 3D views of the area around the vehicle.
To exit area view on the display
Display modes
Screen settings - brightness, contrast, colour
Thumbnail display of the overall view (toggle to overall view by touching
the vehicle silhouette on the screen)
Switch thumbnail display on/off
1
2
3
4
5
233
Assist systems
CAUTION
The overall view is for orientation only » Fig. 285. Further views of the individu-
al cameras are for a better overview of the area around the vehicle.
View of the rear camera
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
The rear camera view is identical to the rear-view camera system » page 228.
View of the front camera
Fig. 286
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
View mode of front camera » Fig. 286
Traverse parking
The area in front of the vehicle is displayed along with orientation lines
» page 229, Orientation lines and lane
Monitoring of the area in front of the vehicle » Fig. 286
The area in front of the vehicle is marked by the blue orientation lines
Top view
The red line marks the distance of about 40 cm from the vehicle
A
B
C
View of the side cameras
Fig. 287
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 232 first.
View mode of the side cameras » Fig. 287
Left side
Right side:
Left and right side
The yellow lines are shown at a distance of about 40 cm from the vehicle.
Park Assist
Introduction
Park Assist (following referred to system) helps drivers park in suitable parallel
and perpendicular parking places or also to manoeuvre out of parallel parking
spaces.
The system takes over the steering movements only when parking or leaving a
parking space. The driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and
the shift / selector lever.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as parking operation.
The Park Assist is an extension of the parking aid » page 221 and operates on
the basis of data collected by the ultrasonic sensors.
For this reason, the chapter on the parking aid is to be read carefully and
the safety notes are to be observed.
A
B
C
234
Driving
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the steering wheel – risk of injury!
During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road. It is therefore recommen-
ded that you do not use the system in such situations.
CAUTION
The correct evaluation of the parking space and the parking procedure de-
pends on the circumference of the wheels on the vehicle.
The system only works correctly if the vehicle is fitted with the wheel size
approved by ŠKODA AUTO.
Do not use the system if snow chains or an emergency wheel are fitted.
If wheels other than those approved by ŠKODA AUTO are fitted, the result-
ing position of the vehicle in the parking space can differ slightly. This can be
avoided by readjusting the system at a specialist garage.
CAUTION
If other vehicles are parked behind or on the curb, the system can drive your
vehicle over the kerb or up to the kerb - there is a risk of damage to the
wheels. Intervene in time if necessary.
Note
We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km/h.
The parking procedure can be stopped at any time by pressing the
» Fig. 288 on page 235 button or by a steering intervention.
Operation
Fig. 288
System button
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.
While the parking space search is going on, a measurement and evaluation of
the parking space size is completed.
The display of the instrument cluster (hereinafter only display) shows suita-
ble parking spaces and a parking mode is recommended.
The display shows instructions and information before the start and during
the parking.
Based on the calculated road surface, the front wheels will be automatically
rotated during the parking.
Conditions for the system function
The system can look for a parking space only if the following basic conditions
are met.
The system is activated.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 40 km/h.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 20 km/h.
The distance to a number of parked vehicles is approximately 0.5 - 1.5 m.
TCS is activated » page 218.
The system can only carry out the parking procedure if the following basic
conditions are met.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 7 km/h.
The parking procedure takes less than 6 minutes.
There is no driver intervention in the automatic steering operation.
TCS is activated » page 218.
235
Assist systems
The TCS does not engage.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
Activation/deactivation
The system can be activated/deactivated by pressing the button» Fig. 288.
When the system is activated, the symbol illuminates in the button.
Parking space search
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
The system searches for a parking space in a number of parallel and transverse
parked vehicles on the passenger or driver's side.
Process with the parking space search
Slowly drive past a row of parked vehicles.
Activate the system with the
button» Fig. 288 on page 235.
The system will automatically search for a parking space on the passenger
side.
If the system finds a parking space, the recommended parking mode is dis-
played » Fig. 290 on page 237
or » Fig. 291 on page 237 -
.
Activate the turn signal on the driver's side if you wish to look for a parking
space on this side of the road. The display changes and the system searches
for a parking space on the driver's side.
Note
If the symbol (km / h) is shown in the display while you are looking for a
parking space, the vehicle speed should be reduced below 40 km / hr (parallel
parking) or below 20 km / hr (Transverse parking).
Switch to park mode
Fig. 289 Menus with the parking modes: Display
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
While the parking space search is going on and before the start of the parking,
a menu may appear showing other suitable parking modes.
Parking modes » Fig. 289
To park backwards in a parallel parking space
To park backwards in a traverse parking space
To park forwards in a traverse parking space
The parking mode can be changed by pressing the
» Fig. 288 on page 235
button.
After switching through all parking modes offered, an additional press of the
button deactivates the system.
If you want to return to the originally recommended parking mode, press the
button again.
236
Driving
Parking
Fig. 290 To park in a parallel parking space: Display
Fig. 291
To park in a traverse parking space: Display
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
The system supports the driver when reverse parking in the parking space
found in a number of traverse and parallel parked vehicles.
Display view » Fig. 290 or » Fig. 291
Parking space recognised with the information to drive on
Parking space recognised with the information to reverse
Note to drive on to the parking space
Note to reverse to the parking space
Process for reverse parking
The parking space found is shown in the display » Fig. 290 - or » Fig. 291 -
.
Continue driving forwards until appears in the display.
Stop and ensure that the vehicle does not continue to move forward until the
parking procedure starts.
Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
As soon as the following message is shown in the display:
Steering int. active. Be
mindful of your surroundings
, let go of the steering wheel and the steering is tak-
en over by the system.
Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
If necessary, the parking procedure can be continued with further steps.
When the arrow in the display flashes - , then the 1. Engage gear or put the
selector lever in D / S position.
The display shows the icon (brake pedal).
Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol
goes out.
Carefully drive forwards.
If the backwards arrow is flashing in the display -
, select reverse gear again
or move the selector lever into position R.
The display shows the
icon (brake pedal).
Depress the brake pedal and wait until the steering wheel automatically ro-
tates into the required position, the symbol
goes out.
Carefully move backwards.
You can repeat these steps several times in succession.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
following message appears in the display.
237
Assist systems
Parking forwards
Fig. 292
To park forwards in a traverse parking space: Display
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
The system supports the driver when parking forward in the parking space
found in a number parallel parked vehicles.
As soon as the system finds a parking space, select the
» Fig. 288 on
page 235 button for forwards parking mode » Fig. 289 on page 236 -
. The
display shows the following » Fig. 292.
The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
following message appears in the display.
The system is activated by pressing the
button and this is also possible if the
vehicle has already been partially moved to a suitable parking space.
Departing from a parallel parking space
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
The system supports the driver when leaving a parking space of a parallel
parking space.
Leaving a parking space process
Press the
» Fig. 288 on page 235 button.
The following message is displayed:
Please indicate and engage reverse gear.
Activate the turn signal for side of the vehicle where the parking space is out
of which you wish to manoeuvre.
Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
The further procedure is analogous to that for reverse parking.
Follow the system instructions shown in the display.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete, an audible signal sounds and the
following message appears in the display.
If the parking space is too small, it is not possible to use the system to leave
the parking space. A corresponding message is shown in the information clus-
ter display.
Automatic brake assist
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
Automatic brake assist when speeding
If a velocity of 7 km / h is exceeded during the parking manoeuvre for the first
time, the speed will be automatically reduced by the system to less than 7 km /
h. This prevents the parking manoeuvre from aborting.
Automatic emergency braking
If the system detects a risk of collision during parking, automatic emergency
braking takes place to prevent a collision.
The parking is terminated by the emergency braking.
CAUTION
The automatic emergency braking is not triggered by the system when the
parking process stops due to the speed of 7 km / hr being exceeded!
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 235 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
System unavailable
If the system is not available because the vehicle has a fault, a message ap-
pears concerning the unavailability. Seek help from a specialist garage.
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe-
cialist garage.
238
Driving
Trailer manoeuvring assistant (Trailer Assist)
Introduction
The trailer manoeuvring assistant (below only system) helps the driver when
reversing with a trailer.
When manoeuvring, the system only undertakes the steering movement. The
driver operates the brake, accelerator or clutch pedal and the shift / selector
lever.
The state in which the steering wheel is operated by the system, is referred to
as parking operation.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The system is not oriented to the area around the vehicle, there is no ob-
stacle detection.
During manoeuvring, always observe the movement of the trailer and if
necessary cancel the manoeuvring autonomously to prevent accidents or
damage to the vehicle and the trailer.
During the parking process, the system automatically performs rapid
steering movements. While it is doing so, do not place your hands between
the steering wheel – risk of injury!
During a parking manoeuvre on loose or slippery surfaces (gravel, snow,
ice, etc.) you may stray from the calculated road. Therefore, use the system
with extreme caution in such situations.
CAUTION
The trailer position is evaluated by the rear camera based on the bending an-
gle of the drawbar and the steering movement carried out by the system. For
this reason, the drawbar must not be obstructed by external influences.
The rear camera lens must not be contaminated, otherwise the system may
be unavailable or the system function my be significantly impaired.
Note
We recommend performing the parking at a safe speed to about 5 km/h.
The parking process can be terminated at any time by pressing the button
» Fig. 293 on page 239 or by a steering intervention.
The correct system function can only be ensured if a one- or two-axle trailer
is hitched without steered axle.
Operating principle
Fig. 293
System button
Read and observe and on page 239 first.
The trailer position is detected by the system based on the information of the
rear camera. Trailer is steered in the direction set by the driver using steering
wheel movements.
Conditions for the system function
The engine is running.
The system is activated.
The parking aid is activated.
The driver's door and the boot lid are fully closed.
The trailer is plugged into the trailer socket.
The trailer is not veering too much.
Determining the drawbar length
The system must know the drawbar length in order that the driver is offered
the maximum possible setting angle with respect to the target position of the
trailer.
The system needs some turning manoeuvres or cornering with a hitched trailer
in order to determine the drawbar length.
239
Assist systems
The manoeuvring dimensions are shown in the display
5
» Fig. 294 on
page 240.
Activation / deactivation
Read and observe and on page 239 first.
The system is activated by engaging reverse gear and pressing » Fig. 293 on
page 239.
When the system is activated, the symbol lights up in the button.
The system is deactivated by pressing the button (the symbol in the but-
ton is no longer illuminated).
Manoeuvring trailer
Fig. 294
Instrument cluster display: Trailer manoeuvring
Read and observe and on page 239 first.
Trailer manoeuvring
Select reverse gear or move the selector lever into position R.
Ensure that the vehicle/trailer combination is at a standstill.
Release the steering wheel and press the button
.
The steering is taken over by the system.
The symbol of the control button for the exterior mirror is shown in the display
» Fig. 294 - .
Tilt the adjusting knob for the exterior mirror » page 84, Exterior mirrors to
left or right according to the required direction of travel of trailer.
The display shows the silhouette of the vehicle rear with trailer in top view
» Fig. 294 - .
The actual position of the trailer is indicated by the silhouette
2
.
The target position of the trailer is indicated by the contour
3
.
Tilt the knob for the adjusting exterior mirror to adjust the trailer contour
3
to the target position.
Observe the direct vicinity of the vehicle and reverse carefully.
The set angle of articulation can be further corrected while reversing by tilting
the adjusting knob for the side mirrors.
Stop the vehicle/trailer combination in the required position.
If a forward gear is engaged or the D / S mode set, the system is deactivated.
To align the vehicle/trailer combination (trailer and vehicle in a line), tilt the ad-
justing knob for the exterior mirror in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 294. The
trailer contour
3
pivots to the position
4
.
Carefully reverse and drive forwards until the desired position of the vehicle
combination is achieved.
Note
The outer mirror surfaces cannot be adjusted while the system is active.
Automatic brake intervention
Read and observe and on page 239 first.
The systems is deactivated and an automatic braking intervention takes place
in the following situations.
If, during the manoeuvring,
the button is pressed, the driver's door is
opened or the steering wheel is gripped.
If the angle between the vehicle and trailer is assessed by the system as too
large during the manoeuvring procedure.
If a specific speed is assessed by the system as too high during the manoeu-
vring procedure due to the current angle between the vehicle and trailer and
the driver does not react to the warning braking intervention.
240
Driving
Cruise Control System
Introduction
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal. The state where the CCS maintains the speed is
referred to hereinafter as the control.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-
ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is
continued.
Function
Fig. 295
Instrument cluster display: Examples of status displays the
CCS
Read and observe on page 241 first.
CCS status displays » Fig. 295
Speed is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed
limits is shown in grey).
Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are high-
lighted).
No speed set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for start of control
The CCS is activated.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is en-
gaged.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the D/S
position or in the Tiptronic position.
The current speed is greater than approx. 20 km/h.
This is only possible within the range which is permitted by the power output
and braking power of the engine.
WARNING
If the engine power and engine braking effect is insufficient in order to
maintain the set speed, the acceleration and brake pedals must be taken
over!
operation description
Fig. 296
Cruise control system controls
Read and observe on page 241 first.
Overview of the control elements of the CCS » Fig. 296
A
 Activate CCS (regulation deactivated)
 Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
 Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ Increase speed
C
 Launch control / reduce speed
D
Display assistance systems menu - possibility to switch between
GRA and speed limiter
a)
If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
241
Assist systems
After the start of the regulation, the CCS regulates the vehicle to the current
speed and the warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
The automatic control interruption occurs if any of the following conditions
are met.
The brake pedal is operated.
When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
Through an airbag deployment.
WARNING
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being switched on unintentionally.
The control does not resume if the set speed for the existing traffic con-
ditions is too high.
Note
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
Speed limiter
Introduction
The Speed Limiter limits the maximum driving speed to the set speed limit.
The speed limit can only be exceeded by depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
The condition in which the Speed Limiter prevents a potential set speed limit
excess is referred to as Regulation.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Function
Fig. 297 Instrument cluster display: Examples of Speed Limiter status
displays
Read and observe
on page 242 first.
Speed limiter status displays » Fig. 297
Speed limit is set, control is inactive (in the colour display the digits of
speed limits is shown in grey).
Control active (in the colour display the digits of the speed limits are high-
lighted).
No speed limit set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for start of control
The Speed Limiter is activated.
The current speed is greater than approx. 30 km/h.
After starting the system, the current speed is set as the speed limit, the warn-
ing light lights up in the instrument cluster.
Exceeding the speed limit during the regulation
If, during the control, it is necessary to exceed the speed limit (e.g. to over-
take), the accelerator pedal must be pressed fully.
When exceeding the speed limit (e.g. driving down a hill), an acoustic signal
sounds and the warning light flashes in the instrument cluster.
The regulation is resumed once the speed has fallen below the set limit.
242
Driving
Operation description - variant without GRA
Fig. 298
Operating elements of the
speed limiter
Read and observe on page 242 first.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 298
A
 Activate speed limiters
 Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
 Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit )
B
 Take control again
a)
/ increase speed limit - press (in increments
of 1 km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C
 Start control/ reduce speed limit - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
a)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
Operation description - variant with GRA
Fig. 299
Operating elements of the speed limiter: Lever / multifunction
steering wheel
Read and observe on page 242 first.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 299
A
 Activate CCS (required condition for the subsequent activation of
the speed limiter)
 Interrupt control (spring-tensioned position)
 Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit )
B
 Take control again
a)
/ increase speed limit - press (in increments of
1 km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C
 Start control/ reduce speed limit - press (in increments of 1 km/h),
hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
D
/
E
Display assistance systems menu - possibility to switch between
GRA and speed limiter
a)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
Activate speed limiters
Put switch
A
in position

» Fig. 299.
Press button
D
or
E
.
In the instrument cluster select the menu item
Speed limited
.
Operating Instructions - Variant with ACC
Fig. 300
Operating elements of the speed limiter
Read and observe on page 242 first.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 300
1
 Activate ACC (required condition for the subsequent activation
of the speed limiter)
243
Assist systems
2
 Resume control
a)
/ increase speed limit by 1 km/h at a time
(sprung position)
3
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
4
 Disable speed Limiter (delete set limit )
5
 Increase speed limit by 10 km/h at a time
6
 Decrease speed limit by 10 km/h at a time
A
 Start control / reduce speed limit in increments of 1 km/h
a)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
Activate speed limiters
Put the ACC operating lever in position  » Fig. 300.
Press the button
E
» Fig. 299 on page 243.
In the instrument cluster select the menu item
Speed limited
.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Introduction
The Adaptive Cruise Control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the set
speed and at the same time the distance to the vehicle ahead without the ac-
celerator or brake pedal being pressed.
The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by
a radar sensor » page 216.
The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described
as control from here on.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The driver must always be ready to take over the operation of the accel-
erator and brake pedal.
The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as
traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light.
The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehi-
cle's foot brake.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions.
When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to
avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed.
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road).
Driving in “sharp” corners or in steep gradients / on steep inclines.
When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal build-
ings, railway tracks, etc.) can be found.
When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-
capacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.).
Note
The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways.
The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by
means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au-
tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates.
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con-
nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable.
The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive
assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is
exceeded.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe on page 244 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
Driv-
er assistance
.
ACC (adaptive cruise control) - Setting for the ACC
Driving progr.:
- Adjustment of vehicle acceleration when ACC is activated
(this setting is made for vehicles with driving mode selection » page 251)
Last distance selected
- Last selected distance level on/off
Distance:
- Set the distance to the vehicles ahead
244
Driving
Operation
Fig. 301 Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC displays
Fig. 302
Instrument cluster display: Examples of ACC status displays
Read and observe on page 244 first.
The ACC makes it possible to set a speed of 30-160 or 30-210 km/h (depend-
ing on equipment fitted) as well as the distance to preceding vehicles.
The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 150 m ahead using the radar
sensor.
ACC displays » Fig. 301
Vehicle detected (control active)
Line showing the displacement of the distance when setting » page 247,
Setting the distance
Set distance to the vehicle ahead
Vehicle detected (control deactivated)
1
2
3
4
Status conditions of the ACC » Fig. 302
Regulation is inactive (in the colour display the digits of speed limits is
shown in grey).
Regulation active - no vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of
the speed limits are highlighted).
Regulation deactivated - no speed stored.
Regulation active - vehicle detected (in the colour display the digits of the
speed limits are highlighted).
Note to reduce speed
If the delay of the ACC is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, the
warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the display shows a
message to engage the brake pedal.
Regulation according to the vehicle in the adjacent lane
During regulation your vehicle may be regulated according to the vehicle in the
adjacent lane.
This could occur at speeds above about 80 km/h when your vehicle is moving
faster than the vehicle in the adjacent lane on the driver's side. The display
shows the detected vehicle is in the adjacent lane.
Note
Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden
by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears
for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC.
Automatic stopping and starting
Read and observe on page 244 first.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a standstill and
start moving again using the ACC.
Decelerate to a standstill
If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill, the ACC will also decelerate your
vehicle to a standstill.
Starting to drive again after a holding period
As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period, your
vehicle will also move and the speed will continue to be regulated.
245
Assist systems
If the preceding vehicle starts moving again after a long break, then to contin-
ue the regulation press the accelerator pedal or lever to set the lever in 
position » page 246.
summary of operations
Fig. 303
Operating lever
Read and observe on page 244 first.
Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever » Fig. 303
1
 Activate ACC (regulation deactivated)
2
 Start control (resume) / increase speed by 1 km/h at a time
(sprung position)
3
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
4
 Deactivate ACC
5
 Increase speed by 10 km/h at a time
6
 Decrease speed by 10 km/h at a time
A
 Set proximity level
B
 Start control / reduce speed in increments of 1 km/h
If the lever is set from the position  directly into the sprung position 
the current speed is stored and the control process is started.
Start control
Read and observe on page 244 first.
Basic requirements for start of control
The ACC is activated.
On vehicles with manual transmission, the second gear or a higher gear is
selected and the current speed is greater than 30 km/h.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the D/S
position or in the Tiptronic position.
Start control
Press the button  » Fig. 303 on page 246 .
or: Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 303 on page 246 .
The ACC takes the current driving speed and performs the control, the warn-
ing light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
If the control is started by moving the lever to the position

and should
the speed be stored already, the ACC adopts this speed and executes control.
Note
If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h on vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission, the speed of 30 km/h is stored. The speed increases auto-
matically to 30 km/h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
Stop/resume control
Read and observe on page 244 first.
Stop control
Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 303 on page 246 .
or: Apply the brake.
Control stops, the speed remains stored.
Resume control
Start control » page 246, Start control.
Note
Control is also stopped when the clutch pedal is held down for longer than 30
s or the TCS is deactivated.
246
Driving
Set/change the desired speed
Read and observe on page 244 first.
The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 303 on
page 246.
Setting/changing the speed by increments of 10 km/h at a time () - re-
quirements
The ACC is activated.
Increasing/reducing the speed by increments of 1 km/h at a time (/
- requirements
The ACC is activated.
Vehicle control takes place.
Changing the speed by adopting the current speed (

) - requirements
The ACC is activated.
The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored.
Note
If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is
temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically
resumed.
If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stop-
ped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 246.
If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then 
the current speed is stored by pressing the button again  and the speed is
reduced in increments of 1 km/h.
Setting the distance
Read and observe on page 244 first.
The ACC allows you to set five distance steps to the preceding vehicle.
The distance is adjustable in a range of 1 to 3.6 s.
Adjusting the distance in the Infotainment system
In Infotainment in the ACC the
Distance:
menu item and set the distance
» page 244, Settings in Infotainment.
Adjust the distance with the lever
Set the switch  Adjust in the spring-tensioned position or
» Fig. 303 on page 246.
The display of the instrument cluster shows line
2
» Fig. 301 on page 245,
which indicates the proximity.
Using the switch  on the lever, adjust the line
2
to the desired dis-
tance.
Note
If the distance is changed in the Infotainment, the change will only come into
effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC.
The distance setting is stored (depending on Infotainment model) in active
user account personalisation » page 59.
Special driving situations
Fig. 304
Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
247
Assist systems
Fig. 305 Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary vehicles
Read and observe on page 244 first.
The following (and similar) situations require special attention and possibly the
intervention of the driver (braking, accelerating etc.).
When cornering
When driving into or driving out of long corners, it could be that a vehicle is
travelling in the adjacent lane and is scanned by the radar » Fig. 304 -
. The
host vehicle is then controlled according to this vehicle.
Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
A narrow or offset vehicle driving can only be recognized by the ACC if this is
located in the scanning range of the radar » Fig. 304 -
.
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small distance » Fig. 305 - may not
be detected by ACC in good time.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the
ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle,
» Fig. 305 - the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle.
Vehicles with special load or special body parts
Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back
or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC.
Overtaking and towing
Read and observe on page 244 first.
When overtaking
When your vehicle is being controlled at a speed that is lower than the set
speed and the turn signal is operated, ACC assesses this situation as meaning
that the driver wishes to overtake. The ACC automatically accelerates the ve-
hicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle changes to the overtaking lane and no vehicle is detected
ahead, ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it con-
stant.
Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or
pressing the button

on the lever » Fig. 303 on page 246.
Towing a trailer
When towing, or if another accessory is connected to the trailer socket, ACC
control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should therefore be
adapted to this limitation.
Malfunctions
Read and observe on page 244 first.
If ACC is not available, the warning light
appears in the display of the instru-
ment cluster and an appropriate message is shown.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the
instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 263 on page 216.
If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov-
er could be the reason. The ACC is functional again after the snow melts away
from the sensor.
ACC not available
If the ACC is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If ACC continues
to be unavailable, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
248
Driving
ACC fault
With an ACC fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.
Front Assist
Introduction
The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as the system) warns you of the dan-
ger of a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and
tries to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying
the brakes where necessary.
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor» page 216.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The system function is restricted for about 30 s after starting.
The system does not respond vehicles that are crossing or oncoming.
CAUTION
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
tap on function surface
Driv-
er assistance
.
Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) - Set the assistant for distance
monitoring to the vehicles ahead
Active
- Activate/deactivate the assistant
Advance warning
- Activate/deactivate and set the distance level at which a
warning occurs
Display distance warning
- Activate/deactivate distance warnings
Operation
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.
Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
Warns you of an impending collision.
Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, an automatic braking ac-
tion is performed.
The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
The system is activated.
TCS is activated » page 218.
The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.
Note
The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 217.
Distance warning
Fig. 306
Instrument cluster display: Distance warning
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is fallen short of, the warning light ap-
pears in the display » Fig. 306.
Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows
you to do so!
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed.
The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h.
249
Assist systems
Warning and automatic braking
Fig. 307
Instrument cluster display: Advance warning or
emergency braking at low speed
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
Emergency braking at low speed
If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 50
km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
With automatic braking, the warning light appears in the display
» Fig. 307.
Advance warning
If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light appears on the dis-
play
» Fig. 307 and an audible signal is emitted.
The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations.
If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle in a speed range of ap-
proximately 30 km/h to 210 km/h.
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle in a speed range of ap-
proximately 30 km/h to 80 km/h.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is
to be avoided!
Immediate warning and automatic braking - a moving obstacle
If the driver does not react to the advance warning when in danger of a colli-
sion with a moving obstacle, the system briefly applies the brake automatically
via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a
collision again.
If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to auto-
matically brake the vehicle.
Automatic braking - a stationary obstacle
If the driver does not respond to the advance warning of the risk of a collision
with a stationary obstacle in a speed range of approximately 30 km/h to 60
km/h, the system initiates automatic braking.
Information on automatic braking
If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by means of a steering intervention.
Brake assist
If the driver brakes inadequate with an impending collision, the system auto-
matically increases braking force.
The braking assistance only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly
pressed down.
Pedestrian recognition
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
The pedestrian recognition can help to prevent accidents with crossing pedes-
trians or to mitigate the consequences of an accident.
The system warns of an imminent collision, prepares the vehicle for an emer-
gency braking, supports during braking or performs an automatic braking.
Emergency braking at low speed
If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to
30 km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
With automatic braking, the warning light appears in the display » Fig. 307
on page 250.
Advance warning and automatic braking
If the system detects a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of 30 km / h to
65 km / h, the warning light appears on the display » Fig. 307 on page 250
and an audible signal is emitted.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is
to be avoided!
250
Driving
If the driver does not respond to the advance warning, the system begins to
automatically brake the vehicle.
Disable/enable
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
In the instrument cluster display, in the
Assist systems
menu item.
In Infotainment, in the Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) menu, in
the
Active
» page 249, Settings in Infotainment menu item.
The system is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » .
WARNING
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety
reasons.
When the vehicle is being towed away.
When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench.
If an unfounded warning or a system action was taken.
When on a truck, or a car ferry service or similar.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 249 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor cover or the sensor is dirty or covered, a message appears on the
instrument cluster display stating there is no sensor view. Clean the sensor
cover or remove the obstacles » Fig. 263 on page 216.
If there is no sensor view in the winter, the snow on the sensor under the cov-
er could be the reason. The system is functional again after the snow melts
away from the sensor.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system
still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Select the driving mode (Driving Mode Selection)
Introduction
By selecting the driving mode, the driving behaviour can be adapted to the de-
sired mode of operation.
The following modes
Eco
,
Comfort
,
Normal
,
Sport
,
Individual
and
Snow
are available.
The
Comfort
is only on vehicles with the adaptive chassis (DCC) and the
Snow
mode available only on vehicles with four-wheel drive.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Adaptive chassis (DCC)
Read and observe on page 251 first.
The adaptive chassis (hereafter known as DCC) provides the ability to adjust
the shock characteristics for the sporty, normal or comfortable driving when
the corresponding control mode is selected.
The DCC evaluates steering response and road conditions while driving contin-
uously and adjusts the suspension behaviour within the selected driving mode
accordingly.
mode
Eco
Read and observe on page 251 first.
This mode is suitable for a relaxed style of driving and helps to save fuel.
Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
Drive
Vehicle acceleration is more relaxed than in
Normal
mode.
The recommended gear is controlled such to achieve the lowest possible fuel
consumption » page 51.
If the START-STOP system is deactivated manually» page 207, this will be au-
tomatically activated.
251
Assist systems
The automatic gearbox is set automatically to mode E » page 212.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Acceleration occurs more relaxed than in
Normal
» page 244mode with distance
control.
Air conditioning (Climatronic)
The air conditioning is controlled so as to save energy. For this reason, for ex-
ample, it may take longer to reach the desired interior temperature in mode
Normal
.
Note
The maximum vehicle acceleration (kick down function) is possible also in driv-
ing mode
Eco
.
Mode
Comfort
Read and observe on page 251 first.
This mode is suitable for driving on roads with poorer surface or for long mo-
torway journeys.
Mode
Normal
Read and observe on page 251 first.
This mode is suitable for a conventional driving.
Mode
Sports
Read and observe on page 251 first.
This mode is suitable for a sporty driving.
Selecting this mode primarily affects the function of the following systems.
DCC
The DCC adjusts the chassis for the sporty driving style.
Steering
The power steering is reduced slightly, i.e., the driver needs to exert more
force for steering .
Drive
The vehicle acceleration is more dynamic than in
Normal
mode.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The acceleration is quicker than in
Normal
mode with distance control
» page 244.
ProActive passenger protection
The first level of protection is deactivated » page 253.
Engine noise
The engine noise is noticeable in the interior more intensely than in
Normal
mode.
Mode
individual
Read and observe on page 251 first.
In the mode
Individual
each system can be set independently » page 253, Set-
tings for individual
mode
.
Mode
Snow
Read and observe on page 251 first.
The mode is suitable for driving on slippery or snow-covered roads.
The driving profile
Snow
does not allow the automatic transmission to be set to
S mode.
252
Driving
Mode selection and Infotainment display
Fig. 308 Button for selecting the driving mode / Display in Infotainment
screen
Read and observe
on page 251 first.
Display of the driving mode menu
Press the
» Fig. 308 button.
The following function surfaces are displayed on the Infotainment screen
» Fig. 308.
Information on setting the currently selected mode
Setting the
Individual
mode
Driving mode menu
The driving mode selection is performed in one of the following ways.
By repeatedly pressing the button .
By tapping the relevant function surface on the Infotainment screen
» Fig. 308,
After switching the ignition off and on, the
Normal
mode is set.
Note
The currently selected driving mode is displayed in the infotainment system
in the status bar next to the symbol .
The setting for the
individual
mode is stored in the active personalisation user
account » page 59.
A
B
Settings for individual
mode
Read and observe on page 251 first.
In the
Individual
mode, the following menu items can be set.
DCC:
- Sets the shock characteristics
Steering:
- Set the power steering characteristics
Drive:
- Sets the drive characteristics
ACC:
- sets the vehicle acceleration when adaptive cruise control is activated
Dynamic Cornering light:
- Sets the Full LED headlight characteristics
Air conditioning:
- Sets the Climatronic characteristics
Engine sound:
- Sets the engine noise in the vehicle
Reset mode
- Setting for all menu items in
Individual
mode to
Normal
Cancel
- Keep the current settings
Reset
- cancels all menu items in the
Normal
mode
Proactive occupant protection (Crew Protect Assist)
Introduction
ProActive passenger protection (following known as system) increases pas-
senger protection in the front seats in situations that could lead to vehicle im-
pact or overturning.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance sys-
tems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Note
The system component service life is monitored electronically. Further infor-
mation » page 44, Safety systems.
253
Assist systems
Function
Read and observe on page 253 first.
In critical driving situations (e.g. during emergency braking or a sudden change
in direction), the following steps can be taken separately or combined in order
to reduce the risk of serious injury.
The front passenger's and driver's seatbelts, if worn, are automatically ten-
sioned closely over the body.
Opened electrically powered door windows are closed automatically up to a
gap of about 5 cm from the edge.
The sliding/tilting roof is closed.
Once the critical driving situation has passed, the tension on the seatbelts will
be released again.
The system operates at two levels of protection.
The first level of protection
The system already intervenes in situations that may occur during dynamic
driving. As a result, this primarily helps to keep the driver and the passenger in
the correct seated position.
The first protection level can be deactivated in one of the following ways.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/
tap on function surface
Driv-
er assistance
.
Deactivating the TCS» page 218.
By selecting the driving mode
Sport
» page 253.
By selecting the driving mode
Offroad
» page 219.
After switching the ignition off and on, the system is activated in both levels of
protection.
The second level of protection
The system intervenes only if the situation is evaluated as critical, such as
when panic braking at high speeds.
This level of protection cannot be deactivated.
Vehicles with the Front Assist system
Using this information, a system intervention may also occur when there is the
danger of a collision with an obstacle detected in front of the vehicle.
Lane Departure Warning (Lane Assist)
Introduction
Fig. 309
Sensor for Lane Assist
The lane departure warning (following known as system) helps to keep the ve-
hicle between the boundary lines of a lane.
The system recognises the boundary lines of the lane using a sensor » Fig. 309.
When the vehicle approaches a detected line between lanes, the system
makes a light movement of the steering wheel in the opposite direction to the
boundary line. This corrective steering intervention can be manually overridden
at any time.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Lane Assist can help you keep the vehicle within the lane. However, it
does not steer the vehicle for you. The driver retains full responsibility for
steering at all times.
Some objects or markings on the road can be recognised as the boundary
lines - an erroneous steering intervention may be the result.
WARNING
The system may not be able to recognise the boundary line, or recognise it
incorrectly, for example, in the following situations.
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
When driving in “sharp” bends.
The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic.
The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding ve-
hicle.
254
Driving
CAUTION
Do not attach any stickers or similar objects in front of the sensor on the wind-
screen to avoid impairing the functions of the system.
Note
The system is designed for driving on motorways and roads with adequate
longitudinal markings.
The system can detect both continuous and broken lines.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 254 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
Driv-
er assistance
.
Lane Assist (lane departure warning system) - Settings for Lane Assist
Active
- Activate/deactivate the assistant
Adaptive lane guidance
- Activate/deactivate adaptive lane guidance
Operation
Fig. 310 Monochromatic display of the instrument cluster: Examples of
system indications
Fig. 311 Colour display of the instrument cluster: Examples of system
indications
Read and observe and on page 254 first.
System displays» Fig. 310 and » Fig. 311
The system is active, but not ready to intervene.
The system is active and ready to intervene.
The system intervenes when approaching the right-hand boundary lane.
Adaptive tracking takes place.
The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present.
The system is activated.
The vehicle speed is higher than about 65 km/h (not applicable to vehicles
with the traffic jam assistant » page 256).
The boundary line of at least one side of the lane is detected.
The driver's hands are on the steering wheel.
The lane is more than 2.5 m in width.
If the turn signal is switched on (e.g. when turning), no steering intervention
takes place when the vehicle approaches the boundary line. The system re-
gards the situation as an intended lane change.
Warning lights in the instrument cluster
The system is active, but not ready to intervene.
The system is active and ready to intervene or is currently intervening.
Adaptive lane assist
Adaptive tracking helps to keep the vehicle in the position between the boun-
dary lines selected by the driver, by means of steering intervention.
255
Assist systems
If the position within the lane is changed, the system quickly adapts and holds
the newly-selected position.
Steering wheel vibrations
In the following situations, it may occasionally be the case that due to the
steering wheel vibrations the syst4em indicates that a driver steering interven-
tion is required.
The system is not able to keep the vehicle by a within the lane due to a steer-
ing intervention.
During an intense system-related steering intervention, the system suddenly
cannot recognize the boundary lines.
WARNING
The system function may be restricted if, for example there is danger due
to ruts on a downhill road or in a crosswind.
Activation / deactivation
Read and observe and on page 254 first.
The activation/deactivation of the system can be carried out in one of two
ways.
In the instrument cluster display » page 57,
Assist systems
menu item.
In Infotainment » page 255, Settings in Infotainment.
Adaptive tracking can also be enabled or disabled In Infotainment.
After switching off and switching on the ignition, the system setting is re-
tained.
Note
The system setting is stored (depending on the Infotainment type) in the ac-
tive user account personalisation » page 59.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 254 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the windscreen is dirty, iced or misted up in the sensor area, a message ap-
pears indicating that there is no sensor view. Clean the windscreen or remove
the obstacles from the sensor area.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Try to re-activate the machine. If the system still is not available, seek the as-
sistance of a specialist garage.
System fault
In the case of a system fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a spe-
cialist garage.
Request to take over steering
If the system detects that there are no hands are on the steering wheel, this
will not work properly. You will be prompted to take over steering. Place your
hands on the steering wheel.
Traffic jam assistant
Introduction
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The driver must always have hands on the steering wheel and be ready to
take over steering of the vehicle himself (accelerate or brake).
Note
The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Function
Read and observe on page 256 first.
The traffic jam assistant (referred to as system) helps to keep the vehicle with-
in the lane at speeds below 65 km/h while keeping the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Only vehicles with automatic transmission, Lane Assist and ACC can be equip-
ped with the system.
256
Driving
The traffic jam assistant works using the functions of the Lane Assist systems
» page 254 and ACC » page 244. For this reason, the chapters relating to these
systems must be read carefully and the safety instructions listed therein must
be observed.
Operating conditions
Read and observe on page 256 first.
The system activation occurs automatically whilst fulfilling the following
basic conditions.
Lane Assist with the adaptive tracking is enabled, the boundary lines on
both sides are recognized lane » page 254.
ACC is activated and the regulation » page 244 follows.
The vehicle speed is below 65 km/h.
Assistant for emergencies
Introduction
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
The system is intended for emergency situations when the driver is sud-
denly unable to take over the steering task. Therefore, never try to test out
the system - there is a risk of an accident!
Function
Read and observe on page 257 first.
The assistant for emergencies (following known as system) detects inactivity
of the driver, which for example can be caused by a sudden loss of conscious-
ness. The system then performs measures as safely as possible to decelerate
the vehicle to a stop.
Only vehicles with automatic transmission, Lane Assist and ACC can be equip-
ped with the system.
The Emergency Situation assistant works using the functions of the Lane As-
sist systems » page 254 and ACC » page 244, For this reason, the chapters re-
lating to these systems must be read carefully and the safety instructions lis-
ted therein must be observed.
System intervention
If the system detects the driver's inactivity, it draws attention to this fact by a
beep and a message on the display of the instrument cluster. It keeps the vehi-
cle in its lane.
If the driver does not take over the steering even after a repeated warning, the
system automatically brakes the vehicle and after it has come to a standstill
the parking brake switch on.
With automatic braking, the hazard warning system is switched on.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by means of a steering intervention.
Operating conditions
Read and observe on page 257 first.
The system can intervene when the following basic conditions are present.
Lane Assist is activated and the limiting lines on the two lane sides are rec-
ognised » page 254.
ACC is activated and the regulation » page 244 follows.
Traffic sign recognition
Introduction
The traffic sign recognition (following known as system) shows certain traffic
signs (e.g. speed limits) on the display of the instrument cluster and if necessa-
ry warns against excessive speeds.
257
Assist systems
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Vertical traffic signs must always take precedence over the traffic signs
shown in the display. The driver is always responsible for correctly assess-
ing the traffic situation.
The speed indications in the traffic signs shown refer to the speed units
that are common in the country. For example, the display may relate to
km/h or mph depending on the country in question.
WARNING
The traffic signs may not be displayed or displayed incorrectly in the sys-
tem e.g. in the following situations.
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
The sensor is blinded by the sun or oncoming traffic.
The field of view of the sensor is limited by an obstacle or a preceding ve-
hicle.
Travelling at high speed.
The traffic signs are covered (e.g. by trees, snow or dirt).
The traffic signs are not standard (round with a red border) or are dam-
aged.
The traffic signs are attached to flashing neon signs.
The traffic signs were changed (the navigation data are out of date).
Note
The system is only available in some countries.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe on page 258 first.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface
Driv-
er assistance
.
Dynamic Road Sign Display - Settings for the Dynamic Road Sign Display
Show in instrument cluster
- Activation/deactivation of the additional traffic
signs in the display of the instrument cluster
Speed warning:
- Configures a warning when the speed limit is exceeded
Warning at over
- Setting warning timing with the option to exceed the speed
limit in a range from 0 to 20 km / h
Trailer recognition
Show road signs relevant to trailers
- Activating / deactivating the display of road
signs relevant to trailers
Use for route calculation
- Activation / deactivation of taking the trailer into ac-
count for route calculation in navigation
Maximum speed for trailer
- Set the top speed for towing a trailer
Operation
Fig. 312
Sensor for Dynamic Road Sign
Display
Fig. 313 Instrument cluster display: Display examples
Read and observe on page 258 first.
Description of indications and displayed traffic signs
Display » Fig. 313
Display of detected road signs » page 54, Driving data (Multifunction dis-
play)
Additional display (monochromatic display)
Additional display (colour display)
258
Driving
The system can display the following (vertical) traffic signs where identified.
Speed limit.
Overtaking prohibited.
Additional signs, such as 'when wet' or signs which only apply for a limited time
can also be displayed.
The system displays only traffic signs that are in the “viewing area” of the sen-
sor » Fig. 312.
Data from the sensor is supplemented by information from the Infotainment
Navigation. This is the reason why traffic signs with maximum speeds can also
be shown on sections of roads which do not have any traffic signs.
Warning when exceeding the speed limit
The warning when exceeding the permissible speed (based on the detected
traffic sign) can be activated and set in Infotainment» page 258.
Mode when towing a trailer
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, in the Infotainment it is possi-
ble to enable or disable the relevant traffic signs for trailer operation and the
top speed for towing a trailer » page 258, Settings in Infotainment.
Note
If, for example, you are on a motorway without speed limits, then a road sign
relating to the end of all limits is shown in the instrument cluster display.
Additional display
Read and observe on page 258 first.
If the menu item Road sign is currently not shown » Fig. 313 on page 258 - ,
the road sign with the speed limit will appear in the upper display area of the
instrument cluster » Fig. 313 on page 258 - , .
If several traffic signs are detected simultaneously, in some cases the next
traffic sign will also be displayed in the colour display - » Fig. 313 on page 258 -
.
All detected traffic signs can be displayed via the multifunction display in the
menu item Traffic Sign Recognition » Fig. 313 on page 258 - .
This additional function can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment
» page 258.
Note
The setting (activation/deactivation) of the auxiliary display will be saved (de-
pending on the Infotainment type) in the active user account personalisation
» page 59.
Malfunction and information messages
Read and observe on page 258 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
Sensor dirty/covered
If a note appears in relation to the cleaning of the windscreen, clean the wind-
screen or remove the obstruction from the sensor area.
System fault
If an error message appears, seek assistance from a specialist garage.
System limitation
The system displays a message about system limitation in the following cases.
The map documents are not up to date.
The vehicle is located in an area for which no map documents are present.
Fatigue detection system
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter simply the system) advises the driv-
er to take a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on
the driver's steering behaviour.
The system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds of 60-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
The system can be activated/deactivated in menu

/
Driver assis-
tance
menu.
259
Assist systems
Pause recommendation
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display
of the instrument cluster and a message about detected fatigue. An audible
signal is also emitted.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired.
The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
Note
In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behaviour incorrect-
ly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.
The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Tyre pressure monitoring
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring function (following known as system) monitors
the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light
lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal sounds» page 45.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed inflation
pressure and these pressure values are stored in the system.
Always save the tyre pressure values in the system if one of the following
events occurs.
Change of tyre pressure values.
Change one or more wheels.
Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
The warning light in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 285.
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid tyre inflation pressure loss,
e.g. in case of sudden tyre damage.
Before storing the pressures, the tyres must be inflated to the specified
inflation pressure » page 285. If the wrong pressure valuesare stored, the
system may not issue any warnings, even if the tyre pressure is too low.
CAUTION
To ensure proper system function, the tire pressure values must be stored ev-
ery 10 000 km or 1x a year.
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display
Fig. 314
Button for storage / screen dis-
play example: a tire pressure
change at the front left is shown
Read and observe and on page 260 first.
Procedure for storing the tyre pressure values
Inflate all the tyres to the specified pressure.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
In the infotainment system, in menu

/ tap on function surface Tap →
Vehicle status
.
Use the function surfaces
select the Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator menu
item.
Tap the functional surface  interface» Fig. 314.
In addition, follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
260
Driving
A message on the screen informs about the storage of the tyre pressure val-
ues.
Note
When the warning light appears in the instrument cluster, the affected tyre
can be displayed on the infotainment system » Fig. 314.
Direct tire pressure control system
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring system (hereinafter referred to as "system")
monitors the tyre inflation pressure while driving by means of pressure sen-
sors on the wheels.
WARNING
Please take note of the general points relating to the use of assistance
systems » page 216, in section Introduction.
Having the correct tyre inflation pressure is always the driver's responsi-
bility. Tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 285.
Note
After switching on the ignition, the last measured tyre pressure values are dis-
played. This display will be updated at the start of the journey.
Display and settings
Fig. 315 Example in the display of the instrument cluster/settings in In-
fotainment
Read and observe on page 261 first.
In the event of a loss of pressure in one of the tyres, an acoustic signal is heard,
the indicator light in the display of the instrument cluster illuminates and
the corresponding message » page 45 is displayed.
The display on the instrument cluster can also be displayed manually by press-
ing the button on the multifunction steering wheel →
vehicle
.
The setting is made in Infotainment via the menu

/
Vehicle status
as
well as with the function surfaces, by selecting the menu item Tyre pres-
sure monitoring system.
Display/screen display » Fig. 315
Actual tyre pressure
Target tyre pressure
System fault, system possibly not available in rear right tyre
Front left tyre pressure too low
Selection of the loading condition
Select loading condition
The tyre pressure must be adjusted according to the loading condition of the
vehicle.
In the menu item Tyre pressure monitoring system, tap on the function sur-
face
E
» Fig. 315.
or: Choose the option
Tyres
Loading:
.
Select the tyre types
When changing the tyre type, the air pressure must be adapted to the new
tyres.
In the menu item
Tyre pressure monitoring system, select the option
Tyres
Tyre type:
.
A
B
C
D
E
261
Assist systems
Towing device and trailer
Hitch
Introduction
The maximum trailer load is dependent on the engine and the vehicle equip-
ment. The valid specification for your vehicle can be found in the technical ve-
hicle documentation, (e.g. vehicle approval documentation, the COC docu-
ment) or at a ŠKODA partner.
Other data (e.g. shown on the rating plate of the hitch) only provides informa-
tion about the test values of the device.
WARNING
Do not use the towing device if it is damaged or if there are parts missing.
Swinging in and out the tow bar
Fig. 316
Swing out the tow bar
Fig. 317 Swivel tow bar
Read and observe on page 262 first.
The pivotable tow bar cannot be removed. Its correct latching in both posi-
tions is indicated by a warning light.
Swing out the tow bar
Pull the switch in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 316 (the installation location
of the switch may be different depending on equipment fitted » . The tow
bar swings out in direction of arrow
2
and the indicator light
in the
switch flashes.
Press the tow bar in the direction of the arrow
3
, until it audibly clicks into
place. The indicator light
inside the switch illuminates.
Swivel tow bar
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. A socket or adapter
may not be plugged into the 13-pin socket.
Pull the switch in the direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 317 . The tow bar is un-
locked and the indicator light in the switch flashes.
Swing in the tow bar under the bumper in the direction of arrow
5
until it
clicks into place. The indicator light inside the switch illuminates.
Check latching
If the tow bar is incorrectly locked, the warning light inside the switch flashes
red, after the ignition is switched on an acoustic signal is sounded and an ap-
propriate message appears in the instrument cluster.
262
Driving
WARNING
Take care with the towing device - it may cause injury.
When swinging out the ball rod away from the central area of the rear
bumper, there is a danger of injury to the legs.
Do not manipulate the switch while a trailer or another accessory is cou-
pled to the tow bar. The tow bar could come loose - risk of accident and
injury.
If the indicator light it supplied the switch does not light or flashes, or if
the tow bar can not engage, then do not use this. Seek help from a special-
ist garage.
Note
When not using the towing device, always swing the tow bar under the bump-
er.
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Read and observe on page 262 first.
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
permissible total weight including load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing
device) may not exceed 70 cm.
The permissible total weight of the installed accessory, including its load, cor-
responds to the maximum trailer load on trailers.
If the maximum trailer load in trailer operation is more than 75 kg, then the
permissible total weight of the mounted accessories including their load must
not exceed 75 kg.
This value applies if the center of gravity is at a distance of no more than 30
cm from the towing device ball head.
If the distance of the centre gravity of the load to the ball head of the tow-
ing device is greater than 30 cm, then the max. permissible total weight of
the accessory, including its load, decreases (e.g. at a distance of 60 cm
from the ball head, the permissible weight decreases by half).
CAUTION
Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
maximum length of the accessories – There is a risk of damage to the towing
device.
Note
We recommend that you use accessories from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Using hitch
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect
Fig. 318
Housing of the 13 pin socket,
safety eyelet
Connect / disconnect
Swing out the tow bar » page 262.
Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the ball head.
Open the socket cap and insert the plug of the trailer (accessories) into the
13-pin socket
A
» Fig. 318. (If the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connec-
tor, use a corresponding adapter from the ŠKODA Original Accessories).
Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet
B
(the
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order.
Exterior mirrors
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors.
263
Towing device and trailer
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights
» page 74, Operating the lights
1)
.
Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec-
ted consumers.
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted.
WARNING
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
trical shock.
WARNING (Continued)
After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accesso-
ry) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
Never use the securing eye to tow - risk of accident!
CAUTION
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
The total power consumption of all the connected loads to the trailer power
supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the
electrical system of the vehicle.
Loading a trailer
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 285.
Distribution of the cargo
Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Drive with particular caution if you cannot avoid driving with
this combination.
WARNING
Sliding cargo can significantly adversely affect stability and driving safety -
risk of accident!
Trailer
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
Permissible trailer weight - five-seat version
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
at gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
1.4 l/110 kW TSI ACT
MG 4x4 2000 750
DSG 1800 750
1)
Applies to vehicles with Full LED headlights.
264
Driving
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
at gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
MG 1800 750
DSG 1800 750
DSG 4x4 -
a)
-
a)
2.0 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2200 750
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2200 750
2.0 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1800 750
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 1950 750
DSG 2000 750
DSG 4x4 2300- 2500
b)
750
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 2300 750
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 2300- 2500
b)
750
2.0 l/176 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 -
a)
-
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
b)
Applies to M1G category vehicles (cars with enhanced off-road capability).
Permissible trailer weight - seven-seat version
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
at gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
MG 4x4 2000 750
DSG 1800 750
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
MG 1800 750
DSG 1800 750
DSG 4x4 -
a)
-
a)
2.0 l/132 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2000 750
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG 4x4 2000 750
2.0 l/85 kW TDI CR MG - -
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 - -
DSG 2000 750
DSG 4x4 (1425/1775/2000)
b)
750
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1800 750
265
Towing device and trailer
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer load, braked (kg)
at gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer load, unbraked (kg)
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 (1875/2000)
b)
750
2.0 l/176 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 -
a)
-
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
b)
Depending on the scope of vehicle equipment.
WARNING
The maximum vertical load and the maximum trailer load must not be ex-
ceeded - there is risk of accident!
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive faster than 100 km/h when hitching a trailer.
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accel-
erating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a
brake.
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (herein-
after only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
coupled or uncoupled » page 66.
Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
device.
The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
means of the trailer socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional.
The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights.
266
Driving
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations
Introduction
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO must be observed when
carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical alterations to your vehicle.
Adhering to these instructions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and
helps keep your vehicle in a good technical condition.
WARNING
Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle are to be car-
ried out only by a specialist garage. Improperly conducted work (including
work on the electronic components and their software) can cause faults -
there is a risk of accidents and increased wear on parts!
We advise you only to use ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKODA Orig-
inal Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your vehicle. Reli-
ability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with these.
ŠKODA AUTO cannot assume any liability for products which have not
been approved by ŠKODA even though these may be products with a type
approval or have been approved by a nationally recognised testing labora-
tory.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Read and observe on page 267 first.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with the
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full function-
ing of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant / battery replacement
etc.).
ŠKODA Service Partner
Read and observe on page 267 first.
All ŠKODA Service Partners operate according to the most recent guidelines
and instructions from ŠKODA AUTO . All service and repair work is therefore
carried out on time and at the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instruc-
tions and guidelines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a
good technical condition.
We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
ŠKODA Original parts
Read and observe
on page 267 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Original Parts for your vehicle, as these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts correspond exactly to the
ŠKODA AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series produc-
tion.
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
products.
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
a period of 2 years after sale in accordance with the materials defect liability,
unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA Original accessories
Read and observe on page 267 first.
If you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle, you should remember the follow-
ing.
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO has selected such accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch for other products, even
though in some instances such parts may have operational approval or may
have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
267
Care and maintenance
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects of ŠKODA Genuine Acces-
sories for a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with
the materials defect liability, unless agreed otherwise in the purchase agree-
ment or any other agreements.
Spoiler
Read and observe on page 267 first.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with an original spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following instructions
must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and serious inju-
ries!
The vehicle must always be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper
only in combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
This kind of spoiler cannot be left on the front bumper either on its own,
in combination with another spoiler not on the luggage compartment lid or
in combination with an unsuitable spoiler on the luggage compartment lid.
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any re-
pairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
Improperly conducted work on the spoilers of your vehicle may result in
malfunction.
Component protection
Read and observe on page 267 first.
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac-
tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita-
tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
Airbags
Read and observe on page 267 first.
WARNING
Modifications, repairs and technical alterations that have been carried out
unprofessionally can cause damage and operational faults, and can also se-
riously impair the effectiveness of the airbag system – risk of accident and
fatal injury!
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tyre combinations, can alter the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
WARNING
No changes may be made to parts of the airbag system, the front bumper
and the body.
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
If the airbag is triggered, the airbag system must be exchanged.
WARNING
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). The resulting dam-
age can negatively affect the function of the airbag system - there is a risk
of accidents and fatal injuries! The following guidelines must be observed.
Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by
a specialist garage.
Never drive with removed inner door panels or openings in the panels.
Cleaning and care
Introduction
Regular and thorough care retains the value of your vehicle.
268
General Maintenance
When using the care product, always observe the instructions on the packag-
ing. We recommend that you use the preservative from the ŠKODA Original
Accessories.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not
completely independent, e.g. children - there is a danger of poisoning!
CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar cleaning
products – risk of damaging the paintwork surface.
Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - there is a dan-
ger of damaging the material that is to be cleaned.
Note
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and cared for by a ŠKODA Service
Partner.
Washing the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 269 first.
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de-
posits remain on the paintwork of your vehicle, the more detrimental their de-
structive effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive
sun's rays, accentuate this caustic effect.
It is essential to also thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
Washing by hand
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, if necessary, wash using a soft sponge
or washing mitt and plenty of water with appropriate detergents. Wash out
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
Use a different sponge for the wheels, door sills and lower vehicle areas.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
Automatic car washes
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle in
an automatic car wash system (e.g. closing the windows and the sliding/tilting
roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any particular attached parts, such as a spoiler,
roof rack system, two-way radio aerial etc., it is best to consult the operator of
the car wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the blades of the wipers should
be cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then
degreased.
Pressure washer
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to informa-
tion with respect to the pressure and spray distance from the vehicle surface.
WARNING
When washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the braking
system can affect the braking efficiency – risk of accident!
Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells -
there is a risk of injury on sharp metal parts!
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body
while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be max. 60 ° C -
otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint.
Before driving through a car wash, fold in the exterior mirrors - there is a risk
of damage.
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle using pressure washers
Do not wash the foils using pressure washers - there is a risk of damage.
Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
269
Care and maintenance
During cleaning, always keep a sufficiently large spraying distance in particu-
lar from the parking sensors, the camera lenses, the external decorative and
protective plastic parts (e.g. roof racks, spoilers, protective strips) and other
vehicle parts made of non-metallic materials, such as rubber hoses or insula-
tion materials – otherwise there is a risk of damage.
When washing the vehicle, do not point the water jet directly at the tow bar
or the trailer socket - there is a risk of seal damage or washing out the grease.
Caring for the outside of the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 269 first.
Vehicle compo-
nent
Facts of the
matter
Remedy
Paint
Spilled fuel
Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
possible)
No water drop-
lets form on the
paint
Use hard wax (min. twice a year), apply
wax to clean and dry body
Matt paint
Use polish, then preserve (if the polish
does not contain any preservative in-
gredients)
Plastic parts Soiling
Clear water, cloth / sponge provided
for the intended cleaning agent
Chromed
and anodised
parts
Soiling
Clear water, cloth or cleaning agent
provided for this purpose, then polish
with a soft dry cloth
Foils Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Windows
and external mir-
ror glass
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry using
the intended cloth
Headlights/lights Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Camera front,
side, rear view
camera
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth
Snow / ice Hand brush / de-icer
Door lock cylinder Snow / ice De-icer
Vehicle compo-
nent
Facts of the
matter
Remedy
Wiper / wiper
blades
Soiling Glass cleaner, sponge or cloth
Wheels Soiling
Clear water, then coat with appropriate
conservation solution
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
be lubricated with a suitable lubricant.
The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing de-
vice with a suitable grease whenever necessary.
Protection of hollow spaces
All the hollow spaces on your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are pro-
tected for life by a layer of protective wax applied in the factory.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner.
Underbody protection
The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
against chemical and mechanical influences.
We recommend having the protective coating underneath the vehicle and the
chassis checked — preferably before the beginning of winter and at the end of
winter.
Product life of the films
Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
the life of the films. Films will age and become brittle – this is entirely normal:
this is not a fault.
Sunlight may also affect the strength of the film colour.
When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box or similar), there is an
increased risk of film damage (e.g. of chipping from the secured load).
CAUTION
Vehicle paint
Damaged areas should be repaired as soon as possible.
Do not treat painted parts with or hard waxes.
270
General Maintenance
Do not polish the paintwork in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratch-
es.
Do not apply any paint care products to door seals or window guides.
Plastic parts
Do not use paint care products.
Chromed and anodised parts
Do not polish the chrome parts in a dusty environment - risk of surface
scratches.
Foils
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of foil
damage.
Do not clean with dirty cloths or sponges.
To remove ice and snow, do not use a scraper or other means.
Do not polish the foils
Do not use a pressure washer to clean the foils
Rubber seals
Do not treat the door seals and window guides with any products - the pro-
tective lacquer layer could be affected.
Windows and external mirror glass
Do not clean the inside of the windows with sharp objects - there is a risk
of damage to the filaments or glass antenna.
Do not use a cloth, which was used to polish the body - this could soil the
window and reduce visibility.
Headlights/lights
Do not dry off the headlights/lights, do not use sharp objects - there is a
risk of damage to the protective coating and subsequent cracking of the
headlight glass.
Front, side and rear view cameras
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
camera damage.
Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
Door lock cylinder
Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder
when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
Wheels
Heavy contamination of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels -
this can result in vibrations and, under some circumstances, can cause pre-
mature wear of the steering wheel.
Removing snow and ice from the windscreens
Fig. 319
Installation location of the ice
scraper, removing the scraper
Read and observe and on page 269 first.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow
» Fig. 319.
CAUTION
Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to
the glass surface.
Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand,
road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface.
Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels
that have been fitted by the factory.
271
Care and maintenance
Caring for the interior
Read and observe and on page 269 first.
Vehicle compo-
nent
Facts of the
matter
Remedy
Natural leather /
Faux leather /
Alcantara
®
/
Suede /
Fabric
Dust, surface
contamination
Vacuum cleaner
Pollution (fresh)
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool
cloth, if necessary, mild soap solution
a)
,
then wipe with a soft cloth
Stubborn stains Specially prepared detergent
Care (natural
leather)
Treat the leather periodically with a
suitable leather protector and use a
care cream with light blocker and im-
pregnation after each cleaning.
Care (Alcantara
®
suede / fabric)
Remove stubborn hairs using a “clean-
ing glove”
Remove pills from materials with a
brush
Plastic parts Soiling
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge,
or cleaning agent provided for this pur-
pose
Windows Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry using
the intended cloth
Covers of electri-
cally heated seats
Soiling Specially provided cleaning agent
Seat belts » Soiling soft cloth and mild soap solution
a)
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
WARNING
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.
CAUTION
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara
®
suede / material
In lengthy periods in bright sunlight, it might be sensible to cover these ma-
terials in order to avoid bleaching.
Fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish etc.) should be removed as
soon as possible.
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
that no water gets into the seams.
Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
Do not use solvents, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar agents
on Alcantara
®
suede seat upholstery.
Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness - this may leave evident marks on upholstery. This is not a defect in the
fabric.
Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can dam-
age the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage cannot be subse-
quently recognised as a justified complaint.
Plastic parts
Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dashboard – there is a risk of
damage to the dashboard.
Windows
Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk
of damage.
Covers of electrically heated seats
Do not clean with water or other liquids - there is a risk of damage to the
heating system.
Do not dry by switching on the heating.
Seat belts
Allow to dry before rolling up the seat belts.
Note
During use, the leather and Alcantara
®
and suede materials may show minor
changes (e.g. folds, discolouration).
272
General Maintenance
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Introduction
Fig. 320
Label with prescribed fuel / graphic designation of fuel types
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 320.
The fuel capacity for vehicles with front wheel drive is about 58 litres, and for
vehicles with four-wheel drive about 60 litres, with about 7 litres as reserve.
Graphic name of the fuel types » Fig. 320
Unleaded petrol
Diesel
CNG (compressed natural gas)
Percentage of organic
WARNING
Fuel vapours are explosive - can be fatal!
A
B
C
D
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! The irregular supply of
fuel can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and
the exhaust system.
Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with
the intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in the ac-
companying country or whether it is permissible to operate the vehicle with
another fuel.
Petrol and diesel refuelling
Fig. 321
Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
273
Inspecting and replenishing
Fig. 322
Fuel filler tube on vehicles with
diesel engines
Read and observe and on page 273 first.
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
The vehicle is unlocked.
The ignition is switched off.
The auxiliary heating and ventilation is switched off.
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow
1
and open it in the direc-
tion of arrow
2
» Fig. 321.
Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow
3
.
Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in
the direction of arrow
4
.
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler neck as far as it will go, and refuel.
The fuel tank is full just as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first
time. Not continue refuelling.
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the
pump.
Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow until it securely engages
3
.
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Incorrect refuelling guard on vehicles with diesel engines
The fuel filler tube on vehicles with diesel engines has been fitted with an in-
correct refuelling guard » Fig. 322.
If the diesel pump nozzle does not sit directly in the fuel filler tube, move it to
and fro with slight pressure to insert it correctly.
The diameter of the diesel pump nozzle can be identical to that of the petrol
pump nozzle in some countries. When driving in these countries, the incorrect
fuelling protection should be removed by a specialist company.
Unleaded petrol
Read and observe and on page 273 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 320 on page 273.
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol containing maximum
10% bioethanol (E10).
Unleaded petrol must correspond to the European Standard EN 228 (in Ger-
many DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 91
or DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 98).
Specified petrol 95 / min. 92 and 93 RON/ROZ
We recommend using petrol 95 RON.
Optionally, the petrol 92 or. 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly
increased fuel consumption).
In an emergency petrol 91 RON can be used (slight power loss, slightly in-
creased fuel consumption) »
.
Unleaded petrol min. 95 RON / ROZ
Use min. 95 ROZ petrol.
In an emergency petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight loss, a slightly
increased fuel consumption) »
.
Prescribed petrol 98/(95) RON / ROZ
We recommend using petrol 98 RON.
Optionally, petrol 95 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slightly increased
fuel consumption).
In an emergency petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight loss, a slightly
increased fuel consumption) »
.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of en-
gine damage and damage to the exhaust system.
If gasoline is used which is lower than the prescribed octane number, then
continue driving at medium engine speeds and minimum engine load. Refuel
using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
274
General Maintenance
Petrol with a lower Octane count than 91 should not even be used in an
emergency!
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en-
gine or switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
Petrol additives (additives)
The unleaded petrol in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all
the conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that
you do not add any fuel additives to the petrol - there is a risk of engine dam-
age or damage to the exhaust system.
The following additives and auxiliary products may not be used - there is a
risk of engine damage or damage to the exhaust system!
Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with
manganese and iron content.
Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol).
Note
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
The use of petrol with an octane rating higher than 95 RON in does not result
in either a noticeable increase in power nor lower fuel consumption in vehicles
for which unleaded petrol 95/min 92 or 93 RON is specified.
On vehicles using prescribed petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of petrol with a
higher octane number than 95 RON can increase the power and reduce fuel
consumption.
Diesel fuel
Read and observe and on page 273 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 320 on page 273.
The vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that complies with the Euro-
pean standard EN 590 (in Germany also DIN 51628, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590,
in Russia GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590: 2004, in India IS 1460/Bharat IV or in
an emergency IS 1460/Bharat III).
The diesel fuel may contain maximum 7% biodiesel (B7 - In Germany in ac-
cordance with DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590).
Operating under different weather conditions
Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather condi-
tions. Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corre-
sponds to these conditions.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of en-
gine damage and damage to the exhaust system.
If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is put into the tank, do not start the engine or
switch on the ignition!
The biofuel RME must not be used!
CAUTION
Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you
do not add any fuel additives to the diesel - - there is a risk of engine damage
or damage to the exhaust system.
AdBlue
®
and its refilling
Introduction
In order to reduce pollutant emissions from vehicles with diesel engines and
the SCR catalyst, a urea - AdBlue
®
solution is injected into the exhaust system.
Only use AdBlue
®
that corresponds to ISO 22241-1 standard. Do not add addi-
tives to AdBlue
®
.
The AdBlue
®
-consumption depends on driving style, the operating tempera-
ture of the system and on the weather conditions.
The AdBlue
®
-tank filling is about 18 litres.
WARNING
AdBlue
®
can cause skin, eye and respiratory irritation. If your eyes or skin
come into contact with the AdBlue
®
fluid, immediately wash the affected
area with water. Seek medical assistance if required.
275
Inspecting and replenishing
CAUTION
AdBlue
®
attacks the surface of some materials (e.g. as painted parts, plastics,
fabrics). Clean the areas affected with AdBlue
®
using a damp cloth and plenty
of cold water. Remove any dried AdBlue
®
with warm water and a sponge.
Note
The AdBlue
®
solution freezes at a temperature of -11° C and lower. The sys-
tem has an automatic heater to ensure the operability at low temperatures.
We recommend purchasing AdBlue
®
refill bottles from the ŠKODA original
parts.
The working life of the AdBlue
®
solution is 4 years. If the tank contents are
not used within this period, then this is to be replaced by a specialist garage.
When topping up, do not use AdBlue
®
for which the shelf life has expired.
AdBlue
®
is a registered trademark of the VDA. AdBlue
®
is also known as AUS
32 (Aqueous Urea Solution) or DEF (Diesel Exhaust Fluid).
Check level
Read and observe and on page 275 first.
The AdBlue
®
level is automatically monitored.
The driving distance that can be driven with the existing AdBlue
®
Tank capacity
as well as indication of the minimum and maximum AdBlue
®
- Refill quantity,
can be displayed using the driving data » page 54.
If the available travel distance that can be completed with the remaining AdBl-
ue
®
tank capacity drops to about 2400 km, the warning
appears on the in-
strument cluster and a request for replenishment of AdBlue
®
appears.
If the available travel distance that can be driven with the existing AdBlue
®
-
tank capacity drops down to 0 km, then no motor start is possible. In this
case, if possible, top up AdBlue
®
to the maximum fill level.
AdBlue
®
Refill
Fig. 323 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
Read and observe
and on page 275 first.
AdBlue
®
You can even top up using a fuel nozzle at a petrol station or a refill
bottle, if necessary at a specialist garage.
We recommend when refilling using refill bottles that you use refill bottles
from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
When adding AdBlue
®
take note of the minimum and maximum AdBlue
®
tank
capacity shown in the display of the instrument cluster together with warning
light
.
Refill AdBlue
®
under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The ignition is switched off.
Refilling
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow
1
and open it in the direc-
tion of arrow
2
» Fig. 323.
Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow
3
.
Remove the tank cap and place in the recess on top of the fuel filler flap in
the direction of arrow
4
.
Refill AdBlue
®
in the neck
A
by means of a refill or a fuel nozzle refill (follow
the instructions on the container or the instructions of the petrol station op-
erator).
276
General Maintenance
The AdBlue
®
- tank is full when no AdBlue
®
flows from the refill bottle or as
soon as the correctly operated pump cuts out for the first time. Do not contin-
ue refilling AdBlue
®
.
After refilling AdBlue
®
put the cap on the fuel filler neck and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow
3
until it engages.
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Before continuing your journey, switch on just the ignition for 30 s so that
the refilling can be recognized by the system. Only then start the engine.
CAUTION
When refilling AdBlue
®
Do not exceed the maximum refill quantity specified in
the instrument cluster - there is a risk of damage to the AdBlue
®
systems.
Engine compartment
Introduction
WARNING
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a cov-
er) – risk of fire!
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must
be observed - risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of your car is a
hazardous area!
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY
system, open the driver's door.
Switch on the parking brake.
For vehicles with manual transmission the lever into the neutral position.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Allow the engine to cool.
Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has
stopped escaping.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
Do not touch any hot engine parts – risk of burns!
Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan suddenly switch on approx.
10 minutes after switching off the ignition!
Do not smoke or use open flames in the vicinity of the engine.
Do not leave any items (e.g. cloths or tools) in the engine compartment.
This presents a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
Read and observe the information and warning instructions on the fluid
containers.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
If it is necessary to work on the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning, then observe the rotating engine parts and electrical plants - it can
be fatal!
Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
CAUTION
Refill only operating fluids of the correct specification - danger of damaging
the vehicle!
Note
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA
Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
277
Inspecting and replenishing
Open the bonnet and close
Fig. 324 Opening the bonnet
Read and observe and on page 277 first.
Open flap
Make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not folded away from the
windscreen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet.
Open the driver's door and pull the unlocking lever below the dashboard in
the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 324.
Press the release lever in the direction of the arrow
2
and the bonnet is un-
locked.
Hold the bonnet and lift up until it is held open by the pressurised gas spring.
Close the bonnet lid
Pull the bonnet lid down far enough to overcome the force of the pressur-
ised gas spring.
From around 20 cm, lightly push the bonnet lid closed until it securely engag-
es.
If the bonnet lid is not properly closed, the display of the instrument cluster
will show this.
WARNING
Never drive if the bonnet is open - could cause an accident!
Make sure that when closing the engine compartment lid, no body parts
are crushed - there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
When closing the bonnet “do not press down” - there is a risk of damaging the
bonnet.
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 325
Arrangement example in the engine compartment
Read and observe and on page 277 first.
Coolant expansion reservoir
280
Engine oil dipstick
279
Engine oil filler opening
279
Brake fluid reservoir
281
Vehicle battery 282
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
279
A
B
C
D
E
F
278
General Maintenance
Windscreen washer fluid
Fig. 326
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
voir
Read and observe and on page 277 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir
A
is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 326.
The capacity of the reservoir is about 3 litres or about 5 litres on vehicles that
have a headlight cleaning system (7 litres in some countries).
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid in accordance with the current or ex-
pected weather conditions. We recommend that you use accessories from
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
CAUTION
Only use liquids that do not attack polycarbonates - otherwise there is a risk
of damage to the headlights.
Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when
replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be-
come contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to mal-
function.
Engine oil
Specification
To find out which type of engine oil you can use for your vehicle, contact a
specialist garage.
If this oil is not available, other oils can also be refilled. To prevent engine dam-
age, a maximum of 0.5 l of engine oil with the following specifications may be
used until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or
API SN, (API SM);
Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Engine oil VW 505 01 can optionally be used in diesel engines without a diesel
particulate filter.
Check and refill
Fig. 327
Dipstick variants
Depending on the driving style and operating conditions, the engine uses some
oil (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this dur-
ing the first 5 000 km.
Have the oil change carried out by a specialist garage during the inspection.
Check the oil under the following conditions and refill.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine operating temperature is reached.
The engine is turned off.
Checking the level
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the oil trough.
Remove the dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth.
Push the dipstick to the stop and pull out again.
Read the oil level and push in the dipstick.
The oil level must be in range
A
» Fig. 327. If the oil level is below the range
A
, refill the oil.
Refilling
Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening
C
» Fig. 325 on page 278.
279
Inspecting and replenishing
Add oil of the correct specification in increments of 0.5 litres » page 279.
Check the oil level .
Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 277.
CAUTION
The oil level must never fall outside range
A
» Fig. 327 - otherwise there is a
risk of damaging the engine and the exhaust system.
If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range
A
, stop
driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Do not add additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.
Note
Too low engine oil level is shown in the instrument cluster by the warning
light illuminating and also indicated by the message » page 48. Neverthe-
less, we recommend to check the oil level on a regular basis with the dipstick.
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Coolant
Introduction
The coolant cools the engine and consists of water and coolant additive (with
additives that protect the cooling system against corrosion and prevents fur-
ring).
The coolant additive proportion in the coolant must be between 40 and 60 %.
The correct mixing ratio of water and coolant additive should be checked if
necessary by a specialist garage or corrected if necessary.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 277.
Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurized - risk of scalding or
injury from being splashed with coolant!
WARNING (Continued)
To protect against coolant splashes, cover the cap with a cloth when
opening.
Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the coolant, immediately wash
the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water and seek medi-
cal advice if required.
CAUTION
Do not cover the radiator or fit any parts (e.g. auxiliary lights) in front of the air
intakes - there is a risk of the engine overheating.
Checking and refilling
Fig. 328
Coolant expansion reservoir
Read and observe and on page 280 first.
Check the coolant under the following conditions and refill.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm, the test results could be in-
accurate).
The engine is turned off.
Check the coolant level - the coolant level must be between the marks
A
and
B
» Fig. 328. If the coolant level is below the mark
B
, refill the coolant.
Refilling
The coolant expansion tank must always contain a small amount of coolant
»
.
Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and unscrew the cap
carefully.
280
General Maintenance
Always top up using the correct specification of fluids.
Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification of the coolant is shown on the coolant expansion reser-
voir» Fig. 328.
If no specified coolant is available, use only distilled or demineralised water and
have the mixing ratio of water and coolant additive corrected by a specialist
garage as soon as possible.
CAUTION
If the expansion tank is empty, do not top up with coolant. The system could
aerate - risk of damaging the engine! Stop driving! Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Do not fill the coolant above the mark
A
» Fig. 328. When it heats up, the
coolant could press out of the cooling system - there is a risk of damage to the
engine parts.
If it is not possible to add coolant,stop driving! Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification
can reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - there is a risk of
damage to the cooling system and the engine.
If water other than distilled (demineralised) water is used, then have the
coolant replaced by a specialist garage - there is a risk of engine damage.
A loss of coolant could be due to leaks in the cooling system - there is a risk
of engine damage. Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Note
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and shown by the relevant message » page 47. We still recom-
mend inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Brake fluid
Fig. 329
Brake fluid reservoir
Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is turned off.
Check brake fluid level - the brake fluid level must be between the markings
“MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 329.
Specification - the brake fluid must comply with VW 501 14 standard (this
standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4).
The brake fluid change is carried out during the inspection.
WARNING
If the date of the brake fluid change is exceeded, steam bubbles could
form in the brake system during heavy braking. This can impair the efficien-
cy of the brakes – risk of accident!
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 277.
There may be an indication of a leak in the brake system, however, if the
fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below the
“MIN” » Fig. 329 marking. Do not continue driving - There is a risk of ac-
cident! Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
A low brake fluid level which is too low is indicated by the warning light be-
ing shown on the display of the instrument cluster as well as the correspond-
ing message» page 42. We therefore recommend that you check the coolant
level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
281
Inspecting and replenishing
Vehicle battery
Introduction
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
Automatic consumer shutdown - discharge protection of the vehicle
battery
The on-board power supply tries as follows to avoid draining the vehicle bat-
tery when it is heavily loaded.
By increasing the engine idle speed.
By limiting the power of certain consumers.
By turning off some consumers (heated seats, heated rear window) for as
long as necessary.
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol Meaning
Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is highly corrosive - risk of injury, irritation or poisoning! Corro-
sive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory tract and the
eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolyte fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes with plenty of water. Seek
medical assistance if required.
WARNING (Continued)
Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
pendent, especially children.
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings.
WARNING
When working on the car battery, there is the risk of explosion, fire, injury
or irritation! The following guidelines must be observed.
Avoid smoking, the use of open flames or light and any activities that
could cause sparks.
A discharged vehicle battery can freeze slightly. Never charge up a fro-
zen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
Never use a damaged vehicle battery – risk of explosion!
Do not connect the battery terminals with each other by bridging the two
poles of a short circuit.
CAUTION
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the paintwork.
Note
We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
282
General Maintenance
Checking the condition
Fig. 330
Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
Read and observe and on page 282 first.
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the
inspection service.
Check the acid level
For car batteries with acid level indicator, use the colouration of the display to
check the acid level. In vehicle batteries with the designation “AGM” there is
no acid level examination.
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
tap on the indicator before carrying out the check » Fig. 330.
Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Battery discharge
Frequent short journeys will not sufficiently recharge the car battery.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, then disconnect the
negative terminal or charge the battery constantly with a very low charging
current.
Charging
Read and observe and on page 282 first.
Only charge the vehicle battery when the ignition and all consumers are
switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
For vehicles with START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the
terminal of the charger on the pole of the battery, the terminal of the
charger to the earth point of the engine » page 297.
For vehicles without START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect the
terminals of the charger to the corresponding battery poles ( at . at
).
Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch on the
device.
After charging has been successful: Switch off the charger and remove the
mains cable from the power socket.
Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
WARNING
When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo-
sion. An explosion can be caused from sparks or connection or releasing
the cable plug while the ignition is on.
The so-called “quick charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and re-
quires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have“Quick
loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
Disconnecting/connecting and changing
Fig. 331
Vehicles with the vehicle battery
in the boot
Read and observe and on page 282 first.
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
283
Inspecting and replenishing
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original Battery.
The vehicle battery can be found in the engine compartment or in the luggage
compartment.
Access to the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment
Raise the rear panel of the variable loading floor on the handle
A
in the di-
rection of the arrow
1
» Fig. 158 on page 116.
Put the variable loading floor down, not in the grooves behind the guide lugs
B
» Fig. 158 on page 116.
Grasp and remove he battery cover on the handles
A
in the direction of the
arrow » Fig. 331.
Connecting/disconnecting
To disconnect the battery, switch off the ignition and disconnect first the
negative terminal
, and only after this the positive
.
To connect the battery, first connect the positive terminal
, and only after
this the negative terminal
.
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func-
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Function / device Operating measure
Power windows » page 71
Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof » page 73
Sun screen » page 73
Time setting » page 51
CAUTION
Disconnect the vehicle battery only with the ignition turned off - there is a
risk of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
Before disconnecting the battery, close the electric tailgate, all the windows,
the sliding / tilting roof and the electric sunshade - otherwise malfunctions of
equipment elements may occur.
Under no circumstances must the connection cables be connected incor-
rectly – risk of fire.
Note
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, we recommend
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality
of all electrical systems is guaranteed.
284
General Maintenance
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
New tyres, during the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and
appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving.
Always fit tyres with a greater profile depth on the front wheels.
Wheels and bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We recom-
mend that you use wheel rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
Always store wheels or tyresin a cool, dry and, where possible, dark place. The
tyres themselves should be stored standing.
Tyre life
Tyres age and lose their original characteristics, even if they are not being
used. Do not use tyres that are older than 6 years.
The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the in-
side). E.g. DOT ... 10 18... means that the tyres were produced in the 10th week
of the year 2018.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges, etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre tread immediately (e.g. small stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Installation of new tyres
Only fit radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same
tread pattern on one axle on all 4 wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
Uni-directional tires
Some tires may be directional. The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked
by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the fol-
lowing tyre characteristics may be degraded.
Driving stability.
Traction.
Tyre noise and tyre wear.
Tyres with increased resistance to air loss when punctured
Some vehicles may be fitted with tyres at the factory that have increased
puncture resistance (so-called “SEAL” tyres). For some countries, vehicles are
equipped with “SEAL” tyres delivered without a spare wheel and appropriate
tools.
If “SEAL”tyres are replaced with standard tyres, the vehicle must be retrofit-
ted with a puncture repair kit or spare wheel and appropriate hand tools.
WARNING
Never use damaged tyres or tyres that are older than 6 years old – risk of
accident.
CAUTION
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances such as oil,
grease and fuel, which could damage them. If the tyres come into contact with
these substances, then we recommend you have this checked out in a special-
ist workshop.
Do not use alloy rims with a burnished or polished surface in winter condi-
tions - there is a risk of wheel damage (e.g. from the road grit).
Tyre pressure
Fig. 332 Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
285
Wheels
The prescribed tyre inflation is on the sticker with pictograms
A
» Fig. 332 (for
some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
Inflation pressure for half load
Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
fuel consumption and emissions)
Inflation pressure for full load
Tyre diameter in inches
This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre
pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in
the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as the declaration of con-
formity (in the so-called COC document).
Tyre pressure value on the front axle
Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Required tire pressure value for the emergency wheel
Check tyre pressures
Check the tyre pressure (including that of the emergency or spare wheel) at
least once a month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce
the higher pressure of warm tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 260.
WARNING
Do not drive with an incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident.
In the event of very fast pressure loss, e.g. in the event of sudden tyre
damage, an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop
without sudden steering movements and without any hard braking.
Note
The declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained
from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Tire wear and wheel change
Fig. 333 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change
The tyre wear increases in the following circumstances.
Incorrect tyre pressure.
Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / deceleration).
Incorrect balancing of wheels (have the wheels balanced after changing
tyres / repair or with “restlessness” on the steering).
Wheel alignment error.
Wear indicators are located in the profile of the tyres which display the per-
missible minimum tread depth » Fig. 333 -
. A tyre is to be regarded as worn
out when this indicator is flush with the tread. Markings on the walls of the
tyres with the letters “TWI” or other symbols (e.g.
) indicate the position of
the wear indicators.
The tread depth can be measured with a tread depth gauge on the ice scraper,
which is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
For uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the wheels ev-
ery 10,000 km according to the schedule » Fig. 333 - .
WARNING
Change when they are worn down to the wear indicators at the latest -
risk of accident.
Improper wheel alignment affects the driving behaviour - there is an acci-
dent.
Unusual vibrations or “pulling” of the vehicle to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If no tyre damage is evident, seek the
assistance of a specialist garage.
286
General Maintenance
Spare wheel
A full spare wheel corresponds to the wheel mounted on the vehicle in terms
of the wheel dimensions, the tire dimension and the tire type.
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warning label on the rim. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
Instructions for using a temporary spare wheel
Do not cover the signs.
Be particularly observant when driving.
Inflate the spare wheel to the maximum prescribed inflation pressure
» page 285.
WARNING
A temporary spare wheel can only be used for a short time in the event of a
breakdown and with a correspondingly careful driving method.
Spare wheel
A warning label is displayed on the rim of the temporary spare wheel. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
The emergency wheel is significantly narrower than the wheels mounted
ex-factory.
Instructions for using an emergency wheel
Do not cover the signs.
Be particularly observant when driving.
WARNING
Observe instructions on the warning sign of the emergency wheel.
Do not drive with more than one spare wheel mounted!
When driving with the temporary spare wheel at full throttle acceleration,
avoid sharp braking and fast cornering.
Do not use snow chains on the temporary spare wheel.
Tyre marking
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 235/55 R 18 100 V
235 Tyre width in mm
55 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
18 Diameter of wheel in inches
100 load index
V Speed symbol
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre
load index
95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103
Load
(In kg)
690 710 730 750 775 800 825 850 875
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fit-
ted with tyres in the category concerned
speed
symbol
M T U H V W Y
Maximum
speed
(in km/h)
130 190 200 210 240 270 300
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – There is a risk of accident.
Operating in winter conditions
All-year (or “winter”) tyres
All-season or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snow-
flake symbol
) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter condi-
tions.
287
Wheels
For the best possible handling, use all-season or “winter” tyres on all four
wheels with a minimum tread depth of 4 mm.
If using “winter” tyres, fit the summer tyres on again in good time as they pro-
vide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance, less tyre noise, and
reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice as well as at tem-
peratures above 7 °C.
Speed symbol
All-season or “winter” tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol
) of a lower speed category than stated in the technical vehicle documenta-
tion can be used, provided the permissible maximum speed of these tyres is
not exceeded even if the possible maximum speed of the vehicle is higher.
The speed limit for all-season or “winter” tyres can be set in the Infotainment
system in menu

/
Tyres
.
If the vehicle has all-season or “winter” tyres of a lower speed category then
the specified maximum speed of the vehicle (referring to tyres that have not
been delivered by the factory, a warning label with the maximum value of the
speed category provided for the mounted tyres must be fixed in the interior of
the vehicle in a constantly visible place in the driver’s field of vision. The warn-
ing label (sticker) can be replaced by setting the maximum value of the speed
category specified for the mounted tyres in Infotainment (only applies to cer-
tain countries). This specification defines the maximum vehicle speed with
mounted all-season or “winter”tyres that may not be exceeded.
Snow chains
The snow chains improve driving in wintry road conditions.
Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full wheel trims.
Snow chains must only be mounted on the front wheels and are applicable on-
ly for the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Rim size Impression depth D Tyre size
6.5J x 17 38 mm 215/65 R17
Only fit snow chains with links and locks no larger than 12 mm.
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow- and ice-free routes - the driving behaviour may
be affected and there is a risk of a puncture.
288
General Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment and self-help
Emergency equipment
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
Fig. 334 Placing of the first-aid kit and the warning triangle: Ver-
sion 1/version 2
The following information applies for the first aid kit and warning triangle from
the ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Placement of the warning triangle - version 1
The first aid kit can be mounted on the right side of the luggage compartment
and secured using a clamping band » Fig. 334 -
,
Placement of the warning triangle - version 2
The first aid kit can be stowed in the storage compartment to the right under
the variable loading floor and is secured using a clamping band » Fig. 334 - .
Placing of the warning triangle
The warning triangle can be stored in the recess under the loading edge
» Fig. 334. Before it is taken out, the flooring or the variable loading floor has
to be raised if necessary.
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Placement of reflective vest
Fig. 335
Stowage compartment for the
reflective vest in the front door
The reflective vest can be stowed in the stowage compartment
A
inside the
storage compartment of the front door » Fig. 335.
It is possible to store the reflective vests for the passengers on the rear seat in
the storage compartment in the rear doors.
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 336
Release the fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the front
passenger's seat.
To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two belts
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 336 and remove the fire extinguisher.
To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
The Owner´s Manual is fitted next to the fire extinguisher.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the
correct function of the device is not guaranteed.
289
Emergency equipment and self-help
WARNING
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 337
Vehicle tool kit
The box containing the vehicle tool kit is located in the storage compartment
for the spare wheel, and can be secured with a tape depending on the equip-
ment fitted.
Depending on the vehicle configuration, it may not contain all the compo-
nents listed in the on-board tool kit.
Adapter for anti-theft wheel bolts
Towing eye
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
Jack with sign
Crank for the jack
Wheel wrench
Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
Breakdown kit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehi-
cle. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with this
– there is a risk of injury.
Always securely stow the tool in the respective box and make sure that it
is secured to the spare wheel using the tape - there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box -
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the box.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
changing a wheel on the road.
As far as possible, park the vehicle far away from the traffic flow - find a
place with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission, engage 1st gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Switch on the parking brake.
Position the hazard warning system and the warning triangle at the prescri-
bed distance.
All the occupants should get out of the vehicle. The passengers should not
stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for in-
stance) while the wheel is being changed.
Uncouple any trailers.
Changing a wheel
Take out the emergency or spare wheel » page 291.
Remove the full wheel trim » page 292 or caps » page 293.
Loosen the wheel bolts » page 293 » .
290
Do-it-yourself
Jack up the vehicle» page 294 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of
the ground.
Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
Remove the wheel carefully.
Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“alter-
nating crosswise”)» page 293.
Replace the wheel trim » page 292and the caps » page 293.
When fitting a wheel with a unidirectional tyre, ensure that the direction of ro-
tation is correct » page 285.
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If the screws are corroded and
difficult to move, then these must be replaced.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn) while the vehicle is not
jacked up. Otherwise, the wheel could come off and fall down – there is a
risk of injury.
Under no circumstances grease or oil the wheel bolts - risk of accident!
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, the following work must be carried out.
Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage
compartment and secure with a locking screw.
Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the band.
Check and, if necessary, adjust the tyre pressure on the assembled wheel,
and, for vehicle with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values
in the system » page 260.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked with a torque wrench
as soon as possible. The prescribed tightening torque is 140 Nm.
Replace the damaged tyre. It is not recommended to repair the tyre.
WARNING
A tightening torque which is too high can damage the bolts and threads
and this can result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on
the rim. Too low tightening torque, the wheels may fall off while driving -
risk of an accident. Therefore, drive cautiously and only at a moderate
speed until the tightening torque has been checked.
Removing/stowing the emergency or spare wheel
Fig. 338
Take out wheel
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw.
Take out wheel
Fold down the backrests of the third seat row (applies to the seven-seat ver-
sion) » ,
Lift the floor covering and fold upward the variable loading floor and flooring
covering.
At the same time, pull the two release loops of the third seat row and lift the
seats (applies to the seven-seat version).
Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
Unscrew the locking screw in the direction of arrow » Fig. 338 and the re-
move the wheel.
Store wheel away
Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
Screw the locking screw in the direction opposite of arrow until it stops
» Fig. 338.
Replace the box with the tool kit into the wheel and secure it with the tape.
Fold back the floor covering or insert the variable loading floor and fold back
the floor covering.
291
Emergency equipment and self-help
Restore the original position of the third seat row (applies to the seven-seat
version).
CAUTION
When handling the wheel, do not put this down on the lining parts in the area
next to the wheel, otherwise there is a risk of damaging these parts.
Before lowering the seats, the buckle tongues of the seat belts are to unlock
(the straps must be completely rolled up under the trim of the rear body pillar)
- otherwise there is a risk of damage to the locks, lock tongues as well as the
seats.
Removing/stowing wheel in vehicles with sound system
Fig. 339
Take out wheel
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw.
Take out wheel
Fold down the backrests of the third seat row (applies to the seven-seat ver-
sion) » ,
Lift the floor covering and fold upward the variable loading floor and flooring
covering.
At the same time, pull the two release loops of the third seat row and lift the
seats (applies to the seven-seat version).
Press the latch
A
on the holder in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 339.
Press the latch in the direction of arrow
2
and pull out the holder in the di-
rection of arrow
3
.
Unscrew the lock nut in the direction of arrow
4
.
Remove the bass loudspeaker.
Remove the wheel.
Store wheel away
Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
Insert the bass loudspeaker.
Tighten the locking screw in the opposite direction of arrow
4
until it stops
» Fig. 339.
Insert the connector in the bass loudspeaker.
Secure the latch
A
in the opposite direction to arrow
1
.
Fold back the floor covering or insert the variable loading floor and fold back
the floor covering.
Restore the original position of the third seat row (applies to the seven-seat
version).
CAUTION
Before lowering the seats, the buckle tongues of the seat belts are to unlock
(the straps must be completely rolled up under the trim of the rear body pillar)
- otherwise there is a risk of damage to the locks, lock tongues as well as the
seats.
Full wheel trim
Removing the trim
Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims at the edge of one of the
ventilation openings in the full wheel trim.
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
Installing the trim
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference locks
correctly in place.
The back of the wheel trim supplied by the factory or from the ŠKODA Origi-
nal Accessories shows the position for the anti-theft wheel bolt. When using
the anti-theft wheel bolt, this is to be fitted in this point » .
WARNING
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
A sufficient air supply may not be able to be guaranteed with other wheel
trims to cool the braking system – Otherwise there is a risk of an accident.
292
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
If the wheel trim is set outside the position marked for the anti-theft wheel
bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel trim.
Use only manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – otherwise there
is a risk of damaging the trim.
Note
We recommend that you use hub caps from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 340
Remove the cap
To remove the cap, insert the extraction pliers up to the stop on the cap and
pull this in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 340.
To install, insert the cap up to the stop on the wheel bolt.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 341
Anti-theft wheel bolt and at-
tachment
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect the wheels from theft. The upper section
B
» Fig. 341 must be used to loosen/tighten these.
Insert the upper section
B
on the anti-theft wheel bolt
A
until it stops.
Insert the wrench on the attachment
B
until it stops and loose/tighten the
wheel bolt.
Removing the upper section.
The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the
vehicle in case of a possible wheel change!
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
the wheel trim.
Note
We recommend that you retain the label with the code number. A replacement
upper section can be acquired from ŠKODA original parts based on this.
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 342
Loosening the wheel bolts
Push the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated
upper section for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 341 on page 293.
To loosen the screws, hold the wrench end and turn the screw about one
turn in the direction of arrow » Fig. 342.
To tighten the screws, hold the wrench end and turn the screw against the
direction of the arrow » Fig. 342, until it is tight.
WARNING
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing - risk of accident.
293
Emergency equipment and self-help
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 343
Jacking points for the jack
Fig. 344
Attach lifting jack
Before the vehicle is raised, the safety instructions must be observed » .
Use the jack from the tool kit to raise the vehicle. Position the jack at the jack-
ing point closest to the wheel to be replaced.
The runner connectors for the jack are located directly below the marking on
the lower loading edge of the vehicle » Fig. 343.
Insert the crank
5
into the mount on the jack
4
» page 290.
Support the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack is located in a vertical position at the jacking point
» Fig. 344 - .
Use the crank to raise the jack until its claw encloses the bar » Fig. 344 - .
Continue to lift the vehicle until the wheel is just off the floor.
WARNING
Observe the following instructions, otherwise there is risk of injury.
Secure the vehicle from unexpectedly rolling away.
WARNING (Continued)
Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
Provide a wide and stable base under the jack on loose surfaces (e.g.
such as gravel).
Create a non-slip base (e.g. a rubber floor mat) under the jack on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
Never position any body parts, such as arms or legs, under the vehicle,
while the vehicle is raised with a lifting jack.
When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the
lower beam – otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Puncture repair kit
Introduction
The following information applies to the factory-fitted puncture repair kit.
Use the puncture repair kit to seal tyre punctures with a diameter of up to
about 4 mm.
Performing a repair with the breakdown kit not at all intended to replace a
permanent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist
garage.
Immediately replace the tyre that was repaired using the puncture repair kit, or
consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails
etc.).
Do not use the puncture repair kit in the following instances.
The rim is damaged.
The outdoor temperature is below the minimum temperature indicated in
the instruction manual of the tyre filling bottle with sealant.
Tyre punctures of more than 4 mm.
There is damage to the tyre wall.
The expiration date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
294
Do-it-yourself
WARNING
If the sealant comes into contact with skin, wash the affected area imme-
diately.
Observe the instructions provided in the puncture repair kit manufactur-
er's instructions for use.
Description of puncture repair kit
Fig. 345
Description of puncture repair kit
Read and observe on page 295 first.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment.
Sticker with speed designation “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph”
Valve remover
Inflation hose with plug
Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
Tyre inflation hose
Button for the tyre pressure reduction
Tyre inflation pressure indicator
12 volt cable plug
ON and OFF switch
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tyre inflation bottle with sealing agent
Replacement valve insert
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
Preparing to use the puncture repair kit
Read and observe on page 295 first.
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
performing a wheel repair the road.
As far as possible, park the vehicle far away from the traffic flow - find a
place with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission, engage 1st gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Switch on the parking brake.
Position the hazard warning system and the warning triangle at the prescri-
bed distance.
All the occupants should get out of the vehicle. The passengers should not
stand on the road (instead they should remain behind a crash barrier, for in-
stance) while the wheel is being repaired.
Uncouple any trailers.
Sealing and inflating tyres
Read and observe on page 295 first.
Sealing
Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
Insert the valve remover
2
» Fig. 345 on page 295 on the valve insert, so
that the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover.
Unscrew the valve insert and lay it on a clean surface (e.g. cloth, paper etc.).
Forcefully shake bottle
10
several times.
Firmly screw the inflation hose
3
onto the tyre inflater bottle
10
. The film
on the cap is pierced automatically.
Remove the plug from the inflation hose
3
and plug the open end fully onto
the tyre valve.
10
11
295
Emergency equipment and self-help
Hold the bottle
10
with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve.
Screw in the valve insert using the valve remover
2
.
Inflating
Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose
5
» Fig. 345 on page 295 firm-
ly onto the tyre valve.
For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Start the engine.
Plug the connector
8
into 12 volt socket » page 104.
Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch
9
.
Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar is reached, turn off the air com-
pressor. Observe the maximum running time of the air compressor according
to the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer » .
If you cannot reach an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar, unscrew the tyre inflation
hose
5
from the tyre valve.
Drive the vehicle approx. 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the seal-
ing agent to “distribute” in the tyre.
Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
5
back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
Stick the corresponding sticker
1
on the dashboard in the driver's field of
view.
Once a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0 – 2.5 bar is achieved, continue the journey
at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
If the tire does not inflate to at least 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Stop driving! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot as the tyre is be-
ing inflated – risk of burning.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor at the latest after the running time according to
the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer has elapsed – otherwise there is
the risk of compressor damage! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
nutes before switching it on again.
Information for driving with repaired tyres
Read and observe on page 295 first.
The inflation pressure of the repaired tyre must be checked after driving for 10
minutes.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or less
The tyre cannot be properly sealed with the breakdown kit. Do not drive
the vehicle! Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the tyre inflation pressure is 1.3 bar or more
Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 285.
Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre. The following guidelines must be observed.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
Jump-starting
Introduction
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 277.
When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
served » page 282.
A discharged vehicle battery may already freeze at temperatures just be-
low 0 °C. If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the bat-
tery of another vehicle – risk of explosion!
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an acid level that is too low – risk
of explosion and caustic burns!
296
Do-it-yourself
Start using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 346 Jump-starting: - discharged battery, - power-supplying
battery/ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
Fig. 347
Positive terminal on vehicles
with the vehicle battery in the
luggage compartment
Read and observe
on page 296 first.
If it is not possible to start the engine due to a discharged vehicle battery, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. Only use jump-start
cables which have an adequately large cross-section and insulated terminal
clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12V. The capacity (Ah) of the
current-giving battery must not be significantly less than the capacity of the
discharged battery in your vehicle.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
Attach clamp
1
to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
Attach clamp
2
to the positive terminal of the current-giving battery.
Attach clamp
3
to the negative terminal of the current-giving battery.
For vehicles with the START-STOP system, secure the clamp
4
to the
ground point of the engine
A
» Fig. 346.
For vehicles without the START-STOP system, secure the clamp
4
to a solid
metal part that is firmly attached to the engine block or secure to the engine
block directly.
Installation location of the positive terminal and the earth point in vehicles
with the vehicle battery in the luggage compartment
The positive terminal
B
is located under a cover in the engine compartment
» Fig. 347.
Open the cover in the direction of the arrow.
Clamp the positive terminal of the jumper cable to the position
B
» Fig. 347.
Clamp the negative terminal of the jumper cable to the earth point of the en-
gine
A
» Fig. 346 or on a metal part firmly connected to the engine block or
directly on the engine block.
Starting engine
Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
Start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure
and repeat after half a minute.
Remove the jump start cables in the reverse order as attachment.
WARNING
Never clamp the jump-start cable to the negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery - danger of explosion.
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – risk of short circuit!
The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehi-
cle – risk of short circuit!
Route the jumper cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts in
the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle dam-
age.
297
Emergency equipment and self-help
Towing the vehicle
Information about the towing process
Fig. 348 Braided tow rope / Spiral tow rope
For towing using a tow rope, use only a braided synthetic fibre rope » Fig. 348
-
» .
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to thetowing eyes at the front
» page 298,towing eyes at the rear» page 299or to thetowing device of the
trailer device » page 262.
Conditions for towing.
Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
if it is not possible to tow in the vehicle in the way described or if the tow-
ing distance is greater than 50 km.
Driver of the tow vehicle
On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
Only then approach correctly when the rope is taut.
Driver of the towed vehicle
If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. Operate the
brake booster and power steering only if the engine is running, otherwise the
brake pedal must be depressed more strongly and more power has to be di-
rected to the steering.
If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the
steering wheel is not locked and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Always keep the tow rope taut during the towing procedure.
WARNING
Wound tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 348- , the towing
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle - risk of accident.
Ensure tow rope is not twisted - risk of accident.
CAUTION
Do not tow-start the engine – risk of damaging the engine! The battery from
another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 296, Jump-starting.
In the case of off-road towing manoeuvres, for both vehicles there is the risk
that the fastening parts could be overloaded and damaged.
Note
We recommend that you use the tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Front towing eye
Fig. 349 Remove protective grille / install towing eye
298
Do-it-yourself
Removing/inserting protective grille
To remove, insert the clamp for taking off the full wheel trims in the recess in
the protective grille and remove the protective grille in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 349.
To insert, insert the protective grille in the opening and push in gently. The
protective grille must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 349 until the stop» .
Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
To remove, unscrew the towing against the direction of arrow
2
.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may
break during the towing.
Towing eye rear
Fig. 350 Remove cap / install towing eye
Remove/insert cap
To remove, press on the cap in the direction of the arrow
1
and remove this
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 350.
To insert, insert the cap in arrow range
1
and then press on the opposite
edge of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
To install, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of arrow
3
» Fig. 350 until the stop» .
Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
To remove, unscrew the towing against the direction of arrow
3
.
Vehicles with a tow hitch
For vehicles with factory-fitted towing device, at the back there is no mount
for a screw-in towing eye. Use the detachable ball rod for towing » page 262,
Hitch.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be tightened, otherwise the towing eye may
break during the towing.
Remote control and removable light - changing the battery
Introduction
CAUTION
The replacement battery/batteries must comply with the original specifica-
tion.
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the rechargeable batter-
ies.
Note
We recommend having the faulty battery/batteries replaced by a specialist ga-
rage.
299
Emergency equipment and self-help
Key with fold-out key bit
Fig. 351 Open the cover/remove the battery
Read and observe on page 299 first.
Fold out the key bit.
Press off the battery cover
A
» Fig. 351 with your thumb or by using a flat
screwdriver in region
B
.
Open the battery in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow
2.
Hold any button on the key for about 5 s.
Insert the new battery.
Insert the battery cover
A
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the key after replacing the battery » page 65.
KESSY key
Fig. 352
Remove emergency key
Fig. 353 Open the cover/remove the battery
Read and observe on page 299 first.
Unlock the locking lug
A
in the direction of arrow
1
and remove the emer-
gency key
B
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 352.
Insert a narrow screwdriver (3 mm wide) approximately 12 mm into the
opening in the direction of arrow
3
» Fig. 353.
Turn the screwdriver in the direction of arrow
4
until the battery cover is
released.
Push the battery cover
C
in the direction of arrow
5
.
Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow
6.
Hold any button on the key for about 5 s.
Insert the new battery.
Insert the battery cover
C
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the key after replacing the battery » page 65.
300
Do-it-yourself
Remote control of the auxiliary heating
Fig. 354 Open the cover/remove the battery
Read and observe on page 299 first.
Use a thin screwdriver to remove the cover
A
in the area
B
» Fig. 354.
Open the cover in the direction of arrow
1
and push out in the direction of
arrow
2
.
Use the screwdriver to remove and replace the battery in the area
C
.
Insert the battery cover in the opposite direction to arrow
2
until it audibly
clicks into place.
Removable light
Fig. 355
Locking clip on the battery cov-
er
Read and observe on page 299 first.
Lever off the cover for the rechargeable batteries with a narrow and pointed
object from the area of the lock clips
A
» Fig. 355.
Replace the batteries.
Insert the cover for the rechargeable batteries and press it down until it
clicks into place.
CAUTION
If an incorrect battery type is used or a non-rechargeable battery, there is a
risk of damaging the light and the vehicle's electrical system.
Emergency unlocking / unlocking of doors
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Fig. 356
Handle on the driver's door: Open/unlock and lock cover
Fig. 357
Handle on the driver's door: Key with fold/out key bit/KESSY
key
The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the
key via the lock cylinder.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 356.
Release the door handle.
301
Emergency equipment and self-help
For vehicles with LHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing upwards » Fig. 357 - into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock the
vehicle.
For vehicles with RHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing downwards into the lock and unlock/lock the vehicle.
On vehicles with the KESSY system, insert the emergency key with the han-
dle facing downwards » Fig. 357 - into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock
the vehicle.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Replace the cover.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
ing/unlocking.
Locking the door without locking cylinders
Fig. 358
Left door/right door:
Open the corresponding door.
In vehicles with the panel
A
, remove this panel » Fig. 358.
Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (sprung po-
sition).
Replace the cover
A
.
After closing, the door is locked.
Unlock the boot lid
Fig. 359
Unlocking the door
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside.
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim » Fig. 359 as
far as the latch.
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Selector lever emergency unlocking
Fig. 360 Remove the cover/release the selector lever
Switch on the parking brake.
Open the stowage compartment in the front centre console.
Insert a slotted screwdriver or similar tool into the gap in the area of arrow
1
» Fig. 360 and lift the cover in arrow direction
2
.
Pull on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow
3
, simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position
N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
302
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the
shift lever environment.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Introduction
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons.
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 361
Setting the service position for
the wiper arms
Fig. 362
Replace windscreen wiper blade
Read and observe on page 303 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blade, put the windscreen wiper arms
into the service position.
Setting the service position
Switch the ignition on and off again.
Within 10 seconds, push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 361 and
hold for approximately 2 seconds.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 362.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch
A
in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow
3
until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
attached.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Turn on the ignition and press the lever into the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 361.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.
303
Emergency equipment and self-help
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 363 Replace the rear window wiper blade
Read and observe on page 303 first.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 363.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Hold the wiper arm and press the safety catch
A
in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Push the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction of the arrow
3
until it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly
attached.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Fig. 364
Blown fuse
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa-
ble by the molten metal strip » Fig. 364
/
.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 277.
CAUTION
Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, then seek the assistance of
a specialist garage.
Do “not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger ones - it can
cause a fire and could damage parts of the electrical system.
Note
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
There can be several power consuming devices for one fuse. Multiple fuses
may exist for a single power consuming device.
304
Do-it-yourself
Fuses in the dashboard- LHD
Fig. 365 Storage compartment on the driver's side
Read and observe and on page 304 first.
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the driver's side.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Open the storage box on the driver side.
Press the latch
A
in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 365 open the compartment
in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com-
partment » Fig. 368 on page 307.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Stow the clamp back in the original position.
Close the compartment by pressing in arrow direction
3
until you hear it
click.
Fuses in the dashboard- RHD
Fig. 366 Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Read and observe and on page 304 first.
The fuse box is located behind the storage compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
Fold down the storage compartment and replace the fuse
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Open the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
Unlock the brake rod in the direction of arrow
1
and remove in the direction
of arrow
2
» Fig. 366.
Unlock the stop pad
A
in the direction of arrow
3
and the compartment
folds down in the direction of arrow
4
.
Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box in the engine com-
partment » Fig. 368 on page 307.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Stow the clamp back in the original position.
Fold back the storage compartment
Raise the tray in the opposite direction of arrow
4
.
Overcome resistance of stop pad
A
.
Insert the brake rod against the direction of arrow
2
and lock against the
direction of arrow
1
.
The compartment closes (increased force is required to close it) until it clicks
into place.
305
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuse assignment in the dashboard
Fig. 367
Fuses
Read and observe and on page 304 first.
No. Consumer
1 SCR (AdBlue
®
)
2 Heated steering wheel
3 Not assigned
4 Anti-theft alarm
5 Databus
6
Automatic gearbox, ignition key lock (vehicle with automatic trans-
mission)
7
Air conditioning, receiver for the remote control for the auxiliary
heating, heated rear window, heated windscreen, rear air condition-
ing system, tyre pressure monitoring
8
Light switch, rain sensor, parking brake, ambient lighting, sensor of
the alarm system, headlight
9 Operating lever underneath the steering wheel
10 Infotainment screen
11 Light - left
12 Infotainment
No. Consumer
13 Left side belt tensioner
14 Air blower for air conditioning,heating
15 Electric steering lock
16 USB ports, diagnostics connector, Phonebox
17 Instrument cluster, emergency call
18 Reversing camera
19 KESSY system
20 SCR (AdBlue
®
), braking system
21 All-wheel drive
22 Tow hitch
23 Panoramic tilting / sliding sunroof
24 Light - right
25
Central locking- front and rear door left, power window - left, exte-
rior mirrors left - heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror sur-
face
26 Heated front seats
27 Interior lighting
28 Tow hitch
29 Not assigned
30 Shock absorber setting
31 Opening the boot lid
32 Park Assist, Manoeuvre Assist, Assist for “blind spot”monitoring
33 airbag
34
Air conditioning, reversing light switch, mirror with automatic dim-
ming, seat heating, parking brake, light switches, bar with switches,
electric auxiliary heating, USB ports
35 Diagnostic connector, camera, radar sensor
36 LED spotlight - right
37 LED spotlight - left
38 Tow hitch
306
Do-it-yourself
No. Consumer
39
Central locking- front and rear door right, power window - right,
exterior mirrors right - heating, fold-in function, setting the mirror
surface
40 12 volt sockets
41 Right side belt tensioner
42
Luggage compartment cover lock, headlight washers, front and
rear window washer
43 Music amplifier
44 Tow hitch
45 Electrical operation of driver's seat
46 230 volt sockets
47 Rear window wiper
48 Sport sound generator
49 Engine starting, clutch pedal switch
50 Not assigned
51 Heating of the rear seats
52 Heated front seats
53 Heated rear window
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 368 Fuse box cover: Removing the cover / Plastic clip for fuses
Read and observe and on page 304 first.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
of arrow
1
and remove the cover in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 368.
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Remove the plastic clip under the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 368.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Stow the clamp back in the original position.
Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
CAUTION
The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
of damage to the vehicle!
Fuse assignment in engine compartment
Fig. 369
Fuses
Read and observe and on page 304 first.
No. Consumer
1 ESC, parking brake
2 ESC
3 Engine control system
307
Fuses and light bulbs
No. Consumer
4
Radiator fan, control valve for fuel pressure, electric auxiliary heat-
ing, glow plug system, air mass meter, braking system, engine com-
ponents, oil level and oil temperature encoder
5 Ignition, fuel pump, engine components
6 Brake sensor
7
Coolant pump, exhaust flap, crankcase ventilation, engine compo-
nents
8 Lambda probe, NOx sensor and particle sensor
9 Coolant pump, ignition, engine components
10 Fuel pump
11 Additional electrical heating, heated windscreen
12 Electrical auxiliary heating
13 Oil pump for automatic gearbox
14 Not assigned
15 Horn
16 Ignition
17 ESC, engine control unit, main relay coil
18 Databus, battery data module
19 Windscreen wipers
20 Not assigned
21 Automatic gearbox
22 Engine control system
23 Starter
24 Electrical auxiliary heating
31 Not assigned
32 Not assigned
33 Automatic gearbox
34 Not assigned
35 Windscreen wipers
36 Not assigned
37 Aux. heating
38 Not assigned
Bulbs
Introduction
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi-
ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs or LED lights must be replaced by a specialist garage.
For this reason, we recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or
seeking other expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 277.
Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty
by other road users.
H7 and H8 bulbs are pressurised and may burst when changing the bulb -
risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
damage to the headlights.
Note
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi-
cle.
308
Do-it-yourself
Bulb arrangement in the halogen headlights
Fig. 370
Left headlight
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Bulb arrangement » Fig. 370
Low beam
Flashing
Main beam and side lights
Fog lights
Change light bulb for main beam light and parking lights
Fig. 371
Changing the bulb for the main beam
A
B
C
D
Fig. 372 Change the light bulb for the parking light
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Remove / insert the bulb for main beam
Remove the protective cap
C
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 371.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the holder so that the lug
A
on the holder snaps into
the groove on the bulb.
Insert the holder with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
Turn the holder with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Fit the protective cap
C
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Remove / insert the bulb for parking light
Remove the protective cap
C
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Remove the holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 372.
Hold the housing containing the bulb in area
A
.
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insert a new bulb in the holder until it stops.
Insert the housing with bulb into the headlight again.
Fit the protective cap
C
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
309
Fuses and light bulbs
Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light
Fig. 373 Changing the bulb for the front turn signal light
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Remove the holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 373.
Hold the holder with the bulb in the locations shown by the arrows.
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insert a new bulb in the holder until it stops.
Slide the holder with the bulb with the fixing lug
B
upwards so that it fits
into the recess on the reflector.
Fit the protective cap
B
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Changing the bulb for the low beam
Fig. 374 Changing the bulb for the low beam
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Remove the protective cap
A
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 374.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the connector so that the lug
A
on the connector
snaps into the groove on the bulb.
Insert the connector with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
2
.
Turn the connector with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Fit the protective cap
A
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
Fig. 375
Remove plastic cover
Fig. 376
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
To replace the bulb for the fog lists, remove the cover of the front wheel arch.
310
Do-it-yourself
Remove the cover
Set the front wheels so that the respective cover is accessible » Fig. 375.
Insert the clamp for removing the full wheel covers into the recess in the
cover.
Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow
1
.
Replacing the light bulb
Remove the protective cap
D
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
2
as far as the
stop » Fig. 376.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
3
.
Press the latches on the connector in the direction of arrow
4
.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
5
.
Attach the connector to the new holder with the light bulb.
Insert a new holder with the bulb in the headlamp and turn it in the direction
of arrow
2
as far as the stop.
Fit the protective cap
D
» Fig. 370 on page 309.
Insert cover
Insert and push the cover into the corresponding opening » Fig. 375. The
cover must engage securely.
Removing/installing tail light
Fig. 377
Removing light / pulling out connector
Fig. 378
Fitting the lamp
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Removing
Open the boot lid.
Remove the respective grille
A
in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 377.
311
Fuses and light bulbs
Unscrew bolt
B
in the direction of arrow
2
.
Hold the light and carefully remove in the direction of arrow
3
.
Press the latch
C
on the holder in the direction of the arrow
4
.
Press the securing lug in the direction of arrow
5
and pull out the plug in the
direction of arrow
6
.
Fitting
Slide the plug in the opposite direction of the arrow
6
» Fig. 377 into the
light.
Secure the latch
A
in the opposite direction to arrow
4
.
Insert the light with the openings
E
onto the studs
F
» Fig. 378 in the body
and carefully press in the light » .
Screw in bolt
B
in the opposite direction to arrow
2
» Fig. 377.
Insert the grille
A
in the associated opening in the lower area and press in
against the direction of arrow
1
.
CAUTION
When re-inserting the light, ensure that the wiring harness between the
body and the light is not jammed and the seal
D
» Fig. 378 is correctly inserted
- otherwise there is a risk of water ingress and damage to the electrical instal-
lation.
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the lamp.
Replace bulb for indicator light in the rear light
Fig. 379 Replacing bulb / installing light
Read and observe and on page 308 first.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
as far as the
stop » Fig. 379.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the faulty bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the holder in the opposite direction to arrow
3
.
Reinsert the holder with the new bulb into the lamp housing and turn in the
opposite direction to arrow
1
as far as the stop.
312
Do-it-yourself
Technical data
Technical data
Basic vehicle data
Introduction
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The listed performance values were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
The values given have been determined in accordance with the rules and con-
ditions specified in statutory or technical regulations for determining opera-
tional and technical data for motor vehicles.
The values listed are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle data
Fig. 380
Type plate
Type plate
The rating plate » Fig. 380 is located at the bottom of the B-column on the
right-hand driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle manufacturers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
1
2
3
4
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped into
the engine compartment on the right hand suspension strut dome. This num-
ber is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen
(together with a VIN bar code), and on the type plate.
The VIN can also be displayed in the

/
Events
menu.
Engine number
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents, field 17.
Maximum permissible towed weight
The listed maximum allowable trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the vehicle's climbing
power. Therefore, for every additional 1000 m in height (or part), the maxi-
mum permissible towed weight must be reduced by 10%.
The towed weight is made up of the actual weights of the loaded towing vehi-
cle and the loaded trailer.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of acci-
dent and damage!
Operating weight
This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operat-
ing weight without any equipment added that would also increase the weight
(e.g. emergency or spare wheel etc.). This includes 75 kg driver's weight, the
weight of the operating fluids and the on-board tool kit and a fuel tank filled to
min. 90%.
5
6
313
Technical data
Operating weight
Engine Transmission
Operating weight (kg)
Five-seat version
Seven-seat ver-
sion
1.4 l/110 kW TSI
MG 4x4 1626 1669
DSG 1572 1615
1.5 l/110 kW TSI
MG 1549 1592
DSG 1582 1625
DSG 4x4 1661 1704
2.0 l/132 kW TSI
DSG 4x4 (EU6) 1695 1738
DSG 4x4 (EU4) 1691 1734
2.0 l/140 kW TSI DSG 4x4 1711 1754
2.0 l/85 kW TDI CR MG 1651 1694
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR
MG 4x4 1725 1768
DSG 1686 1729
DSG 4x4 (EU6) 1762 1805
DSG 4x4 (EU5) 1709 1752
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1707 1750
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 1775 1818
2.0 l/176 kW TDI CR DSG 4x4 -
a)
-
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle at a specialist
garage.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate maximum payload from the differ-
ence between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
The weight of the passengers.
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
The weight of the roof load including the roof rack system.
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 262.
Measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The valid specifications for your vehicle can be found in the technical vehicle
documentation (e.g. vehicle approval documentation, the COC document) or
at a ŠKODA partner.
Note
The emission and fuel consumption values have been determined in accord-
ance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements
for determining operational and technical data for motor vehicles.
Depending on the range of equipment, style of driving, traffic situation,
weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values may deviate
from the indicated values.
314
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 381
Vehicle dimensions
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions for operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 381 Specification Five-seat version Seven-seat version
A
Height 1660 1659
B
Front track 1586
C
Width 1882
D
Rear track 1576
E
Width including exterior mirror 2087
F
Clearance 193- 191
a)
192- 191
a)
G
Wheel base 2791
H
Length 4697
a)
Applies to 4x4 vehicles.
315
Technical data
Overhang angle
Fig. 382
Overhang angle
Angle » Fig. 382
Approach angle
Departure angle
The values shown indicate the maximum incline of an embankment, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without collision of the bumper or under-
body. The values listed represent the maximum axle load at the front and rear.
Overhang angle (°)
Approach angle Departure angle
Five-seat version
Seven-seat ver-
sion
Five-seat version Seven-seat version
19.4 19.3 15.9 15.6
A
B
316
Technical data
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
Introduction
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
The exhaust gas standard is specified in the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of conformity (in so-called COC document). The
declaration of conformity (the so-called. COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA Partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
1.4 l/110 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1395
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission MG 4x4 DSG MG 4x4 DSG
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
198
(5)
199
(5)
196
(5)
198
(5)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.8 9.7 9.9 9.9
1.5 l/110 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 110/5000-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 250/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1498
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission MG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4 MG 4x4 DSG DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
200
(5)
198
(6)
-
a)
200
(5)
198
(6)
-
a)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.8 9.8 -
a)
9.9 9.9 -
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
317
Technical data
2.0 l/132 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 132/3900-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 320/1400-3940
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1984
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
207
(5)
205
(5)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.2 8.4
2.0 l/140 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 140/4200-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 320/1500-4100
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1984
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
211
(5)
210
(5)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 7.5 7.7
2.0 l/85 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 85/2750-4500
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 320/1700-2500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1968
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
-
a)
-
a)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) -
a)
-
a)
a)
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
318
Technical data
2.0 l/110 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 110/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 340/1750-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1968
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission MG 4x4 DSG
DSG 4x4
(EU6)
DSG 4x4
(EU5)
MG 4x4 DSG
DSG 4x4
(EU6)
DSG 4x4
(EU5)
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
197
(6)
198
(6)
194
(6)
194
(7)
196
(6)
198
(6)
193
(6)
192
(6)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.7 9.8 9.8 10.0 9.9 10.0 10.0 10.3
2.0 l/130 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 130/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 380/1750-3000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1968
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
205
(7)
203
(7)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.6 8.8
2.0 l/140 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 140/3500-4000
Maximum torque (Nm at rpm) 400/1750-3250
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4- 1968
Vehicle version Five-seat version Seven-seat version
Transmission DSG 4x4 DSG 4x4
Top speed (km/h)
with the mentioned gear engaged
210
(7)
209
(7)
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 8.4 8.6
319
Technical data
2.0 l/176 kW TDI CR engine
The valueswere not available at the time of going to press.
320
Technical data
Index
A
A2DP/AVRCP 166
Abort route guidance 197
ABS 44, 218
ACC 49
see Automatic Distance Control 244
Accessories 267
Activation of online services 14
Active steering assist (DSR) 218
Adaptive chassis (DCC) 50, 251
Adaptive cruise control
Operation 245
Set/change the desired speed 247
Start control
246
Warning light 42
Adaptive Cruise Control 49
automatic stopping and starting 245
Malfunctions 248
Overtaking
248
Radar sensor 216
Setting the distance 247
Special driving situations 247
Stop/resume control 246
Trailer towing
248
AdBlue
275
Check level 276
indicator light 48
refill 276
Additional keypad languages 138, 145
additional window
184
Adjusting
Steering wheel 21
Adjusting seats manually 86
Advice on tyre/wheel usage 285
aim
Favourite 187
Flagged destination 187
Online goals 187
own goal 189
saved destination 187
search 184
Telephone contact 187
vCard 187
Air-conditioning system
Air outlet vents 122
Airbag 25
Adjustments and impairments on the airbag
system 268
Deactivation 28
Deployment 26
Warning light 44
Airbag system 25
Air conditioning
117
Air Care 121
Air distribution control 121
Climatronic 118
Manual air conditioning 118
Air distribution control
121
Air outlet vents 122
Alarm 66
Trailer 266
All season tyres 287
Alphanumeric with keyboard 130
Alternative routes
143
Ambient lighting 80
Amundsen
external module 128
Infotainment description 127
Android Auto
177
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 218
Anti-theft alarm system 66
Trailer 266
Anti-theft wheel bolts 293
APN 139, 167
Apple CarPlay 178
applications
Disclaimer 126
Area view 231
Operating principle 232
View of the front camera 234
View of the rear camera back 234
View of the side cameras 234
Views and functional surfaces 233
AreaView 231
Armrest
Front 88
Second seat row 91
Ashtray 106
ASR 218
Assistant for emergencies 257
Assist systems
216
AT THE 148
Audio source 153
Auto check control
Vehicle condition 52
Auto Hold
46, 209
Auto Hold function 46, 209
Automatic consumer shutdown 282
Automatic distance control
activate 246
Operational overview 246
Automatic Distance Control
244
Settings in Infotainment 244
Automatic drive
Kickdown 213
Selector lever 212
Selector lever emergency unlocking
302
Automatic driving light control 75
321
Index
Automatic gearbox
Launch control 214
Malfunction 47
Manual shifting on the multifunction steering
wheel 213
Release gear selector lever 212
Selector lever lock 212
Start and run 213
Tiptronic 213
Warning light 47
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment 131
Automatic transmission 211
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion) 122
In infotainment 124
Radio remote control 124
set to 123
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 215
B
Bass tones 137
Battery
Changing batteries for the removable light 301
Changing in key 299, 300
Replace the battery in the remote control in
the auxiliary heating
301
Belts 22
Belt tensioners 24
reversible 25
Blanket 104
Blind spot monitoring assistant
Activation / deactivation
227
Bluetooth
A2DP / AVRCP 139
Name 139
on / off
139
Paired external devices 139
Profiles 166
rSAP 164
Set 146
set to 139, 141
Set to 139
Switch on/off 146
Update 136, 139
Updates 146
Visibility 139, 146
Bluetooth Player 155
Bluetooth® update 164
Bolero
external module 128
Infotainment description 127
Bonnet 278
Boot lid 67
Automatic locking 67
Open/close 67, 68
See boot lid 67
Brake Assist (HBA) 219
Brake booster
208
Brake fluid 281
Check 281
specification 281
Brake linings
Warning light
46
Brake pads
new 208
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Warning light 46
Brakes
Brake booster
208
Brake fluid 281
Braking and stabilisation systems 217
Information on braking 208
Parking brake 208
Running in
214
Warning light 42
Brake system 217
Breakdown call 168
Broadcasting 148
Bulbs
Replacing 308
Buttons on the driver door
Electric windows 70
C
Call list
Call list 170
CAR 203
Car battery
automatic consumer shutdown 282
Car care 268
Interior
272
Car computer
see multifunction display
54
Care and maintenance 267
Care Connect 17
Cargo element 113
Car park
186
Carrier 116
CarStick 173
Car wash 268
CD 153
cellphone
Disclaimer 126
Central locking 60
Problems 65
Central locking button 62
Changing
Batteries for the removable light
301
Battery 299, 300
Vehicle battery 283
Wheels 290
Windscreen wiper blades 304
Changing a wheel
290
322
Index
Changing gear
Selector lever 212
Tiptronic 213
Charging a vehicle battery 283
Check
Brake fluid 281
Engine oil 279
Oil level 279
Checking
Battery condition 283
Coolant 280
Children and safety 29
Child safety lock 65
Child seat 29
Classification 31
I-Size 34
Installation location 31, 34
ISOFIX 32, 33
on the front passenger seat
30, 31
Place of installation 33
TOP TETHER 34
Cigarette lighter 107
Cleaning the vehicle
Interior
272
Outside 270
Washing 269
Climatronic 117
air distribution control 121
Automatic operation 120
Operate in Infotainment
120
Operating elements 118
Clock
Change display 131
Clothes hook 102
Cockpit
37
Lighting 78
Columbus
external module 128
infotainment Description 126
Comfort indicating 75
COMING HOME 77
compartments 95
Compatible sources
Pictures 158
Video DVD 160
Component protection 268
Computer
see multifunction display 54
Conditions for pairing 164
Conference call 170
Configuration wizard 133
Connect external device to the Infotainment
hotspot 175
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device 175
Convenience operation
Tilting / sliding sunroof 72
Coolant
280
Checking 280
Refilling 280
Temperature display 38
Warning light 47
CORNER
77
Correct routing of seat belt
22
Correct seating position 19, 21
Crew Protect Assist 253
Cruise control
activate
241
lever 241
Cruise Control System 241
Cup holders 98
D
DAB 148
additional information 148
Radio Text and images presentation 148
Set 140, 147
DAB Slideshow 148
Data connection
Amundsen 173
CarStick 173
Internet 173
rSAP 174
Data Connection
Columbus
173
SIM card
174
Data roaming 139
Data transfer of external devices 133
Date 137, 145
DAY LIGHT
see Daytime running lights
74
Daytime running lights 74
DCC 50, 251
De-icing the windscreen and rear window 80
Deactivation
Airbag
28
default settings 203
Default settings 138
Delayed locking of the boot lid
See boot lid 67
Delete destination 194
Demo mode
144, 195
Destination
Enter destination using the address 185
enter in map 186
Favourite 194
final destinations
187
Home address 188
Image with GPS 190
323
Index
Map point 186
Memory 194
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 184
Destination details 194
Destination management
Destination details 194
Favourite 194
Storage 194
Diesel 275
Diesel fuel 275
Digital clock 51
Digital instrument cluster 39
Code options 40
Display 40
Map 193
Sets the map display 143
Turn the map display on / off 182
Digital service schedule
58
Dipped beam 74
Dipstick 279
Directive 2014/53/EU 9
Direct tire pressure control system 261
Disclaimer
applications
126
external devices 126
Mobile phones 126
Display
Coolant temperature 38
Fuel level
39
Gear changes 51
In the instrument cluster 51
Rear centre console 39
Display information on sporty driving in Info-
tainment
52
Display of a low temperature 49
Display of the instrument cluster
Menus in the display of the instrument clus-
ter 56
Display POIs in the map 186
Display when the light is switched off
indicator light 48
Distance warning 249
Diverting calls 141
Door
Child safety lock 65
Door edge protection 64
Emergency locking 302
Emergency locking of the driver's door 301
Open / Close 64
Door alarm 51
Door edge protection 64
Drive
Driving through water 215
DriveGreen
214
Driver information system 51
Driving
Emissions 314
Fuel consumption 314
Maximum speed
317
through water 215
Driving mode 251
Adaptive chassis (DCC) 251
Comfort 252
Eco 251
Individual
252
Mode selection and Infotainment display 253
Normal 252
Settings for individual mode 253
Snow 252
Sports
252
Driving Mode Selection 251
DSR 218
DVD 153
DVD-Video
Select video source 159
Set to 141
DVD video
Menu 159
DVD video menu 159
Dynamic Road Sign Display
Additional display 259
Information messages 259
Malfunctions 259
Operation 258
Settings in Infotainment 258
Dynamic route 202
E
Easy Entry 89
Economical driving 214
Economy mode
Warning light 50
Edit route
197
EDR 8
EDS 218
Electrical boot lid
set the top position of the lid 68
Electrical power windows
71
Electric boot lid
Force limiter 67
Manual operation 67
Open/close 68
Electric parking brake 208
Electric power windows
70
Malfunctions 71
Electric tail gate
Malfunctions 69
Electric windows
Buttons on the driver door
70
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL, XDS) 218
Electronic immobilizer 204
324
Index
Elevation 181
emergency
Jump-starting 297
Starting the engine / stopping the push of a
button 206
Emergency
Changing a wheel 290
Hazard warning light system 78
Jump-starting 296
Starting the engine / stopping the engine at
the push of a button 205
Towing the using the tow hitch 299
Towing the vehicle 298
Tyre repair 294
Unlocking/locking the door 301
Unlocking / locking the door 302
Emergency call 16, 168
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher
289
First aid kit 289
Jack 290
Reflective vest 289
Vehicle tool kit 290
Warning triangle
289
Emergency spare
Removing/stowing 291
Emission control system 44
Emissions 314
Engine
Information messages
47
Running in 214
Engine compartment 277
Brake fluid 281
Coolant 280
Engine oil
279
Overview 278
Vehicle battery 282
Windscreen washer fluid 279
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 218
Engine number 313
Engine oil 279
Check 279
Oil changing 279
Refilling 279
specification 279
Warning light 47, 48
Engine revolutions counter 38
Enter destination 185, 186
EPC 44
equalizer 137
ESC
ESC Sport 217
Operation 217
Event Data Recorder 8
External device data transfer 138, 145
External devices
Disclaimer 126
External module
128
CD / DVD 153
SD card 154
SIM card 167
Video DVD 159
F
Factory settings 146
Familiarizing yourself with the vehicle 2
Fastening elements 109
Fatigue detection
Fatigue detection system 259
Fatigue detection system
259
Favourite 187, 194
File formats
Media 156
Pictures 158
Requirements and Restrictions
156
Video DVD 160
Find
Car park 186
Petrol station 186
Restaurant 186
Finish route guidance 196
Fire extinguisher 289
First aid kit 289
Flagged destination 187
Flashing 75
Floor covering in the luggage compartment 111
Flooring in the luggage compartment 111
Floor mats 211
See Floor mats 211
FM 148
Set 140, 146
Fog lights 77
Warning light 46
Fog lights/rear fog light 77
Foils
270
Folding table 103
Force limiter
Electric boot lid 67
Sliding/tilting sunroof 72
Tilting / sliding sunroof
72
Window 71
Front assist
Warning light 50
Front Assist 249
Disable/enable 251
Distance warning
249
Malfunctions 251
Operation 249
Pedestrian recognition 250
Radar sensor 216
Settings in Infotainment
249
Warning and automatic braking 250
Warning light 50
325
Index
Front head restraints
Adjust height 91
Front seats 86
Fuel 273
Diesel 275
Fuel gauge 39
refer to Fuel 273
Refuelling 273
Unleaded petrol 274
Warning light 46
Fuel consumption 314
Fuel filter 49
Fuel reserve 46
Functional surfaces 129
Fuses 304
in the dashboard 305, 306
in the engine compartment 307
Plastic clip 307
G
Gearbox
Information messages 47
Gear change
Gear recommendation 51
Information on the selected gear
51
Gear changing
lever 211
Genuine parts 267
Glasses storage box 100
GPS 181
Graphical driving recommendations
196
H
hand gestures 131
Hazard warning light system 78
HBA 219
Headrests
91
Heating 117, 118
Air distribution control 121
Mirrors 84
Seats 92
Steering wheel 94
Windscreen and rear window 80
High-beam assistant 49
High beam
Light Assist 76
Hill Descent Assist 220
Hill Descent Assistant 50
Hill Start Assist 219
hitch 263
Hitch 262
Home address 143, 188
HOME button 133
HOME main screen 133
Hook 110
Horn
37
Hotspot
Connect 175
Set 175
I
I-PAD Holder 107
I-Size 34
Ignition lock 205
Images
Display 141
main menu 157
safe removal of the data source
138
Select Image Source 157
service 158
Set to 141
Image viewer 157
Immobilizer
204
import
Destinations (online) 190
Objectives (vCard) 189
POI categories 189
POI categories (online) 182, 190
Routes (online) 198
Import contacts 141
In-car communication
See Electronic voice amplification 132
Inertia reels 24
Information about the towing process 298
Information call 168
Information system 51
Gear recommendation 51
Menus in the display of the instrument clus-
ter 56
Multifunction display 54
Service interval display 58
infotainment Description
Columbus
126
Infotainment description
Amundsen 127
Bolero 127
Swing
128
Infotainment gesture control 131
Infotainment language 138, 145
Infotainment menus
Grid display 132
Horizontal display 132
Infotainment Online
18
Infotainment operation 129
Infotainment screen 129
Infotainment operation using an application in
the external device 133
Infotainment Overview
126
Infotainment restart 131
326
Index
Infotainment screen 137, 145
Areas 129
Important information 128
keyboard 130
Maintenance 128
Operation 129
Infotainment system 126
Input screen
Language characters 145
Input screen with keyboard 130
Instrument cluster 38
Digital 39
Vehicle condition 52
Warning lights 41
Interior light 79
Interior lighting 79
Interior lights
Ambient lighting 80
Interior monitor
66
Intermediate target 194
Internet 173
Amundsen 173
CarStick 173
Columbus
173
rSAP 174
SIM card 174
ISOFIX 32, 33
J
Jack
290
- fit
294
Journey 55
Jukebox 155
Jump-starting 296, 297
K
KESSY
deactivating 62
Starting engine / Stopping 205
Switching the ignition on/off 205
Unlock / lock 62
key
Starting engine / Stopping 205
Key
Changing battery 299, 300
Switching the ignition on/off 205
Take out emergency key 61
keyboard
130
key CAR
203
L
L-band 140
Lamp failure 48
Lamps
Warning light
48
Lane Assist 46, 254
Malfunctions 256
Settings in Infotainment 255
Lane Departure Warning 254
Activation / deactivation
233, 256
Operation
255
Lane recommendation 196
Language characters 138
Laptimer
Display of the instrument cluster 57
infotainment
53
Last destinations 187
Latitude 181
LEAVING HOME 77
LED headlights 76
lever
ACC 246
Cruise control 241
Speed limiter with ACC 243
Speed limiter with GRA 243
Speed limiter without GRA 243
Lever
Operation of the information system 53
Turn signal/main beam 75
Windscreen wipers 82, 83
Liability for defects 6
Light 74
Cockpit 78
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 77
Daytime running lights 74
Flash 75
Fog lights/rear fog light 77
Function CORNER 77
Hazard warning light system
78
Headlight cleaning system 83
LED headlights 76
Light Assist 76
Parking light 78
Replacing bulbs
308
Turn signal/main beam 75
Light Assist 76
See Light Assist 76
Lighting
Ambient lighting 80
Entry space
78
Interior lighting 78
Luggage compartment 108
Lights
Automatic driving light control 75
Dipped beam
74
Driving abroad 78
Headlight range control 74
Parking lights 74
327
Index
Switching on and off 74
Warning lights 41
List
of available stations 149
of telephone contacts 168
With folder / track list 152
List of available hotspots 175
List of paired external devices 166
List of traffic reports 201
Load 314
Location Services 16
Lock
Individual settings 63
KESSY 62
Locking
Central locking button 62
in case of emergency 302
Remote control 61
Lock steering lock
204
Longitude 181
Luggage compartment 108
Cargo elements 113
Fastening elements 109
Fastening the flooring
111
Fixing nets 109
Floor covering on both sides 111
foldable hook 110
Lighting 108
Net partition 112
Removable light
114
Side pockets 113
unlock manually 302
Unlock the boot lid 302
Variable loading floor 114
Luggage compartment cover
111
Luggage Storage
Roll-up cover 111
M
Main beam 75
Warning light 46
main menu
Android car 178
Apple carplay 179
Images 157
MirrorLink® 179
radio 148
Main menu
DVD 159
Media 151
Media Command 161
Navigation 182
SmartLink 177
SMS 171
Waypoint mode 199
WLAN 174
Make up mirror
81
Manage favourites 147
Manage Favourites 141
Manage memory 143
Management of online services 15
Management of online services ŠKODA Con-
nect
146
Management of ŠKODA Connect Online Serv-
ices 139
Managing paired devices 166
Managing saved routes 198
Manoeuvre
Graphical driving recommendations
196
Nav. announcements 196
Manual air conditioning
Air distribution control 121
Controls
118
Manual gear changing
See Gear changing 211
Map
automatic scale 191
Display 183
Display options 191
Display options in the split screen 193
Display POIs 186
Fast Map 191
in the digital instrument cluster 193
Lane recommendations 143
Main menu 183
Manual scale 191
Map alignment 192
Operation 183
POI display 143
Road Signs 193
Traffic sign display 143
|Alignment 192
Maximum speed 317
MCB
219
media
serve 151
USB 98, 154
Media
Audio source
153
Bluetooth Audio 155
Browser 152
CD / DVD 153
Compatible sources 156
File formats 156
Jukebox
155
List 152
Main menu 151
Multimedia database 152
Playback control 151
Requirements and Restrictions
156
safe removal of the data source 138
Safe removal of the data source 145
SD card 154
Setting 141
Set to
147
328
Index
Voice control 134
WLAN 155
Media Command
Control 161
Main menu 161
Supported formats 161
Memory 55
Memory Function for the seat 87
Menus in the display of the instrument clus-
ter 56
Apple CarPlay 56
audio menu item 56
Main menu 56
navigation menu item 56
Operation 53
phone Menu item 56
wizard menu item 57
Middle seat
Seat backrest
90
Mirror 81, 83
MirrorLink® 179
MODE button
See driving mode 251
Modes of the automatic transmission
212
Modifications and technical alterations 267
Most common routes 196
MSR 218
Multicollision brake (MCB) 219
Multifunctional steering wheel 53
Multifunction display
Functions
54
Information Overview 54
Memory 55
multimedia
see media
151
Multimedia database 152
Mute 132
MyŠKODA App application 11
N
navigation
additional window 184
Contacts 187
destination search 184
Favourites 187
Map orientation 192
route list 198
target import 189
target memory 187
Update navigation data online 182
Working with the navigation 181
Navigation
Abort route guidance 197
Advanced settings 144
Alternative route 143
Demo mode 144, 195
Destination address 185
Destination details
194
Destination display 191
Destination in map 186
Destination presentation in the split screen 193
Dynamic route 143
Edit route
197
Final destinations 187
Finish route guidance 196
Foreword 181
GPS 181
Graphical driving recommendations 196
Home address
188
Image with GPS 190
Imported destinations 143
Intermediate target 194
Main menu 182
Manage memory
143
Map 143
Map alignment 192
Map display in the digital instrument cluster 193
Map display options 191
Map scale 191
Most common routes 196
Navigation data 182
Navigation data update 182
Nav. announcements 144, 196
Options for map display in the split screen 193
Preferred route type 143
Route 194
Route calculation 195
Route change 198
Route display 191
Route display in the split screen 193
Route guidance 194
Route information 197
Route options 143
Route schedule 197
Set to 143
Start the route guidance 195
Status line
144
Tank options 144
Top speeds 144
Traffic obstruction 202
Trailer towing 195
Transit point
198
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 184
Update the navigation data 144
Version information 144
Voice control 134
Waypoint mode
199
navigation data 182
Navigation data 182
Navigation data update 182
Nav. announcements 144, 196
Net in the front centre console
100
Net partition 112
Nets 109
329
Index
Network
Data connection 139
Data roaming 139
setting 139
set to 141
Values of the downloaded data 139
New route 198
Notes 12
O
Offroad 50, 219
Hill Descent Assist 220
Infotainment display 221
Offroad mode
See Offroad 219
oil
see Engine oil 279
Oil changing
Engine oil 279
On-board computer
see multifunction display
54
On-line
destination search 184
Detail of the traffic report 202
Import POI categories
182, 190
route import 198
target import 187, 190
Update navigation data 182
Online
Destination details 194
Find car park
186
Find petrol station 186
List of traffic reports 201
Navigation data update 182
Online goals 187
Online services
Deleting the user
14
Electronic Owner's Manual 14
Instruction video 14
private mode 15
service management 15
Switching user 14
Switch online services in the service workshop
off/on 15
Switch online services on/off in infotainment 15
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 13
Online Services 13
Activation in Infotainment 14
Care Connect 17
Infotainment Online 18
Location Services 16
proactive service 17
Remote access to the vehicle 17
Service package 13
Status Symbols of Online Services 16
ŠKODA Connect website 13
Online services ŠKODA Connect
enable service
146
Opening/closing
contactless boot lid 69
opening/closing contactless boot lid 69
Operating the digital instrument cluster
40
Operating the Infotainment menus 130
Operating weight 313
Operation
Telephone 162, 163
Original accessories 267
Overhang angle
316
Overview
Cockpit 37
Engine compartment 278
Fuses 304
Warning lights
41
Own POI categories 189, 190
P
Pairing process 164
Park
Area View (AreaView) 231
Rear traffic alert 225
Park assist
Parking 237
Park Assist 234
Automatic brake assist 238
Departing from a parallel parking space 238
Malfunctions 238
Operation 235
Parking
238
Parking space search
236
Switch to park mode 236
Park assistant
Activation/deactivation 227
Parking 210
Park Assist
234
Parking sensors 221
Rear View Camera 228
Parking aid
Automatic emergency braking 224
automatic system activation when moving for-
ward
224
Display in Infotainment screen 223
Operation 222
Settings in Infotainment 222
Parking assistance
Activation / deactivation
224
Parking brake 208
Warning light 42
Parking lights 74
Parking sensors 221
Parking the vehicle
see Parking
210
Parking ticket holder 96
Park pilot 221
330
Index
Particulate Filter 48
Part replacement 267
Passive safety
Before setting off 19
Driving safety 19
Passive Safety 19
Pedals 211
Floor mats 211
Personalisation
Configuration wizard 133
Personalization 59
Operating principle 59
Overview of some personalized functions 59
Set 60
Petrol 274
Petrol station 186
Petrol station logo 143
phone
connect to the infotainment
164
couple 164
Phone
Adjust text messages 141
Clear calls 141
Diverting calls
141
Import contacts 141
Manage Favourites 141
Phone call 170
Premium 141
rSAP 164
Settings call
141
set to 141
User profile 141
Phonebox 97
Phone call 170
Phone Premium
SIM card
167
Pictures
Compatible sources 158
File formats 158
Requirements and restrictions 158
Supported file formats 158
Pin code
set to 141
Playback
Media 151
Pockets 102
POI 189, 190
POIs 186
Pop-up window
Map 193
Power steering 43
Practical equipment
230-volt socket 105
Practical features
12-volt socket in the interior
104
12 volt socket in luggage compartment 105
Ashtray 106
Cigarette lighter 107
Glasses storage box 100
Parking ticket holder
96
Pockets 102
Reflective vest 289
Storage compartment 95
Storage compartment for umbrella 102
Storage compartment under the front seat 101
Waste container
99
Preferred contacts 169
Preheating unit 44
Principles of Infotainment operation 129
Private mode 15
Proactive occupant protection
253
Proactive passenger protection warning light 44
Proactive service 17
Puncture repair kit 294
R
radio
Broadcasting 148
main menu 148
Radio stations Logo 149, 150
scan 148
serve 148
Radio
L-band 140
List of available stations 149
Set 140, 146
Traffic program (TP) 150
Voice control 134
Radio equipment
Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 9
Radio remote control
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion) 124
Radio station
149
Preset buttons 149
Radio station logos 149, 150
Update 139
radio stations
Select channels and search
148
Raising the vehicle 294
RDK
direct tire pressure control system 261
Rear fog light 77
Warning light 44
Rear seats
88
Rear traffic alert 225
Rear Traffic Alert
Malfunctions 227
Operation 226
Rear View Camera
228
Rear view mirror 83
Rear window - heating 80
Record waypoints 199
331
Index
Refill
Windscreen washer fluid 279
refilling
AdBlue 275
Refilling
Coolant 280
Engine oil 279
Reflective vest 289
Refuelling 273
Fuel 273
Register online services
settings 139, 146
Registration of online services
Electronic Owner's Manual 14
Instruction video 14
Regulation
Headlight beam 74
Remote access to the vehicle 17
Remote control
Changing battery
299, 300
Synchronisation process 65
Unlocking/locking 61
Remote transfer of SIM data 164
Removable light
114
Changing batteries 301
Removable through-loading bag 103
Repairs and technical alterations 267
Replace
Battery 301
Replacing
Bulbs
308
Fuses 304
Windscreen wiper blades 303
Reproduction
Video DVD
159
Reset counter for distance driven (trip) 51
Restaurant 186
Reversible belt tensioners 25
Rims 285
Road Signs
infotainment display 193
Roller blind
See luggage compartment cover 111
Roof
Load 116
Roof racks 116
route
new route 198
Online Route Import 198
route list 198
Route 194
Store route 197
Route calculation 195
Trailer towing 195
Route information 197
route list 198
Route options
143
Route schedule 197
rSAP 164
Data connection 174
Running in
Brake pads
208
Engine 214
Tyres 285
S
SafeLock
63
Safe removal of the data source 138, 145
Safety
19
Airbag 25
Child safety 29
Child seats 29
Correct seating position 19
Headrests
91
I-Size 34
ISOFIX 32, 33
TOP TETHER 34
SAFE, SAFELOCK
See SafeLock 63
Save radio
Save channel 149
Saving electrical energy 214
Saving fuel 214
Scraper 271
Screen
see Infotainment screen 128
Screen display 129
SD card 154
Safe removal 145
search
aim 184
Online goals 184
Search
Types of destination search/destination en-
try
184
Seat belt
height adjustment 22
Warning light
42, 47
Seat belts 22
Belt tensioners 24
fastening and unfastening 23
Inertia reels 24
Seat electrical adjustment 86
Seats
Electrical adjustment
86
Folding front passenger seat 88
Front 86
Front armrest 88
Headrests
91
Heating 93, 94
Manually adjusting 86
Memory Function of the electrically adjustable
seat 87
332
Index
Rear 88
Setting 86
Storing in memory of remote control key 87
Ventilation 94
Second row of seats
Headrests 91
Second seat row
Easy Entry 89
Fold forward seat backrests 90
Fold seat backrests forward 89
Setting 88
see Instrument cluster
see Instrument cluster 38
Selector lever 212
Selector lever control 212
Selector lever lock 46
service
Images 158
media
151
radio 148
Service 267
Service interval display 58
Warning light 50
Service interval
58
Service interval display 58
Service intervals 58
Service schedule 58
Setting
Headrests 91
Mirror
84
Positions of the variable loading floor 115
Seat belt height 22
Seats 86
Time 51
settings
Bass tones
137
equalizer 137
infotainment 137, 145
Reset to factory settings 203
Software Update 136
sound 137
sound system 137
surround 137
system information 136
ŠKODA Connect 146
vehicle 203
Settings
Additional keypad languages 138, 145
Advanced settings 144
APN 139, 167
Bluetooth 139, 141, 146
Codecs 141
Configuration wizard 133
DAB 140, 147
Data connection 139
External device data transfer 138, 145
FM 140, 146
Images
141
Information regarding the version of the navi-
gation data 144
Infotainment language 138, 145
Infotainment screen 137, 145
Manage favourites
169
Manage memory 143
Map 143
Media 141, 147
Navigation 143
Nav. announcements 144
Network
139
Phone 141
Pin code 141
Radio 140, 146
Reset to factory settings 138
Restore factory settings
146
Route options 143
SmartLink+ 142, 147
Software updates 146
Sound 145
System information
139, 146
ŠKODA Connect 139
Tank options 144
Telephone 147
Time and date 137, 145
Top speeds 144
Units 138, 145
Update software 139
User profile 169
Video DVD 141
Voice control 138
Volume 132
WLAN 139
Settings Call
Clear calls SettingsText messages 141
Set to
Auxiliary heating (auxiliary heating and ventila-
tion) 123
Side compartments in the luggage compart-
ment
113
SIM card
Change PIN code 167
Data Connection 174
Insert 167
PIN code
167
Remove 167
Sleep package
Blanket 104
Headrest 91
Sliding/tilting roof
Activate operation
73
Activating operation of the sunblind 73
Sunshade 73
SmartLink 176
Android Auto 177
Apple CarPlay
178
Introduction to the subject 176
Main menu 177
MirrorLink® 179
333
Index
SmartLink+
Set 142, 147
ŠKODA OneApp application 180
SMS
Main menu 171
New message 171
Received message 172
Snow chains 288
Sockets
12-volt socket in the interior 104
12 volt socket in luggage compartment 105
230 V 105
Software Update 136, 139
Software updates 146
SOS button 16
sound 137
Sound 145
sound system 137
Spare wheel
287
Removing/stowing 291
Removing / stowing (sound system) 292
Speed limitations 196
speed limiter
activate
243
lever 243
Lever with ACC 243
Speed limiter 46, 242
Speed regulating system
Warning light 46
Speed symbol
287
Split screen
Manoeuvre 196
Spoiler 268
Sports information 52
Sporty driving
information
52
SSID 139
Stabilisation system 217
Stability Control (ESC) 43, 217
Standby 131
START-STOP
Jump-starting 297
Manually disable / enable system 207
Warning light 49
Start engine 205
Immobilizer 204
Jump-starting 297
starter button
Starting engine / Stopping 205
Starter button
Lock / unlock the steering lock 204
Problems with the engine start 206
Switching the ignition on/off 205
Starting the engine
Jump-starting 296
Start route guidance 195
START STOP
206
functionality 206
START STOP system 206
Status bar 129
Status line 183
Navigation
144
Telephone 162, 163
Status Symbols of Online Services 16
Steering lock (KESSY system) 43
Steering wheel
Buttons 53
Heating
94
proper posture 20
setting 21
Stop engine 205
Stopping
see Parking
210
stopwatch
Display of the instrument cluster 57
infotainment 53
Storage 95
Storage compartments
see Practical features 95
Storage net 100
Stored destinations
Final destinations 187
target memory 187
Store destination 194
Storing
seats 87
Sunshade of the sliding/tilting roof 73
Sun visor 81
Sun visors 81
Supported sources
Media 156
surround 137
Swing
Infotainment description 128
Switching off the ignition
205
Switching on the ignition 205
Switching the lights on and off 74
Switch off
Alarm 66
switch on / offTraffic
dynamic route
202
system information 136
System information 139, 146
T
Tablet holder
107
Tailgate
67
Tank options 144
target memory 187
TCS 43
Technical data 313
telephone
conditions for pairing
164
334
Index
Telephone
Additional telephone 165
Bluetooth Profiles 166
Bluetooth® update 164
Breakdown call 168
Call list 170
Compatibility 164
Conference call 170
Connection types 165
Dialling the telephone number 168
Emergency call 168
Enter telephone number 168
Functions 168
Import contacts 147
Information call 168
Introductory information 162
Main menu 162, 163
Main telephone 165
Manage favourites
147
Operation 162, 163
Pairing process 164
Preferred contacts 169
rSAP 165
Set
147
SIM card 165
Telephone 162, 163
Telephone book 168
Text messages (SMS) 171
User profile 147
Voice control
134
Voicemail 168
Telephone book 168
Telephone compatibility 164
Telephone connection types 165
Telephone functions
168
Telephone number 168
Telephone Premium
rSAP 164
Text messages 171
Third seat row
Fold down 90
Height of headrests 92
Third seat seat
fold 90
Through-loading bag 103
Tilting / sliding sunroof
Operation 72
Time 51, 137, 145
Time and date display in the Infotainment
screen 131
Tiptronic 213
Tire
Wear indicator 286
Tire pressure monitoring
see direct tire pressure control system 261
TMC
Detail of the traffic report 202
dynamic route
202
List of traffic reports 201
Tools 290
Top speeds 144
TOP TETHER 34
Touch screen
128
Towing 298, 299
Towing a trailer 266
Towing device
Accessories 263
Vertical load 262
Towing eye
298
Towing protection 66
Towing the vehicle 298
Traction control (ASR) 218
Traction control (TCS) 43
traffic
Detail of the traffic report
202
Traffic
List of traffic reports 201
Traffic Information (TMC) 202
Traffic jam 202
Traffic jam assistant 256
Traffic obstruction 202
Traffic program (TP) 150
Traffic reports (TMC) 201
Traffic sign recognition 257
Traffic signs
see Traffic sign recognition 257
Trailer
Connect and disconnect 263
Load 264
loading 264
Towing a trailer 266
Trailer Assist 239
Trailer manoeuvring assistant 239
Activation / deactivation 240
Automatic brake intervention 240
Manoeuvring
240
Operating principle 239
Trailer stabilisation system (TSA) 219
Trailer towing 262
navigation 195
Trailer towing device
Handling
262
Warning message 262
Transit point 198
transmitter
See main menu 148
Transport
Luggage compartment
108
Roof racks 116
Towing device and trailer 262
Transporting children 29
Triangle
289
TSA 219
Turning off Infotainment 131
Turning on Infotainment 131
335
Index
Turn signal 75
Turn signal system
Warning light 46
Tutorial videos 11
Type plate 313
Tyre load capacity 287
Tyre pressure 285
Warning light 45
Tyre pressure monitoring 260
Warning light 45
Tyre Pressure Monitoring
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotain-
ment display 260
Tyre repair 294
Tyres 285
damage 285
Explanation of the label 287
new 285
Tyre pressure
285
Tyre size 287
U
Units 138, 145
Unlock
Individual settings
63
KESSY 62
Unlocking
Central locking button 62
in case of emergency 301
Remote control 61
Unlocking and locking
60
Unlock steering lock 204
Update navigation data 182
Update the navigation data 144
USB 98, 154
Safe removal
145
Useful equipment
Clothes hook 102
Cup holders 98
Removable through-loading bag 103
Useful links 2
User account
Configuration wizard 133
User profile 141, 147
V
Variable loading floor 114
vCard 187, 189
Vehicle - Settings 203
Vehicle battery
charging 283
Checking the condition 283
Disconnecting and reconnecting 283
in he luggage compartment 283
in the engine compartment 278
Replacing
283
Safety instructions 282
Warning light 47
Winter operation 283
Vehicle care
Exterior
271
Outside 270
Vehicle cleaning
Exterior 271
Windscreens 271
Vehicle condition
Auto check control
52
Vehicle dimensions 315
Vehicle height 315
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 313
Vehicle length 315
vehicle systems
203
Vehicle tool kit 290
Vehicle width 315
Ventilation
Seats 92
Vest 289
video DVD
Main menu 159
Video DVD
Compatible sources 160
Play back 159
Supported file formats 160
video player 159
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number 313
Virtual pedal
see operating contactless boot lid 69
Visibility 80
Visors 81
Voice amplification 132
Voice control 134
Commands
135
Correction of a voice command input 135
Help 135
Not recognising a voice command 135
on / off 134
Operation principle
135
Settings 138
Stop / restore command 135
Voicemail 168
Volume 132
Volume setting 132
W
Waiter
Voice control 135
Warning lights 41
Warning symbols
see Warning lights
41
Warning triangle 289
Warning when speeding 55
336
Index
Warranty 6
Washing the vehicle 269
Waste container 99
Water in the fuel filter 49
Waypoint mode 199
Main menu 199
Record waypoints 199
Set waypoint manually 199
Waypoint tour memory 200
Waypoint tour memory 200
Weather conditions 267
Weights 313, 314
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts 293
Caps 293
Loosening and tightening 293
Wheels 285
Changing 290
Full trim
292
Load Index 287
Snow chains 288
Speed symbol 287
Tyre age 285
Tyre damage
285
Tyre pressure 285
Tyre storage 285
Uni-directional tires 285
Winter tyres 287
Window
operation
70
Window convenience operation 71
Window operation 70
Windscreen - heating 80
Windscreen washer fluid
Refill
279
Warning light 49
Windscreen washing system 81
Windscreen wipers and washers 81
Activation 82
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 304
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 303
Service position of the windscreen wiper
arms 303
Winter operation 287
All season tyres 287
Diesel fuel 275
Snow chains 288
Vehicle battery 283
Winter tyres 287
Winter tyres 287
Wiper and Washers
Automatic rear window wipers 83
Wipers and washer
Warning light for windscreen washer fluid lev-
el 49
Wipers and washers
Activate
83
Refill fluid 279
Wiping interval 82
Wireless Internet Hotspot
set to
139
Wizard for blind spot monitoring 225
Driving situations and warnings 226
Operation 226
WLAN 155, 174
Client 175
Connect
175
Connect to hotspot 175
Set hotspot 175
Switch hotspot on/off 174
WPS 139, 175
WLAN client
set to
139
WLAN Client 175
WPS 139, 175
X
XDS 218
Other Characters
ŠKODA Connect
register 146
Register 139
see Online Services 13
services Manager 146
Services Manager 139
Set 139
set to 146
ŠKODA Connect Online Services
Enable services 139
Register
139
ŠKODA OneApp application 180
337
Index
338
Index
339
Index
Reprinting, duplicating, translating and any other use, either in whole or in part,
is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2018
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Kodiaq anglicky 11.2018
565012720AE

565012720AE
3


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 59,74 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Skoda Kodiaq - 2018

Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 Quick start guide - English - 36 pages

Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 Quick start guide - German - 36 pages

Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 User Manual - German - 360 pages

Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 User Manual - Dutch - 356 pages

Skoda Kodiaq - 2018 User Manual - French - 360 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info